John

John front

Introduction to the Gospel of John

Part 1: General Introduction

Outline of the Gospel of John

Introduction about who Jesus is (1:1–18)
John the Baptizer baptizes Jesus, and Jesus chooses 12 disciples (1:19–51)
Jesus preaches, teaches, and heals people (2–11)
The seven days before Jesus’ death (12–19)
- Mary anoints the feet of Jesus (12:1–11)
- Jesus rides a donkey into Jerusalem (12:12–19)
- Some Greek men want to see Jesus (12:20–36)
- The Jewish leaders reject Jesus (12:37–50)
- Jesus teaches his disciples (13–16)
- Jesus prays for himself and his disciples (17)
- Jesus is arrested and undergoes trial (18:1–19:15)
- Jesus is crucified and buried (19:16–42)
Jesus rises from the dead (20:1–29)
John says why he wrote his Gospel (20:30–31)
Jesus meets with the disciples (21)

More detailed outlines are in the General Notes for each chapter.

What is the Gospel of John about?

The Gospel of John is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life and teachings of Jesus Christ. These books are called “Gospels,” which means “good news.” Their authors wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. John said that he wrote his Gospel “so that people might believe that Jesus is the Christ, the Son of the living God” (20:31). John’s Gospel repeatedly emphasizes that Jesus is God in human form.

John’s Gospel is very different from the other three Gospels. John does not include some of the teachings and events that the other writers included in their Gospels. Also, John wrote about some teachings and events that are not in the other Gospels.

John wrote much about the miraculous signs Jesus did to prove that what Jesus said about himself was true. (See: sign, proof, reminder)

How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of John” or “The Gospel According to John.” Or they may choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News About Jesus That John Wrote.” (See: How to Translate Names)

Who wrote the Gospel of John?

This book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the apostle John was the author. Further evidence that the apostle John wrote this Gospel is the fact that his name does not occur once within the book. Instead, this Gospel contains the phrases “the disciple whom Jesus loved” or “the other disciple” in places where the other Gospels indicate that John was present (13:23–25; 19:26–27; 20:2–8; 21:7, 20–24). The apostle John most likely referred to himself in this manner because he wanted to humbly say that he had a very close relationship with Jesus. He was part of Jesus’ inner circle of disciples who became the “pillars” of the early church (Galatians 2:9).

Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

Why does John write so much about the final week of Jesus’ life?

John wrote much about Jesus’ final week. He wanted his readers to think deeply about Jesus’ final week and his death on the cross. He wanted people to understand that Jesus willingly died on the cross so that God could forgive them for sinning against him. (See: sin, sinful, sinner, sinning)

Part 3: Important Translation Issues

Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?

In the Gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” This is a reference to Daniel 7:13–14. In that passage, there is a person who is described as like a “son of man.” That means that the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to this “son of man” to rule over the nations forever. All people will worship him forever.

Jews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. But Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: Son of Man, son of man)

Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.

What does the word “sign” mean in the Gospel of John?

While other New Testament writers use terms like “mighty works” or “wonders” to refer to the miracles that Jesus did, John prefers to use the term “sign.” The miracles John calls “signs” were significant displays of divine power. John called them signs to emphasize that an important purpose of Jesus’ miracles was to prove that Jesus was God and that what Jesus said about himself was true. John said that in his Gospel he only wrote about some of the signs that Jesus did. John said, “these have been written so that you would believe that Jesus is the Christ, the Son of God, and so that believing, you would have life in his name” (20:30–31).

What do the words “remain,” “reside,” and “abide” mean in the Gospel of John?

John often used the words “remain,” “reside,” and “abide” as metaphors. John spoke of a believer becoming more faithful to Jesus and knowing Jesus better as if Jesus’ word “remained” in the believer. John also spoke of someone being spiritually joined to someone else as if the person “remained” in the other person. Christians are said to “remain” in Christ and in God. The Father is said to “remain” in the Son, and the Son is said to “remain” in the Father. The Son is said to “remain” in believers. The Holy Spirit is also said to “remain” in the believers.

Many translators will find it impossible to represent these ideas in their languages in exactly the same way. For example, Jesus intended to express the idea of the Christian being spiritually together with him when he said, “He who eats my flesh and drinks my blood remains in me, and I in him” (6:56). The UST uses the idea of “will be united with me, and I will be united with them,” but translators may have to find other ways of expressing the idea.

In the passage, “my words remain in you” (15:7), the UST expresses this idea as “obey what I have taught you.” Translators may find it possible to use this translation as a model.

What is double meaning in the Gospel of John?

John occasionally used words or phrases that could have two meanings (double entendre) in the language in which he originally wrote this Gospel. For example, the phrase translated “born again” in the ULT could also mean “born from above” (3:3, 7). In such cases, you may want to choose one meaning and put the other meaning in a footnote.

What are the major issues in the text of the Gospel of John?

The following verses are found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions. Translators are advised not to translate these verses. However, if there are older versions of the Bible in the translators’ region that include these verses, then the translators can include them. If they are translated, they should be put inside square brackets (\[\]) to indicate that they were probably not originally in John’s Gospel.

“waiting for the moving of the water. For an angel of the Lord went down into the pool and stirred up the water at certain times, and whoever then first stepped in after the water was stirred was healed from whatever disease he suffered from.” (5:3-4)
“going through the midst of them, and so passed by” (8:59)

The following passage is included in most older and modern versions of the Bible. But it is not in the earliest copies of the Bible. Translators are advised to translate this passage. It should be put inside of square brackets (\[\]) to indicate that it may not have been original to John’s Gospel.

The story of the adulterous woman (7:53–8:11) (See: Textual Variants)

John 1

John 1 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

Jesus is God (1:1–5)
John the Baptist was Jesus’ witness (1:6–8)
Summary of Jesus’ ministry on earth (1:9–13)
Jesus is God in the flesh (1:14–18)
John the Baptist prepares the way for Jesus (1:19–34)
Jesus meets Andrew, Peter, Philip, and Nathaniel (1:35–51)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:23, which are words from the Old Testament.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

“The Word”

John uses the phrase “the Word” to refer to Jesus (1:1, 14). John is saying that God’s most important message to all people is actually Jesus, a person with a physical body. (See: word of God, word of Yahweh, word of the Lord, word of truth, scripture)

Light and Darkness

In 1:4–9, John uses an extended metaphor in which light represents what is true and good and darkness represents what is false and evil. John applies that light metaphor to Jesus in order to show that Jesus is God’s truth and goodness displayed in a human body. (See: righteous, righteousness, unrighteous, unrighteousness, upright, uprightness)

“Children of God”

People are sometimes described as “children of God” because God created them. However, John uses this expression in a different sense in this chapter. He uses it to describe people who have entered into a father-child relationship with God by putting their faith and trust in Jesus. God indeed created all people, but people can only become children of God in this sense by believing in Jesus. “Children” in this usage does not refer to those who are young, but only to the relationship that people have to their father at any age. (See: believe, believer, belief, unbeliever, unbelief)

Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

Metaphors

John uses the metaphors of light and darkness and of “the Word” to tell the reader that he will be writing more about good and evil and about what God wants to tell people through Jesus. (See: Metaphor)

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

“In the beginning”

Some languages and cultures speak of the world as if it has always existed, as if it had no beginning. But “very long ago” is different from “in the beginning,” and you need to be sure that your translation communicates correctly.

“Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter (1:51). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: Son of Man, son of man and First, Second or Third Person)

John 1:1

ἐν ἀρχῇ ἦν

This phrase refers to the very earliest time before God created the heavens and the earth. It does not refer to time in the distant past. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Before the beginning of the universe there was” or “Before the universe began there was” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ λόγος, καὶ ὁ λόγος…καὶ Θεὸς ἦν ὁ λόγος

Here, the Word refers to Jesus. It does not refer to a spoken word. ULT indicates this by capitalizing Word to indicate that this is a title for Jesus. Use whatever convention your language uses to indicate that this is a name. If “word” is feminine in your language, it could be translated as “the one who is called the Word.” Alternate translation: “Jesus, who is the Word, and Jesus … and Jesus was God” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 1:2

οὗτος

He here refers to Jesus, whom John has called “the Word” in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “the Word” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐν ἀρχῇ

Here this phrase refers to the very earliest time before God created the heavens and the earth. See how you translated this phrase in verse 1. Alternate translation: “before the beginning of the universe” or “before the universe began”

John 1:3

πάντα δι’ αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “God made all things through him” (See: Active or Passive)

αὐτοῦ

Here, him refers to Jesus, the one who is called “the Word.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “the Word” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

χωρὶς αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο οὐδὲ ἕν ὃ γέγονεν

If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “with him came into being everything that came into being” (See: Double Negatives)

χωρὶς αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο οὐδὲ ἕν ὃ γέγονεν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “God did not make one thing without him” or “with him, God made everyting that God has made” (See: Active or Passive)

John 1:4

ζωὴ

Here it is best to use a general term for life. (See: life, live, living, alive) If you must use a more specific word, consider that life here could refer to: (1) eternal life, which is the meaning John uses for this term throughout this Gospel. Alternate translation: “the means of receiving eternal life” (2) physical life, which would mean that this verse continues the discussion about the creation of the universe in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “the life of all living things” (3) both physical life and eternal life. Alternate translation: “the life of all living things and the source of eternal life” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

καὶ ἡ ζωὴ

Here, the life refers to the same life stated in the previous phrase. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and that life” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸ φῶς τῶν ἀνθρώπων

Here John uses light figuratively to refer to God’s truth and goodness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the true and good things God has for men” (See: Metaphor)

τὸ φῶς τῶν ἀνθρώπων

John uses of to indicate to whom the light is given. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the light given to men” (See: Possession)

τῶν ἀνθρώπων

Although the term men is masculine, John is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of people” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

John 1:5

τὸ φῶς…φαίνει

John uses the light shines figuratively to refer to God’s truth and goodness being revealed as if it were a light shining. This truth and goodness was revealed to the world by Jesus. He is the embodiment of God’s truth and goodness. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “God reveals his truth and goodness” or “God’s truth and goodness is like a light that shines” (See: Metaphor)

ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ…καὶ ἡ σκοτία

Here John uses darkness figuratively to refer to what is false and evil. It is the spiritual darkness of the people in the world who do not love Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “in the false and evil world, and that evil world” or “in the evil world that is like a dark place, and that dark place” (See: Metaphor)

αὐτὸ οὐ κατέλαβεν

Here the word translated overcome could also be translated as “understand.” It could mean: (1) the evil forces in the world did not conquer God’s truth and goodness. Alternate translation: “did not conquer it” (2) the people in the world who don’t know God do not understand his truth and goodness. Alternate translation: “did not comprehend it” (3) the evil forces of this world neither conquered nor understood God’s truth and goodness. Alternate translation: “did not conquer or comprehend it”

αὐτὸ οὐ κατέλαβεν

Here, it refers to the light mentioned earlier in the verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “did not overcome the light” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

John 1:6

ἀπεσταλμένος παρὰ Θεοῦ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “whom God has sent” (See: Active or Passive)

Ἰωάννης

Here, John refers to Jesus’ cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_tw/src/branch/master/bible/names/johnthebaptist.md) It does not refer to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 1:7

οὗτος

He here refers to John the Baptist, who was introduced in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

περὶ τοῦ φωτός

Here John uses light figuratively to refer to the revelation of God’s truth and goodness in Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “about Jesus, who revealed the true and good things of God” (See: Metaphor)

δι’ αὐτοῦ

Here, through him indicates the means by which everyone might believe in the light. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of him”

John 1:8

ἐκεῖνος

That one here refers to John the Baptist. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

τὸ φῶς…τοῦ φωτός

See how you translated light in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who revealed the true and good things of God … Jesus” (See: Metaphor)

John 1:9

τὸ φῶς τὸ ἀληθινὸν, ὃ

Here John uses light figuratively to refer to Jesus as the one who both reveals the truth about God and is himself that truth. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who truly embodied God’s truth, who” (See: Metaphor)

ὃ φωτίζει πάντα ἄνθρωπον

Here, John uses light figuratively to refer to God’s truth and goodness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “which reveals the true and good things of God to all men” (See: Metaphor)

ἄνθρωπον

Although the term men is masculine, John is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

John 1:10

ἦν…δι’ αὐτοῦ…αὐτὸν

He and him in this verse refer to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus was … through Jesus … Jesus” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ

Here, world refers to the earth on which people live. It does not refer only to the people in the world or to the entire universe. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on the earth” (See: Metonymy)

ὁ κόσμος

Here, world refers to the universe God created. It does not refer only to the people in the world or only to the earth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the whole universe” (See: Metonymy)

καὶ ὁ κόσμος αὐτὸν οὐκ ἔγνω

Here, and introduces a contrast between what was expected, that the world would recognize its Creator, and what happened, that the world did to do that. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but the world did not know him” or “yet the world did not know him” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

ὁ κόσμος

Here, world refers to the people who lived in it. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people in the world” (See: Metonymy)

οὐκ ἔγνω

Alternate translation: “did not acknowledge”

John 1:11

τὰ ἴδια…οἱ ἴδιοι

Here, his own could refer to: (1) his own people, the nation of Israel. Alternate translation: “his fellow Jews … his fellow Jews” (2) his own creation. Alternate translation: “the people he created … the people he created” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

καὶ

Here, and introduces a contrast between what was expected, that his own people would know their Messiah, and what happened, that his own people did not do that. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

αὐτὸν οὐ παρέλαβον

Here, receive means to accept a person into one’s presence with friendliness. Alternate translation: “did not accept him” or “did not welcome him”

John 1:12

ὅσοι δὲ ἔλαβον αὐτόν, ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ἐξουσίαν τέκνα Θεοῦ γενέσθαι, τοῖς πιστεύουσιν εἰς τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ

If it would be natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. You will also need to adjust some words to fit the new order. Alternate translation: “But as many as received him and believed in his name, he gave to them the authority to become children of God” (See: Information Structure)

ἔλαβον αὐτόν

Here, receive means to accept a person into one’s presence with friendliness. See how you translated this word in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “accepted him” or “welcomed him”

ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ἐξουσίαν

Here, the word translated authority means either the right or ability to do something. Alternate translation: “he gave to them the right” or “he made it possible for them”

τέκνα Θεοῦ

Here John uses children figuratively to refer to people who love and obey God. The relationship between God and those who love him is like the relationship between a father and his children. Because this is an important concept in the Bible, you should not state the meaning plainly here, but you may use a simile. Alternate translation: “like children who have God as their father” (See: Metaphor)

πιστεύουσιν εἰς τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ

Here John uses name figuratively to refer to Jesus’ identity and everything about him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who believed in him” (See: Metonymy)

John 1:13

οἳ

These here refers to the children of God mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be misunderstood for your readers, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οἳ οὐκ ἐξ αἱμάτων…ἐγεννήθησαν

John uses born figuratively to describe God changing a person from being spiritually dead to being spiritually alive when they believe in Jesus. John recorded Jesus referring to this change as being “born again” in 3:3. (See: born again, born of God, new birth) If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an expression that indicates spiritual rebirth rather than physical birth. Alternate translation: “These were born spiritually, not from blood” (See: Metaphor)

οὐκ ἐξ αἱμάτων…ἐγεννήθησαν

Here, bloods refers to the bloodlines or genetic contributions of both parents of a child. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were not born from human bloodlines” or “were not born from human decent” (See: Metaphor)

ἐξ

Here, from could refer to any of the following: (1) the means by which God’s children are born. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “by” (2) the source from which God’s children are born. Alternate translation: “of” (3) the cause of the birth of God’s children. Alternate translation: “as a result of”

οὐδὲ ἐκ θελήματος σαρκὸς

John is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “nor were they born from the will of the flesh” (See: Ellipsis)

ἐκ

ἐκ θελήματος σαρκὸς

Here John is using the term flesh figuratively to refer to a human being, which is made of flesh. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the human will” (See: Metonymy)

οὐδὲ ἐκ θελήματος ἀνδρὸς

ἐκ

ἐκ θελήματος ἀνδρὸς

The term man used here refers specifically to an adult male person and may also be translated “husband.” In this verse it refers to a father’s desire to have a child like himself. Alternate translation: “from the will of a husband”

ἀλλ’ ἐκ Θεοῦ

ἐκ

John 1:14

ὁ λόγος

Here, the Word refers to Jesus. It does not refer to a spoken word. ULT indicates this by capitalizing Word to indicate that this is a title for Jesus. Use whatever convention your language uses to indicate that this is a name. If “word” is feminine in your language, it could be translated as “the one who is called the Word.” See how you translated this in John 1:1. Alternate translation: “Jesus, the Word” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

σὰρξ ἐγένετο

Here, flesh represents “a person” or “a human being.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “became human” or “became a human being” (See: Synecdoche)

ἡμῖν, καὶ ἐθεασάμεθα

Here the pronouns us and we are exclusive since John is speaking on behalf of himself and the other eyewitnesses to the earthly life of Jesus, but the people to whom he is writing did not see Jesus. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ, δόξαν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “his glorious character, the glorious character” (See: Abstract Nouns)

μονογενοῦς παρὰ πατρός

The phrase the One and Only refers to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the One and Only from the Father, Jesus,” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

μονογενοῦς

Here and throughout John’s Gospel, the phrase the One and Only is a title for Jesus that could refer to: (1) Jesus being unique as the only member of his kind. Alternate translation: “the Unique One” (2) Jesus being the only child of his Father. Alternate translation: “the Only Begotten One”

παρὰ πατρός

The phrase from the Father means that Jesus came from the presence of God the Father to the world. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “who came from the Father”

πατρός

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

πλήρης χάριτος καὶ ἀληθείας

Here, John uses full of figuratively to describe Jesus fully possessing a quality, as if grace and truth were objects that could fill a person. If this might confuse you readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “fully possessing grace and truth” (See: Metaphor)

πλήρης χάριτος καὶ ἀληθείας

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of grace and truth, you could express the same ideas in other ways. Alternate translation: “full of God’s gracious and faithful character” or “full of kind acts and true teachings” (See: Abstract Nouns)

John 1:15

Ἰωάννης μαρτυρεῖ περὶ αὐτοῦ

To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: Predictive Past)

καὶ κέκραγεν λέγων

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and has cried out, and he said” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

οὗτος ἦν ὃν εἶπον, ὁ ὀπίσω μου ἐρχόμενος, ἔμπροσθέν μου γέγονεν, ὅτι πρῶτός μου ἦν.

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “This was the one I said would come after me, and who would be greater than me for he was before me” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

ὁ ὀπίσω μου ἐρχόμενος

Here, John is speaking about Jesus. The phrase is coming after me means that John’s ministry has already started, and Jesus’ ministry will start later. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “He who starts his ministry after I have done so”

ἔμπροσθέν μου γέγονεν

Here, greater refers to being more important or having a superior position. Alternate translation: “is more important than I am” or “is superior to me”

ὅτι πρῶτός μου ἦν

Here, before me means that Jesus existed earlier in time than John. This does not mean that Jesus is more important because he is older than John in human years. Jesus is greater and more important than John because he is God the Son, who has always existed. Alternate translation: “for he existed before I was born”

John 1:16

ὅτι

For here introduces the reason why John said that Jesus is “full of grace and truth” in verse 14. Alternate translation: “We can say that Jesus is full of grace and truth because” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

αὐτοῦ

Here, his refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus’” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

τοῦ πληρώματος αὐτοῦ

Here, fullness refers to the grace and truth which John said Jesus was full of in verse 14. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of fullness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what he is full of” or “his full amount of grace and truth” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἡμεῖς πάντες

Here, we refers to John and all believers. Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “all of we believers” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἐλάβομεν καὶ χάριν

Here, even indicates that “grace after grace” explains what “his fullness” means. Alternate translation: “have received, that is, grace” or “have received, namely, grace”

χάριν ἀντὶ χάριτος

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “kind act after kind act” (See: Abstract Nouns)

χάριν ἀντὶ χάριτος

Here, after could mean: (1) the second “grace” replaces the first “grace,” which is the most common use for this word. This meaning could indicate that the first “grace” refers to “the law” and the second “grace” refers to “Grace and truth” in the next verse. Alternate translation: “grace in place of grace” or “grace instead of grace” (2) the second “grace” is in addition to the first “grace.” Alternate translation: “grace in addition to” or “grace upon grace”

John 1:17

ὁ νόμος διὰ Μωϋσέως ἐδόθη, ἡ χάρις καὶ ἡ ἀλήθεια διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐγένετο

John placed the two sentences in this verse next to each other without any connecting word in order to show a contrast between the law of Moses and the grace and truth of Jesus. This does not mean that the law of Moses did not have grace and truth. Rather, John is indicating that the grace and truth revealed by Jesus is more complete than that revealed in the law of Moses. Although God revealed himself and his will through the law of Moses, he did so much more clearly though Jesus, who is God in human form. Alternate translation: “the law was given through Moses. In contrast, grace and truth came about through Jesus Christ” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

ὁ νόμος διὰ Μωϋσέως ἐδόθη

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “God gave the law through Moses” (See: Active or Passive)

ὁ νόμος…ἐδόθη

The word law is a singular noun that refers to the many laws and instructions that God gave to the Israelites. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the group of laws was given” or “God’s laws were given” (See: Collective Nouns)

Μωϋσέως

Moses is the name of a man, a prophet of God. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἡ χάρις καὶ ἡ ἀλήθεια

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of grace and truth, you could express the same ideas in other ways. Alternate translation: “God’s gracious and faithful character” or “Kind acts and true teachings” (See: Abstract Nouns)

John 1:18

μονογενὴς Θεὸς

Here and throughout John’s Gospel, the phrase the One and Only is a title for Jesus that could refer to: (1) Jesus being unique as the only member of his kind. Alternate translation: “the Unique God” (2) Jesus being the only child of his Father. Alternate translation: “the Only Begotten God”

μονογενὴς Θεὸς

Here, God indicates that Jesus, who is called the One and Only, is God. If it would be misunderstood to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the One and Only, who is God”

ὁ ὢν εἰς τὸν κόλπον τοῦ Πατρὸς

Here, in the bosom of is an idiom that refers to having a close and intimate relationship with someone. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “who has a close relationship with the Father” (See: Idiom)

τοῦ Πατρὸς

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἐκεῖνος

Here, that one refers to Jesus in an emphatic way. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus himself” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐξηγήσατο

Here, him is not in the original text, but is necessary for English. It refers to God the Father. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “has made the Father known” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐξηγήσατο

Here, the word translated has made him known refers to making people know something by explaining or revealing it clearly. Alternate translation: “has explained him” or “has fully revealed him”

John 1:19

τοῦ Ἰωάννου

Here, John refers to Jesus’ cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_tw/src/branch/master/bible/names/johnthebaptist.md) It does not refer to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of John the Baptist” or “of John the Immerser” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀπέστειλαν οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι ἐξ Ἱεροσολύμων

Here, the Jews refers to the “Jewish leaders.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders sent … from Jerusalem” (See: Synecdoche)

John 1:20

ὡμολόγησεν καὶ οὐκ ἠρνήσατο, καὶ ὡμολόγησεν

The phrase “he confessed” expresses in positive terms the same thing that he did not deny expresses in negative terms. This emphasizes that John was telling the truth and was strongly stating that he was not the Christ. Your language may have a different way of doing this. Alternate translation: “he strongly confessed” or “he solemnly testified”

John 1:21

ἠρώτησαν

Here, they refers to “the Jews,” mentioned in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jews asked” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

τί οὖν?

Alternate translation: “If you are not the Messiah, then who are you?”

Ἠλείας

Elijah is the name of a man. Elijah was a prophet whom the Jews expected to return to earth shortly become the arrival of the Messiah. (See: How to Translate Names)

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ὁ προφήτης

Here, the prophet refers to a prophet the Jews were waiting for, based on God’s promise to send a prophet like Moses, which is recorded in Deuteronomy 18:15. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the prophet whom God promised to send to us” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 1:22

εἶπαν…αὐτῷ

Here, the pronouns they and him refer to the priests and Levites and John the Baptist, respectively. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the priests and Levites … John the Baptist” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

τίς εἶ? ἵνα ἀπόκρισιν δῶμεν τοῖς πέμψασιν ἡμᾶς; τί

John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. This may require you to change the punctuation of the sentences. Alternate translation: “Who are you? Tell us so that we might given an answer to those who sent us. What” (See: Ellipsis)

δῶμεν…ἡμᾶς

Here, we and us refer to the priests and Levites, not to John. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἵνα ἀπόκρισιν δῶμεν

Alternate translation: “so that we might tell your answer”

τοῖς πέμψασιν ἡμᾶς

This phrase refers to the Jewish leaders in Jerusalem. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to those leaders in Jerusalem who sent us” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 1:23

φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, εὐθύνατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου

In these phrases, John quotes from the Old Testament book of Isaiah (Isaiah 40:3). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

ἐγὼ φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ

Here, voice refers to the person who is crying out in the wilderness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am the one calling out in the wilderness” (See: Metonymy)

ἐγὼ φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, εὐθύνατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου

This clause is a quotation within a quotation. John is quoting from the book of Isaiah, and Isaiah is quoting the words of the person calling out in the wilderness. It would be best to indicate that by punctuating this material as a second-level quotation, since Luke is quoting from Scripture. However, if your language does not put one direct quotation within another, you could translate this material as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “I am a voice crying out in the wilderness to make the way of the Lord straight” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

εὐθύνατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου

Here John the Baptist quotes Isaiah, using this clause figuratively to refer to telling people to get ready to listen to the Lord’s message when it comes. They are to do this by repenting of their sins. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Repent of your sins so that you will be ready to listen to the Lord’s message when it comes” (See: Metaphor)

Ἠσαΐας ὁ προφήτης

Isaiah is the name of a man. He wrote the book of Isaiah, in the Bible. (See: How to Translate Names)

John 1:24

This verse is background information about the people who questioned John. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

ἀπεσταλμένοι

Here, the ones refers to the priests and Levites, as introduced in verse 19. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the priests and Levites who had been sent” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀπεσταλμένοι ἦσαν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones whom the Jewish leaders sent” (See: Active or Passive)

ἦσαν ἐκ τῶν Φαρισαίων

This phrase could refer to: (1) the priests and Levites who had been sent. Alternate translation: “belonged to the Pharisees” (2) the leaders in Jerusalem who sent the priests and Levites. Alternate translation: “were sent from the Pharisees” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 1:25

ἠρώτησαν

Here, they refers to the priests and Levites who had been sent from Jerusalem, as introduced in verse 19. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the priests and Levites from Jerusalem asked” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Ἠλείας

Elijah is the name of a man. See how you translated this name in 1:21. (See: How to Translate Names)

ὁ προφήτης

Here, the Prophet refers to a prophet the Jews were waiting for, based on God’s promise to send a prophet like Moses, which is recorded in Deuteronomy 18:15. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the prophet whom God promised to send to us” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 1:26

Ἰωάννης

Here, John refers to Jesus’ cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_tw/src/branch/master/bible/names/johnthebaptist.md) It does not refer to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀπεκρίθη αὐτοῖς ὁ Ἰωάννης λέγων

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “John answered them, and he said” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

John 1:27

ὁ ὀπίσω μου ἐρχόμενος

Here, John is speaking about Jesus. The phrase coming after me means that John’s ministry has already started and Jesus’ ministry will start later. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one who starts his ministry after I have done so” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

μου…οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγὼ ἄξιος, ἵνα λύσω αὐτοῦ τὸν ἱμάντα τοῦ ὑποδήματος

Untying sandals was the work of a slave or servant. John the Baptist uses this expression figurative to refer to the most unpleasant work of a servant. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “me. I am not even worthy to untie the strap of his sandal” or “me, whom I am not worthy to serve in even the most unpleasant way” (See: Metaphor)

John 1:28

This verse provides background information about the setting of the story that is recorded in 1:19–27. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

ταῦτα

Here, these things refers to the events that were described in 1:19–27. If it would be misunderstood to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This conversation between John and the priests and Levites from Jerusalem” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Βηθανίᾳ

Bethany is the name of a village. (See: How to Translate Names)

τοῦ Ἰορδάνου

Jordan is the name of a river. (See: How to Translate Names)

πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου

Here, beyond the Jordan refers to the region of Judea that is on the east side of the Jordan River, which is the side opposite from Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “on the side of the Jordan River opposite from Jerusalem” (See: How to Translate Names)

Ἰωάννης

Here, John refers to Jesus’ cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_tw/src/branch/master/bible/names/johnthebaptist.md) It does not refer to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 1:29

τῇ ἐπαύριον

The next day here indicates that the events the story will now relate came after the event it has just described in 1:19–28. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “The day after John spoke with the priests and Levites from Jerusalem” (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

βλέπει…λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ἴδε

John the Baptist uses the term Behold to call his audience’s attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: Metaphor)

ἴδε, ὁ Ἀμνὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ

The phrase Lamb of God refers to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Behold, Jesus, the Lamb of God” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Ἀμνὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ

John the Baptist uses a metaphor here to refer to Jesus as God’s perfect sacrifice. (See: lamb, Lamb of God) Since Lamb of God is an important title for Jesus, you should translate the words directly and not provide a non-figurative explanation in the text of your translation. (See: Metaphor)

ὁ αἴρων

Here John the Baptist speaks figuratively of forgiving sin as if sin were an object that Jesus is taking away. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “who is forgiving” (See: Metaphor)

τοῦ κόσμου

John the Baptist uses world figuratively to refer to all the people in the world. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of those who live in the world” (See: Metonymy)

John 1:30

ὀπίσω μου ἔρχεται ἀνὴρ, ὃς ἔμπροσθέν μου γέγονεν, ὅτι πρῶτός μου ἦν.

See how you translated this in verse 15.

John 1:31

κἀγὼ οὐκ ᾔδειν αὐτόν

Here, him refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “And I did not know Jesus” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

κἀγὼ οὐκ ᾔδειν αὐτόν

Here John means that he did not know previously that Jesus was the Messiah. It does not mean that he didn’t know who Jesus was, because Jesus was his cousin. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “And I did not know that he was the Messiah” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἵνα φανερωθῇ τῷ Ἰσραὴλ διὰ τοῦτο

Here John uses the redundant words so that and because of this to emphasize the reason why he was baptizing people. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could combine these phrases and indicate the emphasis. Alternate translation: “for the exact purpose that he might be revealed to Israel” (See: Doublet)

τῷ Ἰσραὴλ

Here John uses the name of the nation, Israel, to represent the people who belong to that nation. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the Israelites” (See: Metonymy)

διὰ τοῦτο

Here, this refers to the revealing of the Messiah to Israel that is mentioned in the previous clause. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because he might be revealed” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 1:32

ἐμαρτύρησεν Ἰωάννης λέγων

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “John testified, and he said” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

ὡς περιστερὰν

This phrase is a simile. As Luke 3:22 indicates, the Holy Spirit came down with an appearance that resembled a dove. Alternate translation: “resembling a dove” (See: Simile)

ἐπ’ αὐτόν

Here, him refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “upon Jesus” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

John 1:33

κἀγὼ οὐκ ᾔδειν αὐτόν

Here John means that he did not know previously that Jesus was the Messiah. It does not mean that he didn’t recognize who Jesus was when he saw him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “And I did not recognize that he was the Messiah” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ πέμψας με βαπτίζειν ἐν ὕδατι, ἐκεῖνός

Here, the phrases the one who sent me and that one both refer to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “God, who sent me to baptize in water,” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ βαπτίζων ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ

Here John the Baptist is using literal baptism, which puts a person under water, figuratively to refer to spiritual baptism, which puts people under the influence of the Holy Spirit, who purifies them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he is the one who will put you under the influence of the Holy Spirit, who will purify you” (See: Metaphor)

John 1:34

ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ

Although most copies of this text say Son of God, some say “chosen one of God” or “chosen Son of God.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the phrase it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of the ULT. (See: Textual Variants)

Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ

Son of God is an important title for Jesus. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 1:35

τῇ ἐπαύριον πάλιν

The next day here indicates that the events the story will now relate came after the event it has just described in 1:29–34. John saw Jesus two days after his conversation with the priests and Levites that is described in verses 19–28. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “Two days after John spoke with the priests and Levites from Jerusalem” (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

John 1:36

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ἴδε, ὁ Ἀμνὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ

ἴδε

John records John the Baptist using the term Behold to call his audience’s attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: Metaphor)

Ἀμνὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ

See how you translated this same phrase in John 1:29. (See: Metaphor)

John 1:37

ἤκουσαν οἱ δύο μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ

Here, his and him refer to John the Baptist. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “John’s two disciples heard him” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

John 1:38

θεασάμενος αὐτοὺς

Here, them refers to the two disciples of John the Baptist who were mentioned in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “having seen John’s two disciples” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

θεασάμενος αὐτοὺς ἀκολουθοῦντας

Here John is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “having seen them following him” (See: Ellipsis)

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ποῦ μένεις

Alternate translation: “where are you spending the night”

ποῦ μένεις

This question is the answer to the question Jesus just asked in the previous sentence. It is a way for the two men to imply that they would like to have a private conversation with Jesus at the place where he was staying. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “where are you staying? We would like to speak with you privately.” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 1:39

λέγει αὐτοῖς…μένει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

μένει

See how you translated this in the previous verse.

τὴν ἡμέραν ἐκείνην

Here, that day refers to the day the two disciples left John the Baptist to follow Jesus, as indicated in verse 35. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the same day that they left John” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὥρα…δεκάτη

In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. Here, the tenth hour indicates a time in the late afternoon, before dark, at which it would be too late to start traveling to another town. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “about 4:00 PM”

John 1:40

Verses [40–42] give background information about Andrew and how he brought his brother Peter to Jesus.

Ἰωάννου

Here, John refers to Jesus’ cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_tw/src/branch/master/bible/names/johnthebaptist.md) It does not refer to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Ἀνδρέας…Σίμωνος Πέτρου

Andrew and Simon Peter are names of two men. (See: How to Translate Names)

Σίμωνος Πέτρου

Simon was also called Peter by Jesus, as recorded in verse 42. Alternate translation: “Simon, who is also called Peter”

John 1:41

οὗτος

This one here refers to Andrew, who was mentioned in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Andrew” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

εὑρίσκει…λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

Σίμωνα

Simon is the name of a man, Andrew’s brother. (See: How to Translate Names)

ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, Χριστός

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which means Christ” (See: Active or Passive)

ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, Χριστός

John assumes that his readers will know that he is saying what the title “Messiah” means when translated from the Aramaic language into Greek. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which is ‘Christ’ in Greek” or “which is the Aramaic word for ‘Christ’” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 1:42

ἤγαγεν αὐτὸν

He here refers to Andrew and him refers to Simon. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Andrew brought Simon” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐμβλέψας αὐτῷ, ὁ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “Jesus looked at him, and he said” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

υἱὸς Ἰωάννου

John is the name of a man. This is neither John the Baptist nor John the apostle. John was a common name. (See: How to Translate Names)

σὺ κληθήσῃ Κηφᾶς

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “People will call you Cephas” (See: Active or Passive)

Κηφᾶς

Cephas is a word in the Aramaic language that means “rock.” Here, Jesus uses the word as a name for Simon. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Cephas, which means ‘rock’ in Aramaic” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὃ ἑρμηνεύεται, Πέτρος

John assumes that his readers will know that he is saying what the name Cephas means when translated from the Aramaic language into Greek. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “which is ‘Peter’ in Greek” or “which is the Aramaic word for Peter” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 1:43

τῇ ἐπαύριον

The next day here indicates that the events the story will now relate came after the event it has just described in the previous. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “The day after Andrew brought Simon to Jesus,” (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

τὴν Γαλιλαίαν

Galilee is the name of a region. It occurs many times in this book. Alternate translation: “the region of Galilee” or “the region around Galilee” (See: How to Translate Names)

καὶ εὑρίσκει Φίλιππον, καὶ λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

Φίλιππον

Philip is the name of a man, a disciple of Jesus. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἀκολούθει μοι

In this context, to follow someone means to become that person’s disciple. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Become my disciple” or “Come, follow me as your teacher” (See: Idiom)

John 1:44

This verse provides background information about Philip. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

John 1:45

Φίλιππος…Ναθαναὴλ…Μωϋσῆς…Ἰησοῦν…Ἰωσὴφ

These are the names of five men. (See: How to Translate Names)

εὑρίσκει Φίλιππος τὸν Ναθαναὴλ, καὶ λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

οἱ προφῆται

Here, John is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “the prophets wrote about” (See: Ellipsis)

Ναζαρέτ

Nazareth is the name of a city. (See: How to Translate Names)

John 1:46

εἶπεν αὐτῷ Ναθαναήλ

Here, him refers to Philip. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Nathaniel said to Philip” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐκ Ναζαρὲτ δύναταί τι ἀγαθὸν εἶναι?

Nathaniel is using the question form for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No good thing can come out of Nazareth!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

John 1:47

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ἴδε

John records Jesus using the term Behold to call his audience’s attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: Metaphor)

ἐν ᾧ δόλος οὐκ ἔστιν

Jesus is using a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that means the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “a completely truthful man” (See: Litotes)

John 1:48

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

πρὸ τοῦ σε Φίλιππον φωνῆσαι, ὄντα ὑπὸ τὴν συκῆν, εἶδόν σε

Nathaniel’s reaction to this statement in the next verse indicates that this is a display of supernatural knowledge. It appears that Jesus knew something about Nathaniel that no one else could have known. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Before Philip called you, being completely alone under the fig tree, I saw you.” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὄντα ὑπὸ τὴν συκῆν

The subject of this clause is Philip, not Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “while you were under the fig tree” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 1:49

Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ

Son of God is an important title for Jesus. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 1:50

ὅτι εἶπόν σοι, ὅτι εἶδόν σε ὑποκάτω τῆς συκῆς, πιστεύεις?

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the result for the reason that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Do you believe because I said to you that I saw you underneath the fig tree” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ὅτι εἶπόν σοι, ὅτι εἶδόν σε ὑποκάτω τῆς συκῆς, πιστεύεις?

John records Jesus using the question form for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You believe because I said, ‘I saw you underneath the fig tree’!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

πιστεύεις

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, these words can be supplied from the context. Alternate translation: “do you believe that I am the Messiah” (See: Ellipsis)

μείζω τούτων

Jesus uses the plural pronoun these to refer to a general category of something, in this case the miraculous display of supernatural knowledge that took place in verse 48. Alternate translation: “greater things than this type of thing” or “greater things that this kind of miracle” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 1:51

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν

Jesus repeats Truly in order to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases, forming a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “What I am about to tell you is very true.” (See: Doublet)

λέγω ὑμῖν

Jesus is using the plural form of you to indicate that he is speaking to all those who are with him at that moment. He is not only speaking to Nathaniel. If it would be misunderstood to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I say to all of you here” (See: Forms of You)

ὄψεσθε τὸν οὐρανὸν ἀνεῳγότα, καὶ τοὺς ἀγγέλους τοῦ Θεοῦ ἀναβαίνοντας καὶ καταβαίνοντας

Here, Jesus refers to an event described in the book of Genesis. While fleeing from his brother, Jacob had a dream in which he saw angels descending from and ascending to heaven. If it would be helpful to your readers who may not be familiar with the story, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “just as Jacob saw in his vision, you will see heaven opened, and the angels of God ascending and descending” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου

Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: First, Second or Third Person)

τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου

The title Son of Man is equivalent to “Messiah.” Jesus uses it to claim that role subtly and implicitly. You may want to translate this title directly into your language. On the other hand, if you think it would be helpful to your readers, you could state what it means. See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “the Messiah” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 2

John 2 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

Jesus’ first sign: he turns water into wine (2:1–12)
Jesus causes controversy in the Temple (2:13–22)
Jesus’ ministry in Jerusalem at Passover (2:23–25)

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Wine

The Jews drank wine at many meals and especially when they were celebrating special events. They did not believe that it was a sin to drink wine.

Driving out the money changers

Jesus drove the money changers out of the temple to show that he had authority over the temple and over all of Israel. As the Son of God, it was his Father’s temple that was being used inappropriately for making money. Therefore, he had the authority to drive out those who were misusing the temple.

“He knew what was in man”

Jesus knew what other people were thinking only because he is the Son of Man and the Son of God. Because he is the Son of God, he has supernatural insight into what other people were thinking and could correctly judge their intentions.

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

“His disciples remembered”

John used this phrase to stop telling the main historical narrative and to tell about something that happened much later. The Jewish authorities spoke to Jesus right after he scolded the sellers in the temple in (2:16). Jesus’ disciples remembered what the prophet had written long ago and that Jesus was talking about the temple of his body after Jesus became alive again (2:17 and 2:22).

John 2:1

Jesus and his disciples were invited to a wedding. This verse gives background information about the setting of the story. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ τρίτῃ

This phrase introduces a new event. The third day could refer to: (1) the third day from when Jesus called Philip and Nathaniel to follow him in 1:43. According to the Jewish way of counting days, the first day would have been the day in 1:43, making the third day occur two days afterward. Alternate translation: “two days after Jesus called Philip and Nathaniel” (2) the day after Jesus called Philip and Nathaniel to follow him in 1:43. In this case, the first day would have occurred in 1:35 and the second day in 1:43. Alternate translation: “on the day after Jesus called Philip and Nathaniel” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

Κανὰ

Cana is the name of a town in the region of Galilee. (See: How to Translate Names)

John 2:2

ἐκλήθη…καὶ ὁ Ἰησοῦς καὶ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸν γάμον

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they also invited Jesus and his disciples to the wedding” (See: Active or Passive)

John 2:3

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

οἶνον οὐκ ἔχουσιν

Jesus’ mother is using a declarative statement to give an indirect request. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for a request. Alternate translation: “They ran out of wine. Could you do something to solve this problem?” (See: Statements — Other Uses)

οἶνον

Regarding the drinking of wine in Jewish culture, see the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter.

John 2:4

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

γύναι

Woman here refers to Mary. If it is impolite for a son to call his mother “woman” in your language, you can use another word that is polite, or leave it out.

τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί, γύναι?

Jesus is using the question form for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Woman, this has nothing to do with me or you” (See: Rhetorical Question)

οὔπω ἥκει ἡ ὥρα μου

The word hour refers to the right occasion for Jesus to show that he is the Messiah by working miracles. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “It is not yet the right time for me to perform a mighty act” (See: Metonymy)

John 2:5

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

John 2:6

μετρητὰς δύο ἢ τρεῖς

A metretes was equivalent to about 40 liters. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the quantity in modern measurements. Alternatively, to help your readers recognize that the biblical writings come from long ago when people used different measurements, you could express the amount using the ancient measurement, the metrete, and explain the equivalent in modern measurements in a footnote. Alternate translation: “80 to 120 liters” (See: Biblical Volume)

John 2:7

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

αὐτοῖς

Here, them refers to the servants at the wedding. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the servants” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἕως ἄνω

The brim is the top edge of the water pot. Alternate translation: “to the very top”

John 2:8

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

αὐτοῖς…οἱ δὲ ἤνεγκαν

Here, them and they refer to the servants at the wedding. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the servants … And the servants carried” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

τῷ ἀρχιτρικλίνῳ

The term head waiter refers to the person in charge of the servants who served the food and drink at meals and feasts.

John 2:9

ὁ ἀρχιτρίκλινος…ὁ ἀρχιτρίκλινος

See how you translated this term in the previous verse.

John provides this background information about who knew where the wine came from in order to emphasize the veracity of this miracle. The head waiter did not know that the wine was originally water from the water pots. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

φωνεῖ

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

John 2:10

πᾶς ἄνθρωπος

Every man here is an exaggeration that refers to something being a common practice. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “A man usually” (See: Hyperbole)

πᾶς ἄνθρωπος

Although the term man is masculine, the head waiter is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “Every person” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

καὶ ὅταν μεθυσθῶσιν τὸν ἐλάσσω

This means that guests were given the cheaper wine, which is of lower quality and inferior flavor, after their senses had been dulled by drinking too much alcohol and were thus unable to tell that it was inferior wine. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the cheaper wine when they have become drunk and unable to discern the quality of the wine” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 2:11

In this verse John provides background information about the events described in 2:1–10. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

ἀρχὴν τῶν σημείων

John wrote much about the miraculous signs Jesus did. Turning water into wine at the wedding is the first of those signs. See the discussion of signs in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracles” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Κανὰ

See how you translated this name in verse 1. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἐφανέρωσεν τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ

Here, glory refers to the mighty power of Jesus that enabled him to do miracles. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “revealed his glorious power” (See: Abstract Nouns)

John 2:12

μετὰ τοῦτο

After this introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time afterward” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

μετὰ τοῦτο

Here, this refers to the what took place in Cana that was described in 2:1–11. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “After Jesus’ first sign in Cana” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

κατέβη

This indicates that they went from a higher place to a lower place. Capernaum is at a lower elevation than Cana.

Καφαρναοὺμ

Capernaum is the name of a town in the region of Galilee. (See: How to Translate Names)

John 2:13

ἀνέβη εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα

This indicates that Jesus went from a lower place to a higher place. Jerusalem is built on a hill.

John 2:14

τοὺς πωλοῦντας βόας καὶ πρόβατα καὶ περιστερὰς

These animals were used for sacrifices in the temple. People were buying animals in the temple courtyard in order to sacrifice them to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those selling oxen and sheep and pigeons for people to sacrifice to God” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

κερματιστὰς

Jewish authorities required people who wanted to buy animals for sacrifices in the temple to exchange their money for special money from the money changers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “people who exchanged money for special money approved for temple use” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

καθημένους

The next verse makes it clear that these people are in the temple courtyard. That area was intended for worship and not for commerce. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “sitting in the temple courtyard that was intended for worship” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 2:15

καὶ

Here John is telling his readers what Jesus did as a result of the commerce he saw going on in the temple. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Consequently” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

πάντας

Here, them all refers to the people selling the animals and the money changers. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “all the sellers and money changers” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

John 2:16

τὸν οἶκον τοῦ πατρός μου οἶκον ἐμπορίου

Jesus uses the house of my Father to refer to the temple. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the house of my Father, which is the temple, a house of commerce” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τοῦ πατρός μου

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 2:17

γεγραμμένον ἐστίν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone had written” (See: Active or Passive)

γεγραμμένον ἐστίν

Here John uses it is written to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Psalm 69:9). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that John is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it had been written in the scriptures” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

ὁ ζῆλος τοῦ οἴκου σου καταφάγεταί με

This sentence is a quotation from Psalm 69:9. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

τοῦ οἴκου σου

Here, your refers to God and is singular. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for God’s house” (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

τοῦ οἴκου σου

Here, house refers to the temple, which is often called God’s house in the Bible. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “for your house, the temple” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

καταφάγεταί

Here, the author uses consume figuratively to refer to Jesus’ intense love for the temple, as if it were a fire that burned within him. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “will be intense within” or “will be like a fire that consumes” (See: Metaphor)

John 2:18

ταῦτα

Here, these things refers to Jesus’ actions against the animal sellers and money changers in the temple. (See the discussion of this event in the General Notes to this chapter.) If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these disruptive activities in the temple” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 2:19

λύσατε τὸν ναὸν τοῦτον, καὶ ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις ἐγερῶ αὐτόν

This is an imperative, but it should be translated as introducing a hypothetical situation rather than as a command. Jesus is stating a hypothetical situation in which the event in the second clause would happen if the event in the first clause took place. In this case, Jesus would certainly raise the temple up if the Jewish authorities were to destroy it. Alternate translation: “If you destroy this temple, then in three days I will raise it up” (See: Imperatives — Other Uses)

λύσατε τὸν ναὸν τοῦτον, καὶ ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις ἐγερῶ αὐτόν

Here, John records Jesus using the words Destroy and raise figuratively to describe his killing and resurrection, as if tearing down and rebuilding a building. However, the Jewish leaders did not understand this and Jesus does not explain the metaphor to them. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

John 2:20

σὺ ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις ἐγερεῖς αὐτόν?

The Jewish leaders are using the question form for emphasis. They think that Jesus wants to tear down the temple and rebuild it in three days. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you cannot possibly rebuild it in three days!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

John 2:21

Verses 21–22 are a comment John made about the story that was described in 2:13–20. These verses tell about something that happened later. (See: End of Story)

ἐκεῖνος δὲ ἔλεγεν

Here, that one refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “But Jesus was speaking” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

John 2:22

οὖν

Therefore indicates that in this verse John is giving the result of Jesus making the statement in 2:19. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because Jesus said this about his body” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἠγέρθη ἐκ νεκρῶν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “God raised him from the dead” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐμνήσθησαν οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ

Here, John is speaking about something that happened long after the event described in the previous verses. See the discussion of this in the General Notes to this chapter.

τοῦτο…τῷ λόγῳ ὃν εἶπεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς

Here, this and the word refer back to Jesus’ statement in 2:19. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “this statement about his body … the word about his body that Jesus had spoken” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τῇ Γραφῇ

John is speaking of the Scripture in general, not of one particular book within the Bible. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “the scriptures” (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

John 2:23

ὡς δὲ ἦν ἐν τοῖς Ἱεροσολύμοις

Now here introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after the previous events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

ἐν τῷ Πάσχα ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ

These two phrases could refer to: (1) two different parts of the festival, the Passover referring to the first day of the festival, and the festival referring to the Festival of Unleavened Bread that begins at Passover and was one week long. Alternate translation: “at the Passover, during the Festival of Unleavened Bread” (2) the same event. Alternate translation: “at the Passover festival”

ἐπίστευσαν εἰς τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ

Here, name represents the person of Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “believed in him” or “trusted in him” (See: Metonymy)

θεωροῦντες αὐτοῦ τὰ σημεῖα

Here, seeing indicates the reason why the people were believing in Jesus. These people were only believing in Jesus because of the miracles he performed. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because they saw his signs” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

τὰ σημεῖα

See how you translated signs in 2:11. See also the discussion of signs in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracles”

John 2:24

οὐκ ἐπίστευεν αὑτὸν αὐτοῖς

Although many people were believing in him, Jesus knew that their belief was superficial and only lasted as long as he performed miracles for them. Therefore, he did not trust them the way he trusted his true disciples. Alternate translation: “did not trust them as true disciples” or “did not believe their belief in him”

τὸ αὐτὸν γινώσκειν πάντας

Although the word men is masculine, John is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “he knew all people” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

John 2:25

περὶ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου…τί ἦν ἐν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ

Although both instances of the word man are masculine, John is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “about mankind … what was in mankind” or “about people … what was in people” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

τί ἦν ἐν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ

This refers to the inner thoughts and desires of people, which some cultures refer to as “the heart.” (See the discussion of this in the General Notes to this chapter.) If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “what people think” or “the thoughts and desires people have” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 3

John 3 General Notes

Structure and formatting

Jesus teaches Nicodemus about being born again (3:1–21)
John the Baptist testifies about Jesus (3:22–36)

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Light and Darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong, and to begin to obey God. (See: righteous, righteousness, unrighteous, unrighteousness, upright, uprightness)

The kingdom of God

The kingdom of God is a concept that is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when Jesus returns and rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is God ruling and people embracing God’s rule over their lives. (See: kingdom of God, kingdom of heaven)

Born again

A major idea in this chapter is the spiritual new birth that Jesus says is necessary in order for someone to enter the kingdom of God 3:3–8. Jesus also uses the following expressions to refer to being born again: “born from water and the Spirit” (3:4) and “born from the Spirit” (3:6,8). (See: born again, born of God, new birth)

Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

“Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” twice in this chapter (3:13–14). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: Son of Man, son of man and First, Second or Third Person)

John 3:1

δὲ

Now here introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related in the previous chapter. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

ἦν…ἄνθρωπος ἐκ τῶν Φαρισαίων, Νικόδημος ὄνομα αὐτῷ,

Here, there was a man is used to introduce Nicodemus as a new character in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. The phrase from the Pharisees identifies him as member of a strict Jewish religious sect. Alternate translation: “there was a man named Nicodemus, who was a member of a strict Jewish religious group” (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

ἄρχων τῶν Ἰουδαίων

This phrase means that Nicodemus was a member of the Jewish religious leadership, specifically the Jewish council called the Sanhedrin which made decisions about Jewish law. (See: council) If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a member of the Jewish ruling council” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 3:2

οὗτος

This one here refers to Nicodemus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Nicodemus” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

πρὸς αὐτὸν

Here, him refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to Jesus” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

οἴδαμεν

Here, we is exclusive. Nicodemus is only referring to himself and the other members of the Jewish council. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἐὰν μὴ ᾖ ὁ Θεὸς μετ’ αὐτοῦ

Here, Nicodemus uses with him figuratively to refer to God’s help. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “without God’s help” (See: Metaphor)

John 3:3

ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω σοι

Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this in 1:51. (See: Doublet)

γεννηθῇ ἄνωθεν

The phrase born again is a metaphor that refers to spiritual rebirth. See the discussion of this expression in the General Notes to this chapter. Nicodemus does not understand this metaphor and Jesus does not explain it to him in this verse. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

γεννηθῇ ἄνωθεν

Here, the word translated again could also be translated as “from above.” It could refer to: (1) spiritual rebirth as a second birth that takes place in addition to physical birth. Alternate translation, as in the ULT: “would be born again” (2) spiritual rebirth as a birth that is caused by God, in which case “above” is a euphemism for God. Alternate translation: “would be born from above” (3) spiritual rebirth as both a second birth and a birth caused by God. See the discussion of John’s use of double meaning in Part 3 of the Introduction to this book. Alternate translation: “would be born again by God”

ἰδεῖν τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here Jesus uses see figuratively to refer to experiencing an event or state. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to experience the kingdom of God” or “to participate in the kingdom of God” (See: Metaphor)

τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here this phrase refers to both the place where God currently rules in heaven and to the earth when God rules over it in the future. See the discussion of this concept in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “the place where God rules” (See: Metaphor)

John 3:4

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

πῶς δύναται ἄνθρωπος γεννηθῆναι, γέρων ὤν?

Nicodemus uses this question to emphasize that this cannot happen. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “A man certainly cannot be born again when he is old!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

μὴ δύναται εἰς τὴν κοιλίαν τῆς μητρὸς αὐτοῦ δεύτερον εἰσελθεῖν καὶ γεννηθῆναι?

Nicodemus uses this question to emphasize his belief that a second birth is impossible. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “He surely cannot enter a second time into his mother’s womb!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

John 3:5

ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω σοι

Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in 3:3. (See: Doublet)

γεννηθῇ ἐξ ὕδατος καὶ Πνεύματος

The phrase born from water and Spirit could refer to: (1) spiritual birth that includes cleansing from sin and spiritual transformation by the Holy Spirit. In this case, Jesus’ words would be understood as a reference to Ezekiel 36:25–27, which Nicodemus would have been familiar with. Alternate translation: “would be born again by cleansing and the Spirit.” (2) physical birth and spiritual birth. Alternate translation: “would be born physically and spiritually” (See: Metaphor)

εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here Jesus uses enter into figuratively to refer to experiencing something. The meaning is similar to the meaning of “see” in 3:3. Alternate translation: “to experience the kingdom of God” or “to participate in the kingdom of God” (See: Metaphor)

τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ

See how you translated this phrase in 3:3. (See: Metaphor)

John 3:6

τὸ γεγεννημένον ἐκ τῆς σαρκὸς

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “What flesh has given birth to” (See: Active or Passive)

τῆς σαρκὸς, σάρξ ἐστιν

Here Jesus is describing human beings figuratively by referring to something associated with them, the flesh they are made of. The word flesh here does not refer to sinful human nature as it does in other verses in the New Testament. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a human being is a human being” (See: Metonymy)

τὸ γεγεννημένον ἐκ τοῦ Πνεύματος

Here, the Spirit refers to the Holy Spirit, who enables people to be born again. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “what has been born again by means of the Holy Spirit” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πνεῦμά

Here, spirit refers to the new spiritual nature that God gives a person when they are born again. (See: born again, born of God, new birth) If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “a new spiritual nature” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 3:7

γεννηθῆναι ἄνωθεν

See how you translated this in 3:3. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

John 3:8

τὸ πνεῦμα ὅπου θέλει, πνεῖ

The word translated wind can also mean spirit. Jesus here speaks figuratively of the Holy Spirit, as if he were wind. Just like people in Jesus’ time could not understand how the wind blew but could observe the effects of the wind, people cannot understand how the Holy Spirit works but can witness the effects of his work. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this with a simile. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit is like the wind that blows wherever it wants” (See: Metaphor)

οὕτως ἐστὶν

This phrase connects this sentence with the previous sentence. In the same way that people cannot understand the wind but recognize its effects, people who are not born from the Spirit cannot understand those who are born from the Spirit but can recognize the effects of the new birth. Alternate translation: “So it is with” or “So it happens with”

ὁ γεγεννημένος ἐκ τοῦ Πνεύματος

See how you translated this phrase in 3:6.

τοῦ Πνεύματος

Here, the Spirit refers to the Holy Spirit, who enables people to be born again. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 3:9

πῶς δύναται ταῦτα γενέσθαι?

This question could be: (1) a genuine question that shows that Nicodemus is confused. Alternate translation: “How are these things possible” (2) a rhetorical question Nicodemus uses to add emphasis to the statement. Alternate translation: “These things cannot be!” or “These things are impossible!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ταῦτα

Here, these things refers to all that Jesus had spoken in 3:3–8. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these things you have just told me” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 3:10

σὺ εἶ ὁ διδάσκαλος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ, καὶ ταῦτα οὐ γινώσκεις

Jesus is using the question form for emphasis. He is not asking Nicodemus a question in order to get information. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a teacher of Israel, so I am surprised you do not understand these things!” or “You are a teacher of Israel, so you should understand these things!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

σὺ εἶ ὁ διδάσκαλος…οὐ γινώσκεις

The word you is singular and refers to Nicodemus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Are you, Nicodemus, the teacher … you do not understand” (See: Forms of You)

ὁ διδάσκαλος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ

Here, the teacher indicates that Nicodemus was recognized as a master teacher and religious authority in the land of Israel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the renowned religious teacher in Israel” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ταῦτα

Here, these things refers to all that Jesus had spoken in 3:3–8. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. See how you translated this phrase is the previous verse. Alternate translation: “these things you have just told me” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 3:11

ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω σοι

Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in 3:3. (See: Doublet)

ὃ οἴδαμεν λαλοῦμεν…τὴν μαρτυρίαν ἡμῶν

When Jesus says we and our in this verse, he was not including Nicodemus. Jesus used these pronouns as a contrast to Nicodemus saying we in 3:2. While Nicodemus used we to refer to himself and the other Jewish religious leaders, Jesus could have been referring to: (1) himself and his disciples. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “my disciples and I speak what we know … our testimony” (2) himself and the other members of the Godhead. Alternate translation: “the Father, Spirit, and I speak what we know … our testimony” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

οὐ λαμβάνετε

The word you is plural and could refer to: (1) the Jewish people in general. Alternate translation: “you Jews” (2) Nicodemus and his fellow Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “you Jewish leaders” (See: Forms of You)

John 3:12

εἰ τὰ ἐπίγεια εἶπον ὑμῖν

John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since I told you earthly things” (See: Connect — Factual Conditions)

εἶπον ὑμῖν…οὐ πιστεύετε, πῶς ἐὰν εἴπω ὑμῖν…πιστεύσετε

Throughout this verse, you is plural and could refer to: (1) the Jewish people in general. Alternate translation: “you Jews” (2) Nicodemus and his fellow Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “you Jewish leaders” See how you translated this word in the previous verse. (See: Forms of You)

τὰ ἐπίγεια

Here, earthly things refers to what Jesus had spoken in 3:3–8. Those things are called earthly because they are about things that take place on earth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “these truths about what takes place on earth” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πῶς ἐὰν εἴπω ὑμῖν τὰ ἐπουράνια, πιστεύσετε?

Jesus uses a question to emphasize the disbelief of Nicodemus and the Jews. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you certainly will not believe if I tell you about heavenly things!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τὰ ἐπουράνια

Here, heavenly things refers to things that take place in heaven or are related to heaven. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “truths about what takes place in heaven” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 3:13

ὁ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καταβάς

Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “me, the one who descended from heaven” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου

John 3:14

καὶ καθὼς Μωϋσῆς ὕψωσεν τὸν ὄφιν ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ

In this verse, John records Jesus comparing his crucifixion to Moses lifting up a bronze snake. John assumes that his readers will know that Jesus is referring to a story recorded in the Old Testament book of Numbers. In that story, the Israelites complained against God, and God punished them by sending poisonous snakes to kill them. God then told Moses to make a bronze snake and raise it up on a pole so that whoever was bitten by one of the poisonous snakes and looked at the bronze snake would not die. You could indicate this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers, particularly if they would not know the story. Alternate translation: “And just as Moses lifted up the bronze serpent on a pole when the Israelites were wandering in the wilderness” (See: Simile)

ὑψωθῆναι δεῖ τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it is necessary for people to lift up the Son of Man” (See: Active or Passive)

ὑψωθῆναι…τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου

Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “me, the Son of Man, to be lifted up” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου

See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 3:15

ἵνα

Here, so that indicates that Jesus is stating the purpose for which he would be crucified. In your translation, follow the conventions of your language for purpose clauses. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

John 3:16

γὰρ

For here indicates that Jesus is giving a reason why the statement in the previous two verses is true. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is true because” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

οὕτως…ἠγάπησεν ὁ Θεὸς τὸν κόσμον

Here, so could refer to: (1) the manner in which God loved the world. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “God loved the world in this way” (2) the degree to which God loved the world. Alternate translation: “God loved the world so much” (3) both the manner in which and the degree to which God loved the world. For this interpretation, see the discussion of John’s use of double meaning in Part 3 of the Introduction to this book. Alternate translation: “in this way God loved the world so much”

τὸν κόσμον

Here, world refers to the people who live in it. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people in the world” (See: Metonymy)

ὥστε

Here, that introduces the result of what the previous clause stated. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “as a result” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

τὸν Υἱὸν τὸν μονογενῆ

Here, One and Only Son refers to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “his One and Only Son, Jesus” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸν Υἱὸν τὸν μονογενῆ

Here and throughout John’s Gospel, the phrase One and Only is a title for Jesus that could refer to: (1) Jesus being unique as the only member of his kind. Alternate translation: “his Unique Son” (2) Jesus being the only child of his Father. Alternate translation: “his Only Begotten Son” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸν Υἱὸν τὸν μονογενῆ

One and Only Son is an important title for Jesus. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 3:17

γὰρ

For here indicates that Jesus is giving a reason why the statement in the previous verse is true. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “God gave his One and Only Son because” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

οὐ γὰρ ἀπέστειλεν ὁ Θεὸς τὸν Υἱὸν εἰς τὸν κόσμον, ἵνα κρίνῃ τὸν κόσμον, ἀλλ’ ἵνα σωθῇ ὁ κόσμος δι’ αὐτοῦ

These two clauses mean nearly the same thing, said twice for emphasis, first in the negative and then in the positive. Use whatever form your language uses for emphasis. Alternate translation: “For God truly sent his Son into the world so that he might save it” (See: Parallelism)

τὸν Υἱὸν

Son is an important title for Jesus. (See: Translating Son and Father)

τὸν Υἱὸν…δι’ αὐτοῦ

Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “me … through me” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

τὸν κόσμον

Here, world refers to the universe God created. It does not refer only to the people in the world or only to the earth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the universe” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἵνα κρίνῃ

Here, he refers to God; it does not refer to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that God might condemn” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἵνα κρίνῃ τὸν κόσμον

The word translated condemn means to judge someone to be guilty and deserving of punishment. Alternate translation: “so that he might judge the world as guilty”

τὸν κόσμον…ὁ κόσμος

Here, world refers to the people who live in it. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people in the world … the people in the world” (See: Metonymy)

ἵνα σωθῇ ὁ κόσμος

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “so that God might save the world” (See: Active or Passive)

δι’ αὐτοῦ

This phrase indicates the means by which God would save the world. Alternate translation: “by means of him”

John 3:18

οὐ κρίνεται…ἤδη κέκριται

The word translated condemn means to judge someone to be guilty and deserving of punishment. See how you translated it in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “is not judged as guilty … has already been judged as guilty”

εἰς αὐτὸν

Here, him refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in Jesus” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ὁ πιστεύων εἰς αὐτὸν οὐ κρίνεται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “God does not condemn the one who believes in him” (See: Active or Passive)

ὁ δὲ μὴ πιστεύων, ἤδη κέκριται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “but God has already condemned the one who does not believe” (See: Active or Passive)

μὴ πεπίστευκεν εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ μονογενοῦς Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here, name represents Jesus’ identity and everything about him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he has not believed in the One and Only Son of God” (See: Metonymy)

τοῦ μονογενοῦς Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here and throughout John’s Gospel, the phrase One and Only is a title for Jesus that could refer to: (1) Jesus being unique as the only member of his kind. Alternate translation: “of the Unique Son of God” (2) Jesus being the only child of his Father. Alternate translation: “of the Only Begotten Son of God”

Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ

Son of God is an important title for Jesus. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 3:19

ἡ κρίσις

Here, judgment could refer to: (1) a verdict a judge pronounces in a court trial. Alternate translation: “the verdict” (2) the reason for a condemning judgment. Alternate translation: “the basis for condemnation”

τὸ φῶς ἐλήλυθεν εἰς τὸν κόσμον…ἢ τὸ φῶς

Here Jesus uses light figuratively to refer to the revelation of God’s truth and goodness in Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this plainly. See how you translated it in those places where the light also refers to Jesus in the 1:7–9. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who revealed the true and good things of God, has come into the world … than Jesus” (See: Metaphor)

τὸ φῶς ἐλήλυθεν εἰς τὸν κόσμον…ἢ τὸ φῶς

Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If your language does not allow people to speak of themselves in the third person, you may need to specify who the light is. Alternate translation: “I, the light, have come into the world … than me” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

οἱ ἄνθρωποι

Although the term men is masculine, Jesus uses the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

ἠγάπησαν οἱ ἄνθρωποι…τὸ σκότος

Here Jesus uses darkness figuratively to refer to what is false and evil. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. See the discussion of light and darkness in the General Notes for Chapter 1. Alternate translation: “men loved evil” (See: Metaphor)

John 3:20

γὰρ

For here indicates another reason why men love the darkness, as stated in the previous verse. People who do evil things hate the light. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is because” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

πᾶς…ὁ φαῦλα πράσσων

This phrase refers to someone who habitually does evil things. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “everyone who habitually does evil”

τὸ φῶς, καὶ…πρὸς τὸ φῶς

See how you translated the light in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who revealed the true and good things of God, and … to Jesus” (See: Metaphor)

τὸ φῶς, καὶ…πρὸς τὸ φῶς

Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If your language does not allow people to speak of themselves in the third person, you may need to specify who the light is. Alternate translation: “me, the light, and … to me” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

ἵνα μὴ ἐλεγχθῇ τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that the light might not expose his deeds” (See: Active or Passive)

John 3:21

ὁ…ποιῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν

This phrase refers to someone who habitually does true things. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “everyone who habitually does the truth”

ὁ…ποιῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of truth, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the one who does true things” or “the one who does what is true” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἔρχεται πρὸς τὸ φῶς

See how you translated the light in the previous two verses. Alternate translation: “comes to Jesus, who revealed the true and good things of God” (See: Metaphor)

ἔρχεται πρὸς τὸ φῶς

Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If your language does not allow people to speak of themselves in the third person, you may need to specify who the light is. See how you translated this expression in the previous two verses. (See: First, Second or Third Person)

φανερωθῇ αὐτοῦ τὰ ἔργα

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the light might reveal his deeds” (See: Active or Passive)

ὅτι ἐν Θεῷ ἐστιν εἰργασμένα

This clause indicates what the light will reveal about the deeds of those who come to the light. The phrase in God indicates that the works these people have done were done with God’s help and not by their own strength or effort. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that they have been done with God’s help”

John 3:22

μετὰ ταῦτα

This phrase introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

John 3:23

ὁ Ἰωάννης

Here, John refers to Jesus’ cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: John (the Baptist)) It does not refer to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Αἰνὼν

Aenon is the name of a town near the Jordan River close to Samaria. Aenon is the Aramaic word for springs of water, which explains John’s comment in the next clause about there being much water there. (See: How to Translate Names)

τοῦ Σαλείμ

Salim is the name of a town near the Jordan River close to Samaria. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἐβαπτίζοντο

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that John the Baptist did it. Alternate translation: “John was baptizing them” or “he was baptizing them” (See: Active or Passive)

John 3:24

οὔπω…ἦν βεβλημένος…ὁ Ἰωάννης

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Mark 6:17 implies that Herod did it. Alternate translation: “Herod had not yet thrown John”(See: Active or Passive)

John 3:25

ἐγένετο οὖν ζήτησις ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν Ἰωάννου

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of dispute, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Then the disciples of John began arguing” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐγένετο οὖν ζήτησις ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν Ἰωάννου μετὰ Ἰουδαίου

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Then John’s disciples and a Jew began to dispute” (See: Active or Passive)

Ἰωάννου

Here, John refers to Jesus’ cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: John (the Baptist)) It does not refer to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of John the Baptist” or “of John the Immerser” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 3:26

ἦλθον

Here, they refers to John the Baptist’s disciples, who were disputing in the previous verse. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “John’s disciples went” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ὃς ἦν μετὰ σοῦ πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου, ᾧ σὺ μεμαρτύρηκας

This phrase refers to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who was with you beyond the Jordan, about whom you had testified” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἴδε, οὗτος βαπτίζει

John the Baptist’s disciples used the term behold to call John’s attention to what Jesus was doing. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. Alternate translation: “see how he is baptizing” (See: Metaphor)

πάντες ἔρχονται πρὸς αὐτόν

Here John the Baptist’s disciples use the word all as a generalization for emphasis. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “it seems like everyone is going to him” (See: Hyperbole)

John 3:27

οὐ δύναται ἄνθρωπος

John is speaking of people in general, not of one particular man. Alternate translation: “A person is not able” (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

ᾖ δεδομένον αὐτῷ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “heaven has given it to him” (See: Active or Passive)

ᾖ δεδομένον αὐτῷ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ

Here John the Baptist uses heaven figuratively to refer to God, who dwells in heaven. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “it has been given to him by God” (See: Metonymy)

John 3:28

αὐτοὶ ὑμεῖς

Here, You is plural and refers to all the people to whom John the Baptist is talking. Alternate translation: “You all” or “All of you” (See: Forms of You)

ὅτι εἶπον, οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγὼ ὁ Χριστός, ἀλλ’, ὅτι ἀπεσταλμένος εἰμὶ ἔμπροσθεν ἐκείνου

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “that I said that I am not the Christ but that I have been sent before that one” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

ἀπεσταλμένος εἰμὶ ἔμπροσθεν ἐκείνου

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God sent me before that one” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐκείνου

Here, that refers to Jesus, whom John has called “the Christ” in the previous clause. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “the Christ” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

John 3:29

ὁ ἔχων τὴν νύμφην, νυμφίος ἐστίν…τοῦ νυμφίου…τὴν φωνὴν τοῦ νυμφίου

John the Baptist uses bride and bridegroom figuratively to refer to people who believe in Jesus and Jesus himself, respectively. Since these are important terms for Christians and for Jesus, you should translate the words directly and not provide a non-figurative explanation in the text of your translation. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate these words with similes. Alternate translation: “The one who is like one who has a bride is like a bridegroom … of the one who is like a bridegroom … of the voice of one who is like a bridegroom” (See: Metaphor)

ὁ δὲ φίλος τοῦ νυμφίου

John the Baptist is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “But I am the friend of the bridegroom” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

χαρᾷ χαίρει

These words mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how much joy John had because Jesus had come. Alternate translation: “rejoices greatly” (See: Doublet)

αὕτη…ἡ χαρὰ ἡ ἐμὴ πεπλήρωται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I rejoice greatly” or “I rejoice with complete joy” (See: Active or Passive)

αὕτη…ἡ χαρὰ ἡ ἐμὴ

Here, my refers to John the Baptist, the one who is speaking. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this joy that I, John, have” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

John 3:30

ἐκεῖνον δεῖ αὐξάνειν

Here, that one refers to Jesus, whom John the Baptist called “the bridegroom” in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “It is necessary for Jesus to increase” or “It is necessary for the bridegroom to increase” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

αὐξάνειν…ἐλαττοῦσθαι

John the Baptist uses increase figuratively to refer to growing in importance and influence, while decrease refers to diminishing in importance and influence. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to be more influential … to be less influential” (See: Metaphor)

John 3:31

ὁ ἄνωθεν ἐρχόμενος, ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν…ὁ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἐρχόμενος, ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν

These two phrases mean basically the same thing. John repeats himself to emphasize that Jesus is greater than every person and every thing. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could combine these phrases and include words that show emphasis. Alternate translation: “The one who comes from heaven is certainly above all things” (See: Doublet)

ὁ ἄνωθεν ἐρχόμενος, ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν…ὁ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἐρχόμενος, ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν

Both of these phrases refer to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, the one who comes from above, is above all things … Jesus, the one who comes from heaven, is above all things” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἄνωθεν

Here John the Baptist uses above figuratively to refer to heaven, the place where God dwells. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “from heaven” (See: Metonymy)

ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν

John the Baptist uses above figuratively to refer to having superior status. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is superior to all things” (See: Metaphor)

ὁ ὢν ἐκ τῆς γῆς, ἐκ τῆς γῆς ἐστιν

Here, John the Baptist is referring to himself in the third person, but the statement is also true for all humans other than Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the one who is from the earth, am from the earth” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

ἐκ τῆς γῆς ἐστιν

This phrase refers figuratively to having an earthly origin, which is the case for John the Baptist and every human being other than Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “originates from the earth” or “has an earthly origin” (See: Metaphor)

καὶ ἐκ τῆς γῆς λαλεῖ

This phrase refers figuratively to speaking based on an earthly perspective, which is the perspective of John the Baptist and every human being other than Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and speaks from an earthly perspective” or “and speaks as someone from the earth” (See: Metaphor)

ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν

John the Baptist uses above figuratively to refer to having superior status. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is superior to all things” (See: Metaphor)

John 3:32

ὃ ἑώρακεν καὶ ἤκουσεν, τοῦτο μαρτυρεῖ…μαρτυρίαν αὐτοῦ

He and his in this verse refer to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus testifies about that which he has seen and heard … Jesus’ testimony” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ὃ ἑώρακεν καὶ ἤκουσεν

This phrase refers to what Jesus saw and heard while he was in heaven. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “which he has seen and heard in heaven” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὴν μαρτυρίαν αὐτοῦ, οὐδεὶς λαμβάνει

Here, John the Baptist exaggerates to emphasize that only a few people believed Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “very few people receive his testimony” or “it seems like no one receives his testimony” (See: Hyperbole)

John 3:33

ὁ λαβὼν αὐτοῦ τὴν μαρτυρίαν

This phrase does not refer to a specific person, but to any person who does this thing. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Anyone who has received his testimony” (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

αὐτοῦ τὴν μαρτυρίαν

Here, his refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ testimony” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐσφράγισεν

This expression refers to placing a seal on a document in order to certify that what is written in the document is true. (See: seal, sealed, unsealed) Here this meaning is extended to refer to certifying that God is true. If your readers would not be familiar with this practice of sealing documents, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “has certified” or “has attested” (See: Translate Unknowns)

John 3:34

ὃν…ἀπέστειλεν ὁ Θεὸς

This phrase refers to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, whom God has sent” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

γὰρ

For here indicates that what follows is the reason why the previous sentence is true. We know that Jesus speaks the words of God because God has given him the Holy Spirit. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “We know this because” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

οὐ…δίδωσιν

Here, he refers to God. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God does not give” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

οὐ…ἐκ μέτρου δίδωσιν τὸ Πνεῦμα

John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context, especially this discussion of God giving to his Son in the next verse. Alternate translation: “he does not give the Spirit to him by measure” (See: Ellipsis)

οὐ…ἐκ μέτρου δίδωσιν τὸ Πνεῦμα

This clause is a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that means the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he certainly gives the Spirit without measure” (See: Litotes)

John 3:35

Πατὴρ…Υἱόν

Father and Son are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: Translating Son and Father)

πάντα δέδωκεν ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ

Here, giving into his hand means putting under his power or control. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “has given him control over everything” (See: Idiom)

John 3:36

ὁ πιστεύων

εἰς τὸν Υἱὸν…τῷ Υἱῷ

Son is an important title for Jesus. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ὁ…ἀπειθῶν

The word translated disobeys can also be translated “does not believe.” Alternate translation: “the one who does not believe”

οὐκ ὄψεται ζωήν

John the Baptist uses see metaphorically to refer to experiencing or participating in something. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will not experience life” (See: Metaphor)

οὐκ ὄψεται ζωήν

Here, life refers to eternal life, as indicated by the previous clause. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “will not see eternal life” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἡ ὀργὴ τοῦ Θεοῦ μένει ἐπ’ αὐτόν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of wrath, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “God will continue to be angry against him” (See: Abstract Nouns)

John 4

John 4 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

Jesus leaves Judea for Galilee (4:1–6)
Jesus meets a Samaritan woman (4:7–14)
Jesus teaches the Samaritan woman about worship (4:15–26)
Jesus teaches his disciples about evangelism (4:27–38)
Jesus’ ministry in Samaria (4:39–42)
Jesus goes to Galilee (4:43–45)
Jesus’ second sign: he heals an official’s son (4:46–54)

John 4:7–38 forms one story centered on the teaching of Jesus as the “living water” who gives eternal life to all who believe in him. (See: believe, believer, belief, unbeliever, unbelief)

Special Concepts in this Chapter

“It was necessary for him to pass through Samaria”

Jews avoided traveling through the region of Samaria, because Jews and Samaritans were longtime enemies who hated each other. So Jesus did what most Jews did not want to do. (See: Samaria, Samaritan)

“an hour is coming”

Jesus used these words to begin prophecies about events that could be shorter or longer than sixty minutes. In such instances, “hour” refers to a point in time when something happens, not a set length of time. For example, “an hour … when the true worshipers will worship the Father in spirit and truth” refers to the point in time when people begin to do so (4:23).

The proper place of worship

Long before Jesus came to earth, the Samaritan people had broken the law of Moses by setting up their own temple on Mount Gerizim (4:20). Jesus explained to the Samaritan woman that in the near future it would no longer be important where people worshiped (4:21–24).

Harvest

Harvest refers to the time when people go out to get the food they have planted so they can bring it to their houses and eat it. Jesus used this as a metaphor to teach his followers that they need to go and tell other people about Jesus so those people can be part of God’s kingdom. (See: faith)

“The Samaritan woman”

John probably told this story to show the difference between the Samaritan woman, who believed, and the Jews, who did not believe and would later kill Jesus. (See: believe, believer, belief, unbeliever, unbelief)

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

“in spirit and truth”

The people who truly know who God is and enjoy worshiping him for who the Bible says he is are the ones who truly please him. The place where they worship him is not important.

John 4:1

Verses 1–6 give the background to the next event, which is Jesus’ conversation with a Samaritan woman. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

John 4:1–3 is one long sentence. It may be necessary in your language to divide this long sentence into several shorter sentences.

ὡς οὖν ἔγνω ὁ Ἰησοῦς ὅτι ἤκουσαν οἱ Φαρισαῖοι, ὅτι Ἰησοῦς πλείονας μαθητὰς ποιεῖ καὶ βαπτίζει ἢ Ἰωάννης

If it would be natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Now Jesus was making and baptizing more disciples than John. When he knew that the Pharisees had heard that he was doing this” (See: Information Structure)

ὡς οὖν ἔγνω ὁ Ἰησοῦς

Then here introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later, when Jesus knew” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

John 4:2

Ἰησοῦς αὐτὸς οὐκ ἐβάπτιζεν

Here, himself is used to emphasize that Jesus was not baptizing disciples, but his disciples were doing the baptizing. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

ἀλλ’ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ

Here John is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but his disciples were baptizing people” (See: Ellipsis)

John 4:3

τὴν Ἰουδαίαν…τὴν Γαλιλαίαν

Judea and Galilee are two main regions in the land of Israel. (See: How to Translate Names)

John 4:4

τῆς Σαμαρείας

Samaria is a region in the land of Israel. (See: How to Translate Names)

John 4:5

ἔρχεται οὖν

Then here indicates that the events the story will now relate came after the event just described in verse 3. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “After leaving Judea, he comes” (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

ἔρχεται

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

Συχὰρ

Sychar is the name of a place. (See: How to Translate Names)

John 4:6

ἐκεῖ

In this case, there refers to the town of Sychar mentioned in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “there at Sychar” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ οὖν Ἰησοῦς

Then here indicates that the events the story will now relate came after the event just described in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “When Jesus came to Sychar” (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

κεκοπιακὼς

This clause indicates the reason why Jesus sat by the well. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because he had grown weary” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἐκ τῆς ὁδοιπορίας

This phrase indicates the reason why Jesus had grown weary. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of the journey” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ὥρα ἦν ὡς ἕκτη

In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. Here, the sixth hour indicates a time in the middle of the day, when it would be the hottest. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “about 12:00 PM”

John 4:7

ἔρχεται…λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

δός μοι πεῖν

This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please give me to drink” (See: Imperatives — Other Uses)

δός μοι πεῖν

Here, John records Jesus leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “Give me something to drink” (See: Ellipsis)

John 4:8

οἱ γὰρ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ ἀπεληλύθεισαν

This phrase indicates the reason why Jesus asked the woman for water. The disciples had gone away and taken the tools for drawing water with them, so that Jesus could not draw the water himself. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because his disciples had gone away” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

John 4:9

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

πῶς σὺ Ἰουδαῖος ὢν, παρ’ ἐμοῦ πεῖν αἰτεῖς γυναικὸς Σαμαρείτιδος οὔσης?

The woman is using the question form for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate her words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I cannot believe that you, being a Jew, are asking a Samaritan woman for a drink!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

οὐ…συνχρῶνται

Alternate translation: “do not associate with” or “have nothing to do with”

John 4:10

εἰ ᾔδεις τὴν δωρεὰν τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ τίς ἐστιν ὁ λέγων σοι…σὺ ἂν ᾔτησας αὐτὸν

Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he knows that the condition is not true. He knows that the woman does not know the gift of God or who he is. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “You surely do not know the gift of God and who it is who is saying to you … Otherwise, you would have asked him” (See: Connect — Contrary to Fact Conditions)

τὴν δωρεὰν τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here, the gift of God refers to the “living water” that Jesus mentions at the end of the verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God’s gift of living water”

τὴν δωρεὰν τοῦ Θεοῦ

Jesus uses of to describe a gift that comes from God. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the gift from God” (See: Possession)

τίς ἐστιν ὁ λέγων σοι…ᾔτησας αὐτὸν, καὶ ἔδωκεν

Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “who I am who is saying to you … would have asked me, and I would have given” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

ὁ λέγων σοι, δός μοι πεῖν,

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “who is asking you to give him a drink” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

ὕδωρ ζῶν

The phrase living water usually refers to moving or flowing water. However, Jesus uses living water here figuratively to refer to the Holy Spirit who works in a person to save and transform them. However, the woman does not understand this and Jesus does not explain the metaphor to her in this verse. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

John 4:11

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

κύριε

The Samaritan woman calls Jesus Sir in order to show respect or politeness. (See: lord, Lord, master, sir)

τὸ ὕδωρ τὸ ζῶν

See how you translated the living water in the previous verse.

John 4:12

μὴ σὺ μείζων εἶ τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἰακώβ, ὃς ἔδωκεν ἡμῖν τὸ φρέαρ, καὶ αὐτὸς ἐξ αὐτοῦ ἔπιεν, καὶ οἱ υἱοὶ αὐτοῦ, καὶ τὰ θρέμματα αὐτοῦ?

The woman is using the question form for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate her words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are certainly not greater than our father Jacob, who gave us the well and drank from it himself, and his sons and his cattle!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἐξ αὐτοῦ ἔπιεν

Here, John records the woman leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “drank water from it” (See: Ellipsis)

John 4:13

διψήσει πάλιν

Alternate translation: “will need to drink water again”

John 4:14

ὃς δ’ ἂν πίῃ ἐκ τοῦ ὕδατος οὗ ἐγὼ δώσω αὐτῷ, οὐ μὴ διψήσει…τὸ ὕδωρ ὃ δώσω αὐτῷ γενήσεται ἐν αὐτῷ πηγὴ ὕδατος, ἁλλομένου εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον

Jesus speaks about receiving the Holy Spirit by continuing the metaphor of water. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “but whoever is like one who drinks from the water that I will give him will be like one who never thirsts … the water that I will give him will become like a fountain of water in him, resulting in eternal life” (See: Biblical Imagery — Extended Metaphors)

John 4:15

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

κύριε

The Samaritan woman calls Jesus Sir in order to show respect or politeness. (See: lord, Lord, master, sir)

ἀντλεῖν

Here, draw refers to taking water out of a well using a container that can hold water. Alternate translation: “get water” or “pull water up from the well”

John 4:16

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

John 4:17

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

καλῶς εἶπας, ὅτι ἄνδρα οὐκ ἔχω

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “You have rightly said that you do not have a husband” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

John 4:18

τοῦτο ἀληθὲς εἴρηκας

This you have said refers to the Samaritan woman’s statement in the previous verse that she did not have a husband. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “You have spoken the truth when you said you do not have a husband” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 4:19

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

κύριε

The Samaritan woman calls Jesus Sir in order to show respect or politeness. (See: lord, Lord, master, sir)

θεωρῶ ὅτι προφήτης εἶ σύ

The woman uses see figuratively to refer to understanding something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I understand that you are a prophet” (See: Metaphor)

John 4:20

ἐν τῷ ὄρει τούτῳ

Here, this mountain refers to Mount Gerizim, the mountain where the Samaritans built their own temple. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “here on Mount Gerizim” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὑμεῖς λέγετε

Here the word you is plural and refers to the Jewish people. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you Jewish people say” (See: Forms of You)

ὁ τόπος

Here, the place refers to the Jewish temple, the place where God commanded his people to worship at that time. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish temple” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 4:21

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

γύναι

Here, woman refers to the Samaritan woman. If it is impolite to call someone “woman” in your language, you can use another word that is polite, or leave it out.

ἔρχεται ὥρα

Here, hour refers to a point in time when something happens. It does not refer to a 60-minute length of time. See the discussion of this in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “a point in time is coming” (See: Metonymy)

Πατρί

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἐν τῷ ὄρει τούτῳ

Here, this mountain refers to Mount Gerizim. See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “here on Mount Gerizim” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 4:22

ὑμεῖς…οὐκ οἴδατε

You is plural here in this verse and refers to the Samaritan people. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you Samaritan people … you all do not know” (See: Forms of You)

ἡμεῖς…οἴδαμεν

We here is exclusive. Jesus is only referring to himself and the Jewish people. Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “We Jewish people … we all know” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ὅτι ἡ σωτηρία ἐκ τῶν Ἰουδαίων ἐστίν

The phrase from the Jews indicates that the Jewish people were the people group from which salvation came. This is true because the Savior Jesus was from the Jewish people. This phrase does not mean that the Jewish people themselves will save others from their sins. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “for salvation comes from among the Jewish people” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἡ σωτηρία

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of salvation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the way to be saved” (See: Abstract Nouns)

John 4:23

ἔρχεται ὥρα

See the discussion of an hour is coming in the General Notes to this chapter and see how you translated it in verse 21. (See: Metonymy)

τῷ Πατρὶ…ὁ Πατὴρ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἐν πνεύματι

Here, spirit could refer to: (1) the inner person, which is what a person thinks and feels. Alternate translation: “with their spirits” (2) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “in the Holy Spirit”

ἐν πνεύματι καὶ ἀληθείᾳ

Here, truth refers to thinking correctly of what is true about God, which is revealed in the Bible. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of truth, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in spirit and in accordance with God’s Word” (See: Abstract Nouns)

John 4:24

ἐν πνεύματι καὶ ἀληθείᾳ

See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse.

John 4:25

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ὁ λεγόμενος Χριστός

Christ is the Greek translation of Messiah. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one called Christ in the Greek language” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὅταν ἔλθῃ ἐκεῖνος

Here, he and that one refer to the Messiah. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “When the Messiah may come, the Messiah” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐκεῖνος, ἀναγγελεῖ ἡμῖν ἅπαντα

The words declare everything imply all that the people need to know. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will tell us all that we need to know” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἡμῖν

When the woman said “us,” she was including the people to whom she was speaking, so this would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

John 4:26

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ὁ λαλῶν σοι

Jesus is referring to himself in third person. If this would confuse your readers, you can use the first person form, as in the UST. (See: First, Second or Third Person)

John 4:27

ἐπὶ τούτῳ

Alternate translation: “at the time he said this” or “just as Jesus was saying this”

καὶ ἐθαύμαζον ὅτι μετὰ γυναικὸς ἐλάλει

In the culture of that time, it was very unusual for a Jew to speak with a woman he did not know, especially if they were alone or if that woman was a Samaritan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and they were amazed that he was speaking alone with an unknown woman, because people didn’t usually do that” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τί ζητεῖς?

This question could be spoken to: (1) Jesus. Alternate translation: “What do you want from this woman?” (2) the woman. Alternate translation: “What do you want from him?”

John 4:28

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

τοῖς ἀνθρώποις

Here, the men could refer to: (1) the men who lived in the nearby town and would have been working out in the fields at that time. Alternate translation: “to the men of the town” (2) the people who lived in the nearby town. Alternate translation: “to the people of the town” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

John 4:29

δεῦτε, ἴδετε ἄνθρωπον ὃς εἶπέ μοι πάντα ὅσα ἐποίησα

The Samaritan woman exaggerates to show that she is impressed by how much Jesus knows about her. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “Come see a man who knows very much about me even though I never met him before” (See: Hyperbole)

μήτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ Χριστός

This question is not a rhetorical question. The woman is not sure that Jesus is the Christ, so she asks a question that expects “no” for an answer. However, the fact that she asked the question instead of making a statement indicates that she is uncertain. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in a way that shows her uncertainty. Alternate translation: “Is it even possible that this is the Christ?”

John 4:30

ἐξῆλθον

They here refers to the men or people from the town to whom the woman had spoken. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Your translation will depend on how you translated “the men” in verse 28. Alternate translation: “The men of the town went out” or “The nearby townspeople went out” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

John 4:31

ἐν τῷ μεταξὺ

Alternate translation: “While the woman was going into town” or “During the time that the woman was in the town”

ἠρώτων αὐτὸν οἱ μαθηταὶ λέγοντες

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “the disciples were urging him, and they said” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

Ῥαββεί, φάγε

Here, eat is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Rabbi, please eat” (See: Imperatives — Other Uses)

John 4:32

ἐγὼ βρῶσιν ἔχω φαγεῖν

Here Jesus uses the word food figuratively to refer to doing God’s will, as he states in verse 34. However, his disciples do not understand this and Jesus does not explain the metaphor to them in this verse. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

John 4:33

μή τις ἤνεγκεν αὐτῷ φαγεῖν?

The disciples think Jesus is literally talking about something to eat. They begin asking each other this question, expecting a “no” response. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in a way that shows their uncertainty. Alternate translation: “Is it even possible that someone brought him food to eat?”

John 4:34

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ἐμὸν βρῶμά ἐστιν ἵνα ποιήσω τὸ θέλημα τοῦ πέμψαντός με, καὶ τελειώσω αὐτοῦ τὸ ἔργον

Here Jesus uses food figuratively to refer to obeying God’s will. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could express this with a simile. Alternate translation: “Like food satisfies a hungry person, doing the will of the one who sent me and completing his work satisfies me” (See: Metaphor)

τοῦ πέμψαντός με

Here, the one who sent me refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of God, the one who sent me” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 4:35

οὐχ ὑμεῖς λέγετε

ἰδοὺ

Jesus using the term Behold to call the disciples’ attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: Metaphor)

ἐπάρατε τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς ὑμῶν

This phrase, lift up your eyes, is a common idiom in the Bible that is used to describe the act of looking at something or direct one’s own attention toward something. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “look” (See: Idiom)

θεάσασθε τὰς χώρας

Jesus uses the word fields figuratively to refer to people. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning with a simile or plainly. Alternate translation: “see these people who are like fields” or “see these people” (See: Metaphor)

λευκαί εἰσιν πρὸς θερισμόν ἤδη

Jesus uses the phrase white for harvest figuratively to say that people are ready to receive the message of Jesus, like fields that are ready to be harvested. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could convey the meaning with a simile or do it plainly. Alternate translation: “they are like a field that is ready to be harvested” or “they are already ready to believe my message” (See: Metaphor)

John 4:36

ὁ θερίζων…καὶ ὁ θερίζων

Jesus continues to speak figuratively to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. The act of harvesting crops is used figuratively to refer to the act of proclaiming Jesus’ message to those who are ready to receive it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “The one who is proclaiming the message to those who are being saved is like one who is harvesting … and the one who is like a harvester” (See: Biblical Imagery — Extended Metaphors)

μισθὸν, λαμβάνει

Jesus continues to speak figuratively to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. Those who proclaim Jesus’ message are described as those who receive wages for their labor. Here, wages refers to the joy those who proclaim the message will receive, as indicated by the last clause in this verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “has great joy that is like wages” (See: Biblical Imagery — Extended Metaphors)

καὶ συνάγει καρπὸν εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον

Jesus continues to speak figuratively to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. Jesus uses the phrasefruit for eternal life figuratively to refer to people who believe his message and are forgiven for their sins, so that they can have eternal life with God in heaven. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this as a simile. Alternate translation: “and the people who believe the message and receive eternal life are like the fruit that the one who is harvesting gathers” (See: Biblical Imagery — Extended Metaphors)

ὁ σπείρων

Jesus continues to speak figuratively to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. The act of sowing seed is used figuratively to refer to the act of preparing people to receive Jesus’ message. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “the one who is preparing people to receive the message is like one who is sowing seed” (See: Biblical Imagery — Extended Metaphors)

John 4:37

ἐν…τούτῳ

Here, this could refer to: (1) the statements in the rest of this verse and the next verse. Alternate translation: “regarding what I am about to say,” (2) the statement in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “regarding what I have just said,” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἄλλος ἐστὶν ὁ σπείρων

Jesus continues to speak figuratively to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. This is part of an extended metaphor in verses 35–38. Here, sowing is used figuratively to refer to preparing people to receive the message of Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this with a simile. Alternate translation: “One preparing people to receive the message is like one sowing” (See: Biblical Imagery — Extended Metaphors)

ὁ θερίζων

Jesus continues to speak figuratively to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. This is part of an extended metaphor in verses 35–38. Here, harvesting refers to proclaiming the message of Jesus to those already prepared to receive it. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this with a simile. Alternate translation: “the one proclaiming the message to those who are receiving it is like one harvesting” (See: Biblical Imagery — Extended Metaphors)

John 4:38

ὑμᾶς…ὑμεῖς…ὑμεῖς

In this verse you is plural and refers to the disciples to whom Jesus is speaking. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you who are my disciples … you … you disciples” (See: Forms of You)

ἐγὼ ἀπέστειλα ὑμᾶς θερίζειν

Jesus continues to speak figuratively to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. This is part of an extended metaphor in verses 35–38. Here, harvest refers to proclaiming the message of Jesus to those already prepared to receive it. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this with a simile. Alternate translation: “I sent you to successfully proclaim my message like those who harvest” (See: Biblical Imagery — Extended Metaphors)

ὃ οὐχ ὑμεῖς κεκοπιάκατε

This phrase refers to those who received Jesus’ message when his disciples proclaimed it to them. Although the disciples did not prepare those people to receive the message, they enjoyed the benefits of seeing those people trust in Jesus for salvation. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “those people whom you previously did not prepare to receive the message” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἄλλοι κεκοπιάκασιν

Others here refers to those people who prepared people to receive Jesus’ message before Jesus’ disciples successfully proclaimed that message to them. This would include Jesus, John the Baptist, and possibly the Old Testament prophets as well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Others such as myself and the prophets have labored” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὑμεῖς εἰς τὸν κόπον αὐτῶν εἰσεληλύθατε

Here, entered into means to have joined others or participated with others in doing something. Alternate translation: “you have joined in doing their work”

John 4:39

ἐκ…τῆς πόλεως ἐκείνης

Here, that city refers to the Samaritan city of Sychar. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “from Sychar” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

εἶπέν μοι πάντα ἃ ἐποίησα

Here, everything is an exaggeration. The woman was impressed by how much Jesus knew about her. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “He told me many things that I have done” (See: Hyperbole)

John 4:40

πρὸς αὐτὸν…αὐτὸν…ἔμεινεν

In this verse him and he refer to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to Jesus … Jesus … Jesus stayed” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

John 4:41

τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ

Here, word refers to the message that Jesus proclaimed. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his message” (See: Metonymy)

John 4:42

ἔλεγον

Here, they refers to the Samaritans from Sychar. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the local Samaritans said” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

πιστεύομεν…ἀκηκόαμεν…οἴδαμεν

We throughout this verse refers to the Samaritan townspeople who came to Jesus apart from the Samaritan woman, so the pronoun would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

οὗτός

Here, this one refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this man, Jesus” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

κόσμου

Here, world refers to everyone throughout the world who believes in Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all the believers in the world” (See: Metonymy)

John 4:43

μετὰ δὲ τὰς δύο ἡμέρας

This phrase introduces a new event that happened after the events the story has just related. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “After he had spent two days in Samaria” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

ἐκεῖθεν

Here, there could refer to: (1) the Samaritan city of Sychar. Alternate translation: “from Sychar” (2) the region of Samaria in general. Alternate translation: “from Samaria” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 4:44

γὰρ

Here, for indicates that this verse provides one reason why Jesus wanted to go to Galilee. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “He went to Galilee because” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

αὐτὸς γὰρ Ἰησοῦς ἐμαρτύρησεν

The reflexive pronoun himself is added to emphasize that Jesus had testified or said this. You can translate this in your language in a way that will give emphasis to a person. (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

προφήτης ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ πατρίδι, τιμὴν οὐκ ἔχει

Alternate translation: “people do not show respect or honor to a prophet of their own country” or “a prophet is not respected by the people in his own community”

ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ πατρίδι

This could refer to: (1) the whole region of Galilee where Jesus came from. Alternate translation: “in the Galilee region where he was from” (2) the specific town Jesus grew up in, which is Nazareth. Alternate translation: “in his hometown of Nazareth”

John 4:45

ὅτε οὖν

Here, therefore indicates that what follows is the result of what Jesus had testified in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “As a result of this being true, when” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἐδέξαντο αὐτὸν οἱ Γαλιλαῖοι

Since this verse gives the result of Jesus saying in the previous verse that a prophet was not honored in his own country, it is important to indicate that welcoming Jesus was not the same as honoring him. They welcomed him because he did miracles, not because they honored him as a prophet. Alternate translation: “the Galileans only welcomed him”

πάντα ἑωρακότες

This clause indicates the reason why the Galileans welcomed Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because they had seen all the things” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

πάντα ἑωρακότες

Here, all is an exaggeration that refers to the Galileans having seen many of Jesus’ miracles. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “having seen many of the things” (See: Hyperbole)

ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ…εἰς τὴν ἑορτήν

Here, the festival refers the Passover festival, as indicated in 2:12–25. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the Passover festival … to the Passover” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 4:46

οὖν

Then indicates that the events which the story will now relate came after the event it has just described. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “After Jesus entered Galilee and the Galileans welcomed him” (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

τὴν Κανὰ

See how you translated this name in 2:1. (See: How to Translate Names)

Καφαρναούμ

See how you translated Capernaum in 2:12. (See: How to Translate Names)

καὶ ἦν τις βασιλικὸς

This phrase introduces a new character in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. The expression royal official identifies this man as someone who was in the service of the king. Since he is a new participant, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could call him something like “a man who was a government official who served the king” (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

John 4:47

οὗτος

He here refers to the royal official. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The official” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

τῆς Ἰουδαίας

See how you translated Judea in verse 3. (See: How to Translate Names)

τὴν Γαλιλαίαν

See how you translated Galilee in 1:43. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἤμελλεν

Here, he refers to the royal official’s son. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the official’s son was about” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

John 4:48

ἐὰν μὴ σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα ἴδητε, οὐ μὴ πιστεύσητε

If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Only if you see signs and wonders will you believe” (See: Double Negatives)

ἴδητε…πιστεύσητε

The word you is plural in this verse. This means that Jesus was not only speaking to the royal official, but also to the other people who were there. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you all would see … you all would … believe” (See: Forms of You)

σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα

This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word wonders describes the character of Jesus’ miraculous signs. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “wonderful miraculous signs” (See: Hendiadys)

John 4:49

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

κύριε

The royal official calls Jesus Sir in order to show respect or politeness. See how you translated this word in 4:11. (See: lord, Lord, master, sir)

κατάβηθι

This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “please come down” (See: Imperatives — Other Uses)

John 4:50

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ὁ ἄνθρωπος

Here, the man refers to the royal official who was introduced in verse 46. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “The royal official” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐπίστευσεν…τῷ λόγῳ

Here, word refers to all that Jesus said to the man. It does not refer to one specific word that Jesus said. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “believed the words” (See: Metonymy)

John 4:51

αὐτοῦ

In this verse he, his, and him refer to the royal official who was introduced in verse 46. If it would be misunderstood to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the royal official” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

λέγοντες, ὅτι ὁ παῖς αὐτοῦ ζῇ

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this as a direct quotation. You will also need to adjust the sentence to indicate to whom they are speaking. Alternate translation: “saying, ‘Your son lives’” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

John 4:52

ἐπύθετο οὖν τὴν ὥραν παρ’ αὐτῶν ἐν ᾗ κομψότερον ἔσχεν

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “So he asked from them, ‘In what hour did he begin to improve?’” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

ἔσχεν

Here, he refers to the royal official’s son who was ill. If it would be misunderstood to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “his son” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ὥραν ἑβδόμην

In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. Here, the seventh hour indicates a time in the middle of the day. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “at about one o’clock in the afternoon”

John 4:53

ὁ πατὴρ

Here, the father refers to the royal official who was introduced in verse 46. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the royal official” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

εἶπεν αὐτῷ ὁ Ἰησοῦς, ὁ υἱός σου ζῇ

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Jesus had said to him that his son lives” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

ἐπίστευσεν αὐτὸς

John uses the word himself to emphasize the importance of this event. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “that same royal official … believed” (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

John 4:54

τοῦτο δὲ πάλιν δεύτερον σημεῖον ἐποίησεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς

This verse is a comment about the events described in 4:46–53. John wrote much about the miraculous signs Jesus did. This is the second of those signs. Alternate translation: “That was the second sign Jesus did”

σημεῖον

See how you translated this term, sign, in 2:11. See also the discussion of signs in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracle”

John 5

John 5 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

Jesus’ third sign: he heals a paralyzed man (5:1–9)
Jewish leaders oppose Jesus’ ministry (5:10–18)
Jesus says he is equal with God (5:19–30)
Jesus’ witnesses are John the Baptist, Jesus’ works, God, and the Scriptures (5:31–47)

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Healing water

Many of the Jews believed that God would heal people who got into some of the pools in Jerusalem when the waters were “stirred up.” The man Jesus healed in this chapter was one of those people (5:2–7).

Testimony

In the Bible, a testimony is what one person says about another person. What a person says about himself is not as important as what other people say about that person. In this chapter, Jesus tells the Jews that God had told them who Jesus was, so he did not need to tell them who he was (5:34–37). This was because God had told the writers of the Old Testament what his Messiah would do, and Jesus had done everything they had written that he would do (5:44–47).

The resurrection of life and the resurrection of judgment

In this chapter, Jesus mentions two resurrections, the resurrection of life and the resurrection of judgment (5:28–29). Regarding the resurrection of life, God will make some people alive again, and they will live with him forever, because he gives them his grace. Regarding the resurrection of judgment, God will make some people alive again and they will live apart from him forever, because he will treat them justly.

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

The Son, the Son of God, and the Son of Man

Jesus refers to himself in this chapter as the “Son” (5:19), the “Son of God” (5:25), and the “Son of Man” (5:27). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: First, Second or Third Person)

“Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter (5:27). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: Son of Man, son of man and First, Second or Third Person)

John 5:1

Verses 1–4 give background information about the setting of the story. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

μετὰ ταῦτα

ἀνέβη…εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα

Jerusalem is located on the top of a hill. Therefore, roads to Jerusalem went up. If your language has a different word for going up a hill than for walking on level ground or going down a gill, you should use it here.

John 5:2

κολυμβήθρα

This pool was a large manmade hole in the ground that people filled with water and used for bathing. Sometimes they lined these pools with tiles or stones.

Ἑβραϊστὶ

When John says in Hebrew in his Gospel, he refers to the language spoken by the Jews during his time. This language is now called Jewish Aramaic. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in Jewish Aramaic” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Βηθζαθά

Bethesda is the name of a place. (See: How to Translate Names)

στοὰς

These porches were structures with roofs that had at least one wall missing and were attached to the sides of buildings.

John 5:5

ἦν δέ τις ἄνθρωπος ἐκεῖ

This verse introduces the man lying beside the pool as a new character to the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

ἦν…ἐκεῖ

Here, there refers being at the pool called Bethesda in verse 2. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “was at the Bethesda pool” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 5:6

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

John 5:7

κύριε

The man calls Jesus Sir in order to show respect or politeness. (See: lord, Lord, master, sir)

ὅταν ταραχθῇ τὸ ὕδωρ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, verse 4 indicates who the man believed was doing the action. Alternate translation: “when an angel moves the water” (See: Active or Passive)

εἰς τὴν κολυμβήθραν

See how you translated pool in verse 2.

ἄλλος πρὸ ἐμοῦ καταβαίνει

The man believed that only the first person to enter the water after the water stirred would be healed. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “another goes down before me and is healed”

John 5:8

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

John 5:9

δὲ…ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ

John uses the word Now to show that the words that follow provide background information for a new event in the story that takes place in verses 10–13. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “The day on which Jesus healed the man” (See: Background Information)

John 5:10

ἔλεγον οὖν οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in 1:19. (See: Synecdoche)

τῷ τεθεραπευμένῳ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John indicates who did the action in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “to the one whom Jesus had healed” (See: Active or Passive)

Σάββατόν ἐστιν

Your language might use an indefinite article rather than the definite article here, since the synagogue ruler is not speaking of a specific Sabbath. Alternate translation: “It is a Sabbath day”

οὐκ ἔξεστίν σοι ἆραι τὸν κράβαττον σου

Here, the Jewish leaders (who were probably Pharisees) said this because they thought that the man was doing work by carrying his mat, and so he was disobeying God’s command to rest and not work on the Sabbath. (See: law, law of Moses, law of Yahweh, law of God and work, works, deeds and Sabbath) If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is not permitted for you, according to our law, to carry your mat” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 5:11

ὁ ποιήσας με ὑγιῆ

Alternate translation: “The one who made me well” or “The one who healed me of my illness”

ἐκεῖνός μοι εἶπεν, ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “that one said to me to pick up my mat” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

John 5:12

ἠρώτησαν αὐτόν

They here refers to the Jewish leaders and him refers to the man whom Jesus had healed. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The Jewish leaders asked the man who was healed” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ὁ εἰπών σοι, ἆρον

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “who said to you to pick it up” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

John 5:13

ὁ…ἰαθεὶς

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John indicates who did the action in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “the one whom Jesus had healed” (See: Active or Passive)

τίς ἐστιν

John is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “who it was who had healed him” (See: Ellipsis)

ὄχλου ὄντος ἐν τῷ τόπῳ

This could refer to: (1) the reason why Jesus left secretly. Alternate translation: “because a crowd was in the place” (2) the time when Jesus left secretly. Alternate translation: “while a crowd was in the place” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ὄχλου

The word crowd is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a group of people” or “many people” (See: Collective Nouns)

John 5:14

μετὰ ταῦτα

After these things introduces a new event that happened some time after the events which the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

εὑρίσκει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

αὐτὸν…αὐτῷ

Here, him refers to the man whom Jesus had healed. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the healed man … that man” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἴδε

Jesus uses the term Behold to call the man’s attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: Metaphor)

John 5:15

τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in 5:10. (See: Synecdoche)

John 5:16

καὶ διὰ τοῦτο, ἐδίωκον οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ὅτι ταῦτα ἐποίει ἐν Σαββάτῳ.

The writer uses the phrase And because of this to show that previous verse gave background information for what John will now present. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Now the Jews began to persecute Jesus because he was doing these things on the Sabbath.” (See: Background Information)

διὰ τοῦτο

Here, this refers to what the man whom Jesus had healed told the Jewish leaders. The Jewish leaders began to persecute Jesus because he had healed the man on the Sabbath, which was something they believed was against the law of Moses. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because Jesus had healed him on the Sabbath” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this in the previous verse. (See: Synecdoche)

ὅτι ταῦτα ἐποίει

This phrase indicates a second reason why the Jewish leaders began persecuting Jesus. Here, these things refers to Jesus healing people on the Sabbath. The plural things indicates that he healed on the Sabbath multiple times, not just on the occasion recorded in verses 5–9. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because he was doing these healings” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐν Σαββάτῳ

Your language might use an indefinite article rather than the definite article here, since the synagogue ruler is not speaking of a specific Sabbath. Alternate translation: “on a Sabbath day”

John 5:17

ὁ Πατήρ μου

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 5:18

διὰ τοῦτο οὖν

Here, this refers to what Jesus had said in the previous verse. One of the reasons why the Jewish leaders wanted to kill Jesus was that Jesus called God his Father. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because Jesus said this, therefore” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in 5:10. (See: Synecdoche)

ὅτι οὐ μόνον ἔλυε τὸ Σάββατον

The phrase breaking the Sabbath is an idiom that means to disobey the regulations for the Sabbath that God gave in the law of Moses. The Pharisees themselves added many regulations which they considered to be equal to those God had given. It was the additional Jewish regulations that Jesus was disobeying, thereby making the Jewish leaders very angry with him. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because he not only was disobeying their Sabbath regulations” (See: Idiom)

Πατέρα

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἴσον ἑαυτὸν ποιῶν τῷ Θεῷ

This clause, making himself equal to God, is the result of what Jesus had said in the previous clause. The result of Jesus calling God Father is that he was claiming to be equal with God. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the result being that he was making himself equal to God” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

John 5:19

οὖν

Therefore indicates that what Jesus is about to say is a response to the accusations of the Jewish leaders that were mentioned in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because the Jewish leaders had made these accusations” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

αὐτοῖς

Here, them refers to the Jewish leaders who wanted to kill Jesus and made accusations against him in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the Jewish authorities” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν

Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this in 1:51. (See: Doublet)

λέγω ὑμῖν

Since Jesus is speaking to a group of Jewish leaders, you is plural here and through 5:47. If your language does not have a different form for plural you, you can use another way to express it. Alternate translation: “I say to you Jews” or “I say to you all” (See: Forms of You)

Υἱὸς…Πατέρα

Son and Father are important titles that describe the relationship between Jesus and God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ὁ Υἱὸς…καὶ ὁ Υἱὸς…ποιεῖ

Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If this would confuse your readers, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: First, Second or Third Person)

ἀφ’ ἑαυτοῦ

Here, from is used to indicate the source of Jesus’ teaching and ability to do miracles. His teaching and miracles could only have authority if they came from God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “on his own authority” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τι βλέπῃ τὸν Πατέρα ποιοῦντα

Jesus uses see figuratively to refer to knowing something. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what he would perceive the Father doing” (See: Metaphor)

John 5:20

ὁ…Πατὴρ…τὸν Υἱὸν

Father and Son are important titles that describe the relationship between Jesus and God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

τὸν Υἱὸν

As in the previous verse, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: First, Second or Third Person)

δείκνυσιν αὐτῷ…δείξει αὐτῷ

Jesus uses shows and show figuratively to refer to revealing or making something known. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he reveals to him … he will reveal to him” (See: Metaphor)

δείξει αὐτῷ

Here, he refers to God the Father and him refers to Jesus the Son. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Father will reveal to the Son” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

μείζονα τούτων…ἔργα

Here, works refers specifically to miracles. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “greater miracles than these” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

μείζονα τούτων…ἔργα

Here, these refers to the miracles that Jesus had already performed by the time he spoke these words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “greater works than these miracles I have already performed” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 5:21

Πατὴρ…Υἱὸς

Father and Son are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ζῳοποιεῖ…οὓς θέλει ζῳοποιεῖ

The phrase makes them alive could refer to: (1) eternal life. Alternate translation: “makes them have eternal life … makes whom he desires have eternal life” (2) physical life, in which case it would repeat the idea of “raises the dead” in the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “makes them live again … makes alive again whom he desires” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ Υἱὸς

As in the previous two verses, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “I, the Son” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

John 5:22

ὁ Πατὴρ…τῷ Υἱῷ

Father and Son are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: Translating Son and Father)

τὴν κρίσιν

Here, judgment refers to the legal authority to judge people as guilty or innocent. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of judgment, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “power to judge others” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τῷ Υἱῷ

As in the previous three verses, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: First, Second or Third Person)

John 5:23

τὸν Υἱὸν…τὸν Πατέρα. ὁ μὴ τιμῶν τὸν Υἱὸν, οὐ τιμᾷ τὸν Πατέρα

Father and Son are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: Translating Son and Father)

τὸν Υἱὸν…ὁ μὴ τιμῶν τὸν Υἱὸν

As in the previous four verses, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: First, Second or Third Person)

τὸν Πατέρα, τὸν πέμψαντα αὐτόν

Here, this phrase refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God, the Father who sent him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 5:24

ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν

Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this in 1:51. (See: Doublet)

λέγω ὑμῖν

ὁ τὸν λόγον μου ἀκούων

Here, hearing means listening to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. It does not mean simply to hear what someone says. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one heeding my word” (See: Metaphor)

τὸν λόγον μου

Here, word refers to the message or teachings of Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my message” (See: Metonymy)

τῷ πέμψαντί με

Here, the one who sent me refers to God. See how you translated it in 4:34. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

εἰς κρίσιν οὐκ ἔρχεται

Jesus speaks figuratively of judgment as if it were a place a person could enter. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will not be judged” (See: Metaphor)

μεταβέβηκεν ἐκ τοῦ θανάτου εἰς τὴν ζωήν

Here, passed means to move from one state to another. Alternate translation: “he has moved from death to life”

John 5:25

ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν

Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this in the previous verse. (See: Doublet)

λέγω ὑμῖν

ἔρχεται ὥρα

See the discussion of an hour is coming in the General Notes to Chapter 4 and see how you translated it in 4:21. (See: Metonymy)

οἱ νεκροὶ

Here, the dead could refer to: (1) people who are spiritually dead. Alternate translation: “the spiritually dead” (2) people who are physically dead. Alternate translation: “the physically dead” (3) both the spiritually dead and physically dead. In this case, an hour that is coming would refer to the future resurrection of the dead while is now would refer to those spiritually dead people who were listening to Jesus when he spoke these words. Alternate translation: “the spiritually dead and physically dead” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ

Son of God is an important title for Jesus. (See: Translating Son and Father)

τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ

As in the previous verses in this paragraph, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “of me, the Son of God” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

ἀκούσουσιν…οἱ ἀκούσαντες

Here, heard means to listen to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. See how you translated “hearing” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “will heed … those who have heeded” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ζήσουσιν

This could refer to: (1) having eternal life. Alternate translation: “will have eternal life” (2) physical life, as in being resurrected after death. Alternate translation: “will become alive again” (3) both eternal life and physical life. Alternate translation: “will have eternal life and become alive again” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 5:26

ὁ Πατὴρ…τῷ Υἱῷ

Father and Son are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἔχει ζωὴν ἐν ἑαυτῷ…ζωὴν, ἔχειν ἐν ἑαυτῷ

Here, the phrases has life and have life refer to being the source of life or having the ability to create life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “is the source of life … the right to be the source of life” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τῷ Υἱῷ…ζωὴν, ἔχειν ἐν ἑαυτῷ

As in the previous verses in this paragraph, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: First, Second or Third Person)

John 5:27

ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ…ἐστίν

The first occurrence of he refers to God the Father, but him and the second occurrence of he refer to the Son of Man. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Father gave the Son … the Son is” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ…Υἱὸς Ἀνθρώπου ἐστίν

As in the previous verses in this paragraph, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: First, Second or Third Person)

ἐξουσίαν ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ κρίσιν ποιεῖν

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of authority and judgment, you could express the same ideas in other ways. Alternate translation: “he authorized him to act as judge” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Υἱὸς Ἀνθρώπου

See how you translated this phrase in 1:51. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 5:28

μὴ θαυμάζετε τοῦτο

Here, this refers to the Son of Man’s authority to give eternal life and to carry out judgment, as stated in the previous two verses. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Do not be amazed that the Father has given the Son this authority” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἔρχεται ὥρα

See the discussion of an hour is coming in the General Notes to Chapter 4 and see how you translated it in verse 25. (See: Metonymy)

ἀκούσουσιν τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ

As in the previous verses in this paragraph, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: First, Second or Third Person)

John 5:29

ἀνάστασιν ζωῆς

In this phrase, Jesus uses of to describe a resurrection that results in eternal life. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. For further discussion of this phrase, see the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “a resurrection that results in life” (See: Possession)

ἀνάστασιν κρίσεως

In this phrase, Jesus uses of to describe a resurrection that results in eternal judgment. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. For further discussion of this phrase, see the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “a resurrection that results in judgment” (See: Possession)

John 5:30

ἀπ’ ἐμαυτοῦ

Here, from is used to indicate the source of Jesus’ teaching and ability to do miracles. His teaching and miracles could only have authority if they came from God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “on my own authority” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

καθὼς ἀκούω, κρίνω

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Just as I hear from the Father, I judge” (See: Ellipsis)

ἡ κρίσις ἡ ἐμὴ δικαία ἐστίν

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of judgment and righteous, you could express the same ideas in other ways. Alternate translation: “I judge rightly” or “I judge justly” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τοῦ πέμψαντός με

Here, the one who sent me refers to God. See how you translated it in 4:34. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 5:31

ἐὰν ἐγὼ μαρτυρῶ περὶ ἐμαυτοῦ, ἡ μαρτυρία μου οὐκ ἔστιν ἀληθής.

Here Jesus is referring to a rule in the law of Moses. According to Deuteronomy 19:15, a statement had to be confirmed by at least two witnesses in order to be considered true in legal decisions. If your audience is not familiar with the law of Moses in the Old Testament, then you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You know that the law of Moses states that if I testify about myself, my testimony is not true” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐὰν ἐγὼ μαρτυρῶ περὶ ἐμαυτοῦ

Jesus assumed that his listeners understood that he was referring to testifying about himself without any other witnesses. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “If I testify about myself without any other witnesses” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 5:32

ἄλλος ἐστὶν ὁ μαρτυρῶν περὶ ἐμοῦ

Here, another refers to God the Father. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “There is another who is testifying about me, the Father” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 5:33

ὑμεῖς ἀπεστάλκατε πρὸς Ἰωάννην

Here and through 5:47, You is plural and refers to the Jewish leaders to whom Jesus is speaking. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You Jewish authorities sent to John” (See: Forms of You)

ὑμεῖς ἀπεστάλκατε πρὸς Ἰωάννην

Jesus is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “You have sent messengers to John” (See: Ellipsis)

πρὸς Ἰωάννην

Here, John refers to Jesus’ cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_tw/src/branch/master/bible/names/johnthebaptist.md) It does not refer to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to John the Baptist” or “to John the Immerser” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 5:34

παρὰ ἀνθρώπου

Here, man does not refer to any specific man, but to any human being. Alternate translation: “from mankind” or “from anyone” (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

ταῦτα λέγω

Here, these things could refer to: (1) what Jesus said about John the Baptist in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “I say this about John” (2) all that Jesus has said in verses 17–33. Alternate translation: “I say these things about myself and John” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἵνα ὑμεῖς σωθῆτε

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “so that God might save you” (See: Active or Passive)

John 5:35

ἐκεῖνος

That one here refers to Jesus’ cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: John (the Baptist)) If it would be misunderstood to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐκεῖνος ἦν ὁ λύχνος ὁ καιόμενος καὶ φαίνων

Jesus uses the word lamp figuratively to refer to John the Baptist. In the way that lamps in those days burned oil and shined light, so John’s teaching helped people understand God’s truth and prepared them to receive Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “That one taught you the truth about God” or “That one was like a lamp that was burning and shining” (See: Metaphor)

ἐν τῷ φωτὶ αὐτοῦ

Jesus uses the word light figuratively to refer to John the Baptist’s teaching. In the way that light enables people to see in the dark, so John’s teaching helped people understand God’s truth and prepared them to receive Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “in his teaching” or “in his teaching that was like a light” (See: Metaphor)

πρὸς ὥραν

Here, hour refers to a short amount of time. It does not mean a 60-minute period of time or a specific point in time. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for a moment” (See: Metonymy)

John 5:36

γὰρ

Here, for indicates that what follows is an explanation of the “testimony” Jesus has mentioned in the previous clause. Alternate translation: “that testimony is”

τὰ…ἔργα

Here, works could refer to: (1) the miracles that Jesus did. Alternate translation: “the miracles” (2) Jesus’ miracles and teaching. Alternate translation: “the miracles and teaching”

ὁ Πατὴρ…ὅτι ὁ Πατήρ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

αὐτὰ τὰ ἔργα ἃ ποιῶ, μαρτυρεῖ περὶ ἐμοῦ

Here Jesus is speaking of works figuratively as though they were a person who could testify about who he is. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the very works that I do—are evidence for who I am” (See: Personification)

John 5:37

ὁ πέμψας με Πατὴρ, ἐκεῖνος μεμαρτύρηκεν

The reflexive pronoun himself emphasizes that it is the Father, not someone less important, who has testified about who Jesus is. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “none other than the Father himself who sent me has testified” (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

ὁ πέμψας με Πατὴρ

Here this phrase refers to God. See how you translated it in 5:23. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 5:38

τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ

Here, word refers to the teachings that God gave to his people in the Scriptures. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his teachings” or “the Scriptures he gave us” (See: Metonymy)

τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ οὐκ ἔχετε ἐν ὑμῖν μένοντα

Here Jesus is speaking of God’s word as if it were an object that could remain inside people. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you do not live according to his word” (See: Metaphor)

ὃν ἀπέστειλεν ἐκεῖνος, τούτῳ

This phrase refers to Jesus. He is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “me, the one whom he has sent … me whom” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

John 5:39

ἐν αὐταῖς ζωὴν αἰώνιον ἔχειν

Some Jews in Jesus’ time believed that a person could earn their way to heaven by studying the Scriptures and doing good deeds. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you will get eternal life if you study them” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐν αὐταῖς…ἐκεῖναί εἰσιν αἱ

In this verse, them, these, and the ones all refer to the Scriptures. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state some of these words explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the Scriptures … these Scriptures are the ones” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐκεῖναί εἰσιν αἱ μαρτυροῦσαι περὶ ἐμοῦ

Here Jesus is speaking of the Scriptures figuratively as though they were a person who is testifying about who he is. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “these indicate who I am” (See: Personification)

John 5:40

οὐ θέλετε ἐλθεῖν πρός με

Here, come does not mean to merely come near Jesus, but it means to follow him and be his disciple. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you are not willing to come and by my disciples” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ζωὴν ἔχητε

Here, life refers to eternal life. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you might have eternal life” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 5:41

παρὰ ἀνθρώπων

Although the term men is masculine, Jesus uses the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

John 5:42

τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ

This could mean: (1) they did not love God. Alternate translation: “love for God” (2) they had not received God’s love. Alternate translation: “love from God” (See: Possession)

John 5:43

ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Πατρός μου

Here, John records Jesus using the word name figuratively to refer to God’s power and authority. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with the authority of my Father” (See: Metonymy)

τοῦ Πατρός

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

οὐ λαμβάνετέ με

Here, receive means to accept a person into one’s presence with friendliness. See how you translated a similar phrase in 1:11. Alternate translation: “you do not welcome me”

ἐὰν ἄλλος ἔλθῃ ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τῷ ἰδίῳ

Here, John records Jesus using the word name figuratively to refer to authority. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “If another comes in his own authority” (See: Metonymy)

John 5:44

πῶς δύνασθε ὑμεῖς πιστεῦσαι, δόξαν παρὰ ἀλλήλων λαμβάνοντες, καὶ τὴν δόξαν τὴν παρὰ τοῦ μόνου Θεοῦ, οὐ ζητεῖτε?

Jesus is using the question form for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There is no way you are able to believe, receiving glory from one another, and are not seeking the glory that is from the only God!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

πιστεῦσαι

John records Jesus leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “to believe me” (See: Ellipsis)

δόξαν παρὰ ἀλλήλων λαμβάνοντες

Here, receiving could refer to: (1) the time they are receiving glory. Alternate translation: “while receiving glory from one another” (2) a causal statement. Alternate translation: “since receiving glory from one another”

John 5:45

ἔστιν ὁ κατηγορῶν ὑμῶν Μωϋσῆς, εἰς ὃν ὑμεῖς ἠλπίκατε

Moses here could refer to: (1) the person named Moses who gave the Israelites the law of Moses. (2) the law of Moses itself. Alternate translation: “Moses accuses you in the Law, the very Law in which you have hoped” (See: Metonymy)

John 5:46

εἰ

John records Jesus making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. Jesus knows that the Jewish leaders do not truly believe Moses. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “you must not believe Moses since you do not believe me” (See: Connect — Contrary to Fact Conditions)

John 5:47

εἰ…οὐ πιστεύετε

John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you do not believe” (See: Connect — Factual Conditions)

πῶς τοῖς ἐμοῖς ῥήμασιν πιστεύσετε?

Jesus is using the question form for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you will certainly never believe my words!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τοῖς ἐμοῖς ῥήμασιν

Here, words refers to what Jesus said to these Jewish leaders. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what I have told you” (See: Metonymy)

John 6

John 6 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

Jesus’ fourth sign: Jesus feeds a large crowd (6:1–14)
Jesus’ fifth sign: Jesus walks on the Sea of Galilee (6:15–21)
Jesus says he is the bread of life (6:22–71)

Special Concepts in this Chapter

King

The king of any nation was the richest and most powerful person in that nation. The people wanted Jesus to be their king because he gave them food. They thought he would make the Jews into the richest and most powerful nation in the world. They did not understand that Jesus came to die so God could forgive his people’s sins and that the world would persecute his people.

Important Metaphors in this Chapter

Bread

Bread was the most common and important food in Jesus’ day, so the word “bread” was their general word for “food.” It is often difficult to translate the word “bread” into the languages of people who do not eat bread, because the general word for food in some languages refers to food that did not exist in Jesus’ culture. Jesus used the word “bread” to refer to himself. He wanted the people to understand that they need him so they can have eternal life, just as people need food to sustain physical life. (See: Metaphor and Synecdoche)

Eating the flesh and drinking the blood

When Jesus said, “unless you would eat the flesh of the Son of Man and would drink his blood, you do not have life in yourselves,” he was speaking figuratively of believing in his sacrificial death on the cross for the forgiveness of sins. He also knew that before he died he would tell his followers to commemorate this sacrifice by eating bread and drinking wine. In the event this chapter describes, he expected that his hearers would understand that he was using a metaphor but would not understand to what the metaphor referred. (See: flesh and blood)

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

Parenthetical ideas

Several times in this passage, John explains something or gives the reader some background information needed to better understand the story. These explanations are intended to give the reader some additional knowledge without interrupting the flow of the narrative. This information is placed inside parentheses.

“Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” several times in this chapter. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: Son of Man, son of man and First, Second or Third Person)

John 6:1

Jesus had traveled from Jerusalem to Galilee. A crowd has followed him up a mountainside. Verses 1–4 tell the setting of this part of the story. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

μετὰ ταῦτα

This phrase, After these things, introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

τῆς θαλάσσης τῆς Γαλιλαίας τῆς Τιβεριάδος

The Sea of Galilee was called by several names, one of which was Sea of Tiberias. (See: Sea of Galilee, Sea of Kinnereth, lake of Gennesaret, Sea of Tiberias) If having two different names for the same place would be confusing in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the Sea of Galilee (also known as the Sea of Tiberias)” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 6:2

ὄχλος πολύς

See how you translated crowd in 5:13. (See: Collective Nouns)

σημεῖα

See how you translated signs in 2:11. See also the discussion of signs in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracles”

John 6:4

ἦν δὲ ἐγγὺς τὸ Πάσχα, ἡ ἑορτὴ τῶν Ἰουδαίων

In this verse John briefly stops telling about the events in the story in order to give background information about when the events happened. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “This event took place near the time of the Passover, the festival of the Jews” (See: Background Information)

John 6:5

οὖν

Then here could mean: (1) what follows is the next event in the story. Alternate translation: “Next” (2) what follows is the result of what happened in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “Therefore,” (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

ἐπάρας…τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς

Here, “lifted up his eyes” is an idiom that means to look upward. See how you translated a similar phrase in 4:35. (See: Idiom)

πολὺς ὄχλος

See how you translated crowd in 5:13. (See: Collective Nouns)

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

Φίλιππον

See how you translated the man’s name,Philip, in 1:43. (See: How to Translate Names)

John 6:6

τοῦτο δὲ ἔλεγεν πειράζων αὐτόν; αὐτὸς γὰρ ᾔδει τί ἔμελλεν ποιεῖν

In this verse John briefly stops telling about the events in the story in order to explain why Jesus asked Philip where to buy bread. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Now he said this at that time to test him, for he himself knew what he was going to do” (See: Background Information)

πειράζων αὐτόν

Here John is stating the purpose for which Jesus asked Philip the question in the previous verse. In your translation, follow the conventions of your language for purpose clauses. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that he could test Philip” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

αὐτόν

Here, him refers to Philip. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Philip” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

αὐτὸς…ᾔδει

Here, John uses the reflexive pronoun himself to make clear that the word he refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus himself knew” (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

John 6:7

διακοσίων δηναρίων ἄρτοι

The word denarii is the plural form of “denarius.” It was a denomination of money in the Roman Empire that was equivalent to one days’ wages. Alternate translation: “The amount of bread that cost 200 days’ wages” (See: Biblical Money)

John 6:8

Ἀνδρέας

See how you translated the name Andrew in 1:40. (See: How to Translate Names)

Σίμωνος Πέτρου

See how you translated the name Simon Peter in 1:40. (See: How to Translate Names)

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

John 6:9

πέντε ἄρτους κριθίνους

The grain barley was a common grain eaten by the poor in Israel because it was cheaper than wheat. (See: barley) They would bake the barley into bread loaves, which are lumps of flour dough that a person has shaped and baked. Alternate translation: “five loaves of barley bread” (See: Translate Unknowns)

ταῦτα τί ἐστιν εἰς τοσούτους?

Andrew is using the question form to emphasize that they do not have enough food to feed everyone.If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “these are not enough to feed so many!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

John 6:10

εἶπεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς, ποιήσατε τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ἀναπεσεῖν.

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Jesus said to make the men sit down” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

τοὺς ἀνθρώπους

Although the term men is masculine, Jesus uses the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “the people” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

ἦν δὲ χόρτος πολὺς ἐν τῷ τόπῳ. ἀνέπεσαν οὖν οἱ ἄνδρες, τὸν ἀριθμὸν ὡς πεντακισχίλιοι.

If it would be natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “So the men sat down, about 5,000 in number. (Now there was a lot of grass in the place.)” (See: Information Structure)

ἦν δὲ χόρτος πολὺς ἐν τῷ τόπῳ

John briefly stops telling about the events in the story in order to give background information about the place where this event happened. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “The place where the people were all coming together had a lot of grass” (See: Background Information)

ἀνέπεσαν οὖν οἱ ἄνδρες, τὸν ἀριθμὸν ὡς πεντακισχίλιοι

Here, men refers specifically to adult males. Although the term for “men” used earlier in this verse refers to a group that included men, women, and children, here John is counting only the men.

John 6:11

τοὺς ἄρτους

This means loaves of bread, which are lumps of flour dough that a person has shaped and baked. These loaves are those five barley loaves mentioned in verse 9. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the five loaves of barley bread” (See: Translate Unknowns)

εὐχαριστήσας

John leaves out some words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “having given thanks to God for the food” (See: Ellipsis)

διέδωκεν

Here, he refers to “Jesus and his disciples.” Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples gave them” (See: Synecdoche)

τῶν ὀψαρίων

These fish are the two fish mentioned in verse 9. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those two small fish” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 6:12

ἐνεπλήσθησαν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they had finished eating” or “they had filled themselves” (See: Active or Passive)

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

λέγει τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, συναγάγετε

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “he says to his disciples to gather up” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

John 6:13

κοφίνους

Here, baskets refers to large baskets that were used for carrying food and goods while traveling. If your language has a word for this kind of basket, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “large traveling baskets” (See: Translate Unknowns)

John 6:14

οἱ…ἄνθρωποι

Although the term men is masculine, John uses the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “the people” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

ἰδόντες ὃ ἐποίησεν σημεῖον

This clause could refer to: (1) the time that they said the words which follow in the verse. Alternate translation: “at the time they saw the sign he did” (2) the reason that they said what follows in the verse. Alternate translation: “because they saw the sign he did”

ὃ…σημεῖον

Here, sign refers to the Jesus miraculously feeding the large crowd that was described in verses 5–13. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the sign of miraculously feeding the large crowd that” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ προφήτης ὁ ἐρχόμενος εἰς τὸν κόσμον

Here, the Prophet refers to a prophet the Jews were waiting for, based on God’s promise to send a prophet like Moses, which is recorded in Deuteronomy 18:15. If your readers will not be familiar with this Old Testament reference, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Prophet whom God said he would send into the world” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 6:15

γνοὺς ὅτι μέλλουσιν ἔρχεσθαι

This clause could refer to: (1) the time that Jesus decided to withdraw. Alternate translation: “at the time he realized that they were about to come” (2) the reason that Jesus decided to withdraw. Alternate translation: “because he realized that they were about to come”

αὐτὸς μόνος

Here John uses the reflexive pronoun himself to emphasize that Jesus was completely alone. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “completely alone” (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

John 6:16

This is the next event in the story. Jesus’ disciples go out onto the Sea of Galilee in a boat.

τὴν θάλασσαν

Here and throughout this chapter, sea refers to the Sea of Galilee. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly, as modeled by UST. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 6:17

εἰς Καφαρναούμ

See how you translated Capernaum in 2:12. (See: How to Translate Names)

καὶ σκοτία ἤδη ἐγεγόνει, καὶ οὔπω ἐληλύθει πρὸς αὐτοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς

In these clauses John provides background information about the situation in order to help readers understand what happens in this story. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

John 6:18

ἥ τε θάλασσα ἀνέμου μεγάλου πνέοντος διηγείρετο

The first clause about the wind indicates the reason the sea was being aroused in the second clause. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because a strong wind was blowing, the sea was being aroused” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

διηγείρετο

John uses aroused figuratively to refer to the wind causing the sea to become turbulent. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “was being stirred up” (See: Metaphor)

ἥ…θάλασσα…διηγείρετο

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the wind was causing the sea to be aroused” (See: Active or Passive)

John 6:19

ἐληλακότες

The boats used on the Sea of Galilee usually had positions for two, four, or six people who sat together and rowed with oars on each side of the boat. If your readers would not be familiar with rowed boats, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “having propelled the boat through the water by using oars” (See: Translate Unknowns)

ὡς σταδίους εἴκοσι πέντε ἢ τριάκοντα

The word stadia is the plural of “stadium,” which is a Roman measurement of distance equivalent to about 185 meters or a little over 600 feet. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. Alternate translation: “about four and a half or five and a half kilometers” or “about three or three and a half miles” (See: Biblical Distance)

θεωροῦσιν

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

John 6:20

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

John 6:21

ἤθελον…λαβεῖν αὐτὸν εἰς τὸ πλοῖον

It is implied that Jesus got into the boat. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “they gladly received him into the boat” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 6:22

ὁ ὄχλος

See how you translated crowd in 5:13. (See: Collective Nouns)

πέραν τῆς θαλάσσης

Here, the other side of the sea refers to the side of the Sea of Galilee where Jesus had fed the crowd. It does not refer to the side of the Sea of Galilee that he and his disciples arrived at in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the side of the sea where Jesus performed the miracle” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πλοιάριον ἄλλο οὐκ ἦν ἐκεῖ, εἰ μὴ ἕν

Here, one refers to the boat that the disciples had taken to cross the Sea of Galilee. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “there was no other boat there except the one that the disciples had taken” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 6:23

ἄλλα ἦλθεν πλοῖα ἐκ Τιβεριάδος, ἐγγὺς τοῦ τόπου ὅπου ἔφαγον τὸν ἄρτον

In this verse John provides background information about the story. The day after Jesus miraculously fed the crowd, some boats with people from Tiberias came to see Jesus. However, Jesus and his disciples had left that place the night before. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Other boats came with people from Tiberias close to the place where the crowd had eaten the bread loaves” (See: Background Information)

τοῦ Κυρίου

Here, the Lord refers to Jesus. It does not refer to God the Father. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

εὐχαριστήσαντος τοῦ Κυρίου

John leaves out some words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “after the Lord had given thanks to God for the food” (See: Ellipsis)

John 6:24

οὖν

Therefore indicates that this verse is the result of what happened in verse 22. This verse resumes the narrative that was interrupted by the background information in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because Jesus and his disciples had gone to the other side of the Sea of Galilee” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ὁ ὄχλος

See how you translated crowd in 5:13. (See: Collective Nouns)

ἔστιν

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

εἰς τὰ πλοιάρια

These boats are the boats mentioned in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “into the boats that had come from Tiberias” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ζητοῦντες τὸν Ἰησοῦν

Here John is stating the purpose for which the crowd went to Capernaum. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that they could seek Jesus” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

John 6:25

πέραν τῆς θαλάσσης

Here, on the other side refers to the side of the Sea of Galilee that is opposite the side where Jesus had miraculously fed the crowd. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the opposite side of the sea from where Jesus had fed the crowd” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 6:26

ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν

Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in 1:51. (See: Doublet)

σημεῖα

See how you translated this term in 2:11. See also the discussion of signs in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracles”

ἐχορτάσθητε

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “filled yourselves” (See: Active or Passive)

John 6:27

τὴν βρῶσιν τὴν μένουσαν εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον

Here Jesus is using the word food figuratively to refer to himself, because he is the source of salvation, the One who gives eternal life to all who trust him. Jesus lasts forever, and so does the eternal life that he gives. However, the crowd does not understand this, and Jesus does not tell them this plainly at this time. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

τὴν βρῶσιν τὴν μένουσαν εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον

John records Jesus leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply this word from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “work for the food that endures to eternal life” (See: Ellipsis)

ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου…δώσει; τοῦτον

These two expressions are all refer to Jesus. He is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man, will give … me” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

ἣν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ὑμῖν δώσει

This phrase could give further information about: (1) “the food that endures to eternal life.” Alternate translation: “that is, the food the Son of Man will give you” (2) “eternal life.” Alternate translation: “that is, the life the Son of Man will give you” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου…ὁ Πατὴρ…ὁ Θεός

Son of Man and God the Father are important titles that describe the relationship between Jesus and God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου

See how you translated the Son of Man in 1:51. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τοῦτον…ἐσφράγισεν

To “set a seal” on something means to place a mark on it in order to show to whom it belongs or to certify its authenticity. Here, the phrase is used as an idiom and could mean: (1) that the Father approves of the Son in every way. Alternate translation: “has affirmed his approval of him” (2) that the Son belongs to the Father. Alternate translation: “has affirmed that the Son belongs to him” (See: Idiom)

John 6:29

τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ ἔργον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἵνα πιστεύητε εἰς ὃν ἀπέστειλεν ἐκεῖνος

Here, Jesus says which work one must do in order to receive “the food that endures to eternal life” that was mentioned in verse 27. This work is not any kind of labor or deed that can be done, but it is faith in Jesus, which is a gift from God (Ephesians 2:8–9). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is the work of God that is required to receive the food that endures to eternal life: that you believe in the one whom that one has sent” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὃν ἀπέστειλεν ἐκεῖνος

This phrase refers to Jesus. He is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: First, Second or Third Person)

ἀπέστειλεν ἐκεῖνος

Here, that one refers to God the Father. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God has sent” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

John 6:31

οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν τὸ μάννα ἔφαγον ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ

In this verse, John assumes that his readers will know that the crowd is referring to a story recorded in the Old Testament book of Exodus. In that story, the Israelites complained against Moses and Aaron because they were hungry. God responded by providing a flake-like food that fell from the sky and could be baked into bread. The people called this flake-like food “manna.” (See: manna) You could indicate this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers, particularly if they would not know the story. Alternate translation: “Our fathers ate the manna when they were wandering in the wilderness after leaving Egypt” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν

The crowd used fathers figuratively to refer to their ancestors. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Our ancestors” or “Our forefathers” (See: Metaphor)

ἐστιν γεγραμμένον

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the prophets wrote in the Scriptures” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐστιν γεγραμμένον

Here the crowd uses it is written to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Psalm 78:24). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that the crowd is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it was written in the scriptures” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

ἐστιν γεγραμμένον, ἄρτον ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς φαγεῖν

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “it is written that he gave them bread from heaven to eat” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

ἄρτον ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς φαγεῖν

He here could refer to: (1) Moses, in which case the crowd was mistakenly quoting a scripture about God and applying it to Moses. This is possible because Jesus says in the next verse, “Moses has not given you the bread from heaven.” Alternate translation: “Moses gave them bread from heaven to eat” (2) God, which is who it referred to in the scripture the crowd is quoting. Alternate translation: “God gave them bread from heaven to eat” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἄρτον

Here, John records the crowd using the word bread figuratively to represent food in general that is needed to sustain life. The manna that God gave the Israelites from heaven was not bread, but a food that could be baked into bread. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “food” (See: Synecdoche)

John 6:32

ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν

Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in 1:51. (See: Doublet)

οὐ Μωϋσῆς δέδωκεν ὑμῖν

Here John records Jesus speaking in a way that emphasizes that Moses was not the source of manna in the wilderness. He seems to be correcting the crowd’s incorrect understanding of the scripture they quoted in the previous verse. Use whatever form best communicates this kind of negative emphasis in your language. Alternate translation: “Moses was not the one who has given you”

τὸν ἄρτον

Here John records Jesus using the word bread figuratively to represent food in general that is needed to sustain life. See how you translated this word in the previous verse. (See: Synecdoche)

ἀλλ’ ὁ Πατήρ μου δίδωσιν

This phrase serves two purposes. First, it implies that the Father, not Moses, was the source of the bread from heaven mentioned by the crowd in the previous verse. Second, it indicates that the Father is still giving bread from heaven, although not the kind of bread the crowd is expecting. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. You may also want to start a new sentence. Alternate translation: “Rather, my Father has given that bread and now gives” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ Πατήρ μου δίδωσιν ὑμῖν τὸν ἄρτον ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ τὸν ἀληθινόν

Here Jesus is using true bread figuratively to refer to himself. However, the crowd does not understand this, and Jesus does not tell them this plainly until verse 35. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

ὁ Πατήρ μου

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἄρτον

See how you translated the word bread earlier in this verse and in the previous verse. (See: Synecdoche)

John 6:33

ὁ…ἄρτος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν

Here Jesus is using bread figuratively to refer to himself. However, the crowd does not understand this, and Jesus does not tell them this plainly until verse 35. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

ὁ…ἄρτος τοῦ Θεοῦ

This phrase could mean: (1) the bread came from God. Alternate translation: “the bread that God gives” (2) the bread belongs to God. Alternate translation: “God’s bread” (See: Possession)

ὁ καταβαίνων ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ

This phrase refers to Jesus. However, the crowd does not understand this and Jesus does not tell them this plainly at this time. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

ζωὴν

Here, life refers to eternal life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly, as modeled in the UST. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τῷ κόσμῳ

Here, the world refers to the people who live in it. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people living in the world” (See: Metonymy)

John 6:34

κύριε

The crowd calls Jesus Sir in order to show respect or politeness. (See: lord, Lord, master, sir)

τὸν ἄρτον

Here, bread could refer to: (1) food in general, as the word was used by the crowd in verse 31. This would mean that the crowd did not understand that Jesus was calling himself the bread from heaven. Alternate translation: “food” (2) some gift from God of which the crowd was uncertain. This would mean that the crowd recognized that Jesus was talking about something more spiritual than mere food but did not understand that he was talking about himself. Alternate translation: “heavenly food” (See: Synecdoche)

John 6:35

ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ ἄρτος τῆς ζωῆς

John records Jesus continuing the bread metaphor to refer figuratively to himself. In Jesus’ culture, bread was the primary food people ate to stay alive. Just as bread is necessary for sustaining physical life, Jesus is necessary for giving spiritual life. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “Just as food keeps you physically alive, I can give you spiritual life” (See: Biblical Imagery — Extended Metaphors)

ὁ ἄρτος τῆς ζωῆς

Jesus uses of life to the source of the life about which he is speaking. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the bread that produces life” (See: Possession)

τῆς ζωῆς

Here, life refers to eternal life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of eternal life” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ ἐρχόμενος πρὸς ἐμὲ, οὐ μὴ πεινάσῃ; καὶ ὁ πιστεύων εἰς ἐμὲ, οὐ μὴ διψήσει πώποτε

Jesus speaks about the person who trusts in him by continuing the metaphor of food that he began in verse 32. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “The one coming to me will be like a person who never gets hungry, and the one believing in me will be like a person who never gets thirsty” (See: Biblical Imagery — Extended Metaphors)

ὁ ἐρχόμενος πρὸς ἐμὲ, οὐ μὴ πεινάσῃ; καὶ ὁ πιστεύων εἰς ἐμὲ, οὐ μὴ διψήσει πώποτε

These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that anyone who trusts in Jesus will never lack spiritual satisfaction. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “The one who trusts me will certainly never lack spiritual satisfaction again” (See: Doublet)

ὁ ἐρχόμενος πρὸς ἐμὲ

Here, coming does not mean to merely come near Jesus. It means to believe in him and be his disciple. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “The one coming to be my disciple” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὐ μὴ πεινάσῃ…οὐ μὴ διψήσει πώποτε

John records Jesus using a figure of speech twice in the same verse to express a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that has the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “will always be full … will always have his thirst quenched” (See: Litotes)

John 6:37

Πατὴρ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

πρὸς ἐμὲ ἥξει…τὸν ἐρχόμενον πρός ἐμὲ

In this verse, come and coming do not mean to merely come near Jesus, but they mean to believe in him and be his disciple. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “will come to be my disciples … the one coming to be my disciple” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸν ἐρχόμενον πρός ἐμὲ, οὐ μὴ ἐκβάλω ἔξω

Jesus is using a figure of speech here to expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that means the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I will keep everyone who comes to me” (See: Litotes)

John 6:38

ὅτι

For introduces the reason why Jesus will not throw out anyone who comes to him. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is true because” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

τοῦ πέμψαντός με

Here, the one who sent me refers to God. See how you translated it in 4:34. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 6:39

τοῦ πέμψαντός με

Here, the one who sent me refers to God. See how you translated it in 4:34. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πᾶν ὃ…μὴ ἀπολέσω ἐξ αὐτοῦ

Jesus is using a figure of speech here to expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that means the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I should keep all of them whom he has given” (See: Litotes)

μὴ ἀπολέσω ἐξ αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ ἀναστήσω αὐτὸ

Here, it refers to the whole group of believers as a whole. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly or use a plural pronoun. Alternate translation: “I would not lose from the group of believers … but will raise that group up” or “I would not lose from them … but will raise them up” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἀναστήσω αὐτὸ

Here, to raise up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “will cause them to live again” (See: Idiom)

τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ

Here, the last day refers to “the day of the Lord,” which is the time when God judges everyone, Jesus returns to earth, and the bodies of those who are dead are raised from their graves. (See: day of the Lord, day of Yahweh) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the day when I return and judge everyone” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 6:40

τοῦτο γάρ ἐστιν τὸ θέλημα τοῦ Πατρός μου, ἵνα πᾶς

For introduces the reason for the Father’s will that Jesus stated in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “What I have just said is my Father’s will, because his will is also that everyone” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

τοῦ Πατρός μου

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

πᾶς ὁ θεωρῶν τὸν Υἱὸν

Jesus uses sees figuratively to refer to understanding something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everyone who understands who the Son is” (See: Metaphor)

ἀναστήσω αὐτὸν ἐγὼ

Here, to raise up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. See how you translated this in the previous verse. (See: Idiom)

τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ

Here, the last day refers to “the day of the Lord,” which is the time when God judges everyone, Jesus returns to earth, and the bodies of those who are dead are raised from their graves. (See: day of the Lord, day of Yahweh) See how you translated this in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “on the day when I return and judge everyone” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 6:41

The Jewish leaders interrupt Jesus as he is speaking to the crowd. His conversation with these Jewish leaders is in verses 41–58.

οὖν οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι

Here and to the end of this chapter, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in 1:19. (See: Synecdoche)

ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ ἄρτος

Here the Jewish leaders paraphrase what Jesus said in verse 33. See how you translated bread and come down from heaven in verse 33. (See: Metaphor)

John 6:42

οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν Ἰησοῦς ὁ υἱὸς Ἰωσήφ, οὗ ἡμεῖς οἴδαμεν τὸν πατέρα καὶ τὴν μητέρα?

Here the Jewish leaders are using the form of a question to emphasize that they believe that Jesus is just a normal person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation, and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This is just Jesus, the son of Joseph, whose father and mother we know!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

πῶς νῦν λέγει, ὅτι ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καταβέβηκα?

Here the Jewish leaders are using the form of a question to emphasize that they do not believe that Jesus came from heaven. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “He is lying when he says that he came from heaven!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

πῶς νῦν λέγει, ὅτι ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καταβέβηκα?

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “How then does he now say that he has come down from heaven?” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

John 6:44

ἐλθεῖν πρός με

Here, come does not mean to merely come near Jesus. It means to believe in him and be his disciple. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to come to be my disciple” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ Πατὴρ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ὁ πέμψας με

Here, this phrase refers to God. See how you translated it in 5:23. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἑλκύσῃ αὐτόν

Alternate translation: “would pull him” or “would drag him”

αὐτόν…αὐτὸν

Although the pronoun him is masculine, Jesus uses the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “the person” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

ἀναστήσω αὐτὸν

See how you translated this in verse 40. (See: Idiom)

ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ

Here, the last day refers to “the day of the Lord,” which is the time when God judges everyone, Jesus returns to earth, and the bodies of those who are dead are raised from their graves. (See: day of the Lord, day of Yahweh) See how you translated this in verse 40. Alternate translation: “on the day when I return and judge everyone” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 6:45

ἔστιν γεγραμμένον ἐν τοῖς προφήταις

Here Jesus uses It is written to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Isaiah 54:13). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it had been written by the prophets in the scriptures” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

ἐν τοῖς προφήταις, καὶ ἔσονται πάντες διδακτοὶ Θεοῦ

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “in the prophets that all will be taught by God” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

ἔσονται πάντες διδακτοὶ Θεοῦ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will teach all” (See: Active or Passive)

τοῦ Πατρὸς

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἔρχεται πρὸς ἐμέ

Here, comes does not mean to merely come near Jesus. It means to believe in him and be his disciple. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “comes to be my disciple” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 6:46

τὸν Πατέρα…ἑώρακεν τὸν Πατέρα

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ὁ ὢν παρὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ; οὗτος ἑώρακεν τὸν Πατέρα

John records Jesus referring to himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “me, the who is from God—I have seen the Father” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

John 6:47

ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν

Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in 1:51. (See: Doublet)

ὁ πιστεύων

John records Jesus leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the one believing in me” or “the one believing that I am the Messiah” (See: Ellipsis)

John 6:48

ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ ἄρτος τῆς ζωῆς

See how you translated this in John 6:35. (See: Metaphor)

John 6:49

οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν

Jesus uses fathers figuratively to refer to ancestors. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Your forefathers” or “Your ancestors” (See: Metaphor)

ἔφαγον ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ τὸ μάννα

See how you translated this expression in verse 31. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 6:50

οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ ἄρτος ὁ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καταβαίνων, ἵνα τις ἐξ αὐτοῦ φάγῃ, καὶ μὴ ἀποθάνῃ

Jesus continues using the bread metaphor to express that one must believe in him in order to have eternal life just as one must eat bread to sustain physical life. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this as a simile. Alternate translation: “I am this bread that comes down from heaven, just as one must eat bread to live, so must one believe in me in order to not die spiritually” (See: Biblical Imagery — Extended Metaphors)

οὗτός ἐστιν…αὐτοῦ

John records Jesus referring to himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “I am … me” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

ὁ ἄρτος

See how you translated this in verse 48. (See: Metaphor)

ἐξ αὐτοῦ φάγῃ

Here Jesus uses eat figuratively to refer to believing in him for salvation. What Jesus said plainly in verse 47 he says figuratively here. If this would confuse your readers, you could express this with a simile. Alternate translation: “might believe in me as one eats bread to live” (See: Metaphor)

μὴ ἀποθάνῃ

Here Jesus uses die figuratively to refer to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “might not die spiritually” or “might not experience spiritual death” (See: Metaphor)

John 6:51

ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ ἄρτος ὁ ζῶν ὁ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καταβάς; ἐάν τις φάγῃ ἐκ τούτου τοῦ ἄρτου, ζήσεται εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα

As in the previous verse, Jesus continues using the bread metaphor to say that one must believe in him in order to have eternal life just as one eats bread to sustain physical life. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this as a simile. Alternate translation: “I am the living bread that comes down from heaven. Just as one lives if they eat bread, so does one who believes in me live forever” (See: Biblical Imagery — Extended Metaphors)

ἐγώ εἰμι

Jesus uses this phrase emphatically to make a strong statement about who he is. Use the most natural way to express emphasis in your language. Alternate translation: “I myself am” or “I am indeed” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ ἄρτος ὁ ζῶν

Here, living refers to being the source of life or having the ability to produce life, which is synonymous with “of life” in the phrase “the bread of life,” which Jesus used in verse 35. See how you translated “the bread of life” in verse 35. Alternate translation: “the bread that gives life” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

φάγῃ ἐκ τούτου τοῦ ἄρτου

Here and in the previous verse, Jesus uses eats figuratively to refer to believing in Jesus for salvation. Jesus gives eternal life to those who believe in him. See how you translated “eat” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Just as food keeps you physically alive, I can give you spiritual life” (See: Metaphor)

σάρξ μού

Here, John records Jesus using flesh figuratively to refer to his whole physical body. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my body” (See: Metonymy)

ὁ ἄρτος

Here Jesus is using the bread metaphor slightly differently from how he has used it previously. Here it refers specifically to his physical body, which he would sacrifice on the cross to pay for the sins of those who believe in him. Since Jesus says this explicitly at the end of the verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

ὑπὲρ τῆς τοῦ κόσμου ζωῆς

Here, life refers to eternal life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the eternal life of the world” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὑπὲρ τῆς τοῦ κόσμου ζωῆς

Here, the world is used figuratively to refer to the people in the world. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for the life of the people in the world” (See: Metonymy)

John 6:52

οὖν…οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in 1:19. (See: Synecdoche)

ἐμάχοντο…πρὸς ἀλλήλους οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι λέγοντες

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “then the Jews began to argue among themselves, and they said” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

πῶς δύναται οὗτος ἡμῖν δοῦναι τὴν σάρκα φαγεῖν?

Here the Jewish leaders are using the form of a question to emphasize that they are reacting negatively to what Jesus has said about his flesh. If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There is no way that this one is able to give us his flesh to eat!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τὴν σάρκα

Here, John records the Jews using flesh figuratively to refer to Jesus’ whole physical body. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his body” (See: Metonymy)

John 6:53

ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν

Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in 1:51. (See: Doublet)

φάγητε τὴν σάρκα τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, καὶ πίητε αὐτοῦ τὸ αἷμα

Here Jesus is using the phrases eat the flesh and drink his blood figuratively. Just as people need to eat and drink in order to live, people need to trust Jesus in order to have eternal life. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

φάγητε τὴν σάρκα τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, καὶ πίητε αὐτοῦ τὸ αἷμα

These two phrases, eat the flesh and drink his blood, mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that trusting in Jesus is the only way to have eternal life. Because Jesus’ flesh and blood are important concepts, do not combine them. Instead, you could communicate the emphasis in a way that is most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you would indeed eat the flesh of the Son of Man and would indeed drink his blood” (See: Doublet)

τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, καὶ πίητε αὐτοῦ τὸ αἷμα

Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: First, Second or Third Person)

τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου

See how you translated this phrase in 1:51. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὐκ ἔχετε ζωὴν

Here, life refers to eternal life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you do not have eternal life” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 6:54

ὁ τρώγων μου τὴν σάρκα, καὶ πίνων μου τὸ αἷμα, ἔχει ζωὴν αἰώνιον

The phrases “eating my flesh” and “drinking my blood” are a metaphor for trusting Jesus. Just as people need food and drink in order to live, people need to trust Jesus in order to have eternal life. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

ὁ τρώγων μου τὴν σάρκα, καὶ πίνων μου τὸ αἷμα, ἔχει ζωὴν αἰώνιον

As in the previous verse, these two phrases, eat the flesh and drink his blood, mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expressions in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Indeed, the one eating my flesh and drinking my blood surely has eternal life” (See: Doublet)

ἀναστήσω αὐτὸν

See how you translated this in verse 40. (See: Idiom)

τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ

Here, the last day refers to “the day of the Lord,” which is the time when God judges everyone, Jesus returns to earth, and the bodies of those who are dead are raised from their graves. (See: day of the Lord, day of Yahweh) See how you translated this phrase in verse 39. Alternate translation: “on the day when I return and judge everyone” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 6:55

σάρξ μου…αἷμά μου

Here Jesus is using the phrases my flesh and my blood figuratively to refer to believing in him. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

ἡ…σάρξ μου ἀληθής ἐστι βρῶσις, καὶ τὸ αἷμά μου ἀληθής ἐστι πόσις

Here Jesus is using the phrases true food and true drink figuratively to say that he, Jesus, gives life to those who trust in him. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

ἡ…σάρξ μου ἀληθής ἐστι βρῶσις, καὶ τὸ αἷμά μου ἀληθής ἐστι πόσις

As in the previous two verses, these two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expressions in the previous two verses. Alternate translation: “my flesh is indeed true food, and my blood is indeed true drink” (See: Doublet)

John 6:56

ὁ τρώγων μου τὴν σάρκα, καὶ πίνων μου τὸ αἷμα

See how you translated this in verse 54. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

ἐν ἐμοὶ μένει

Here, and frequently in John’s Gospel, remains in indicates being united in a continuous personal relationship with someone. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. See the discussion of this expression in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “has a close relationship with me” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

κἀγὼ ἐν αὐτῷ

Here, John records Jesus leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be confusing in your language, you could supply the word from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “and I remain in him” (See: Ellipsis)

John 6:57

ὁ ζῶν Πατὴρ

Here, living refers to being the source of life or having the ability to create life. This is also how Jesus used living in verse 51. See how you translated living in verse 51. Alternate translation: “the Father who causes life” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Πατὴρ…Πατέρα

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

κἀγὼ ζῶ διὰ τὸν Πατέρα

Here, live refers to being the source of life or having the ability to create life. It does not mean to merely be alive. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and I cause life because of the Father” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

κἀγὼ ζῶ διὰ τὸν Πατέρα

Here, because of the Father indicates the reason why Jesus has the ability to cause life. God the Father gave Jesus the ability to cause others to live. Jesus explained this concept in 5:25–26. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and I cause life because the Father has enabled me to do so” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

καὶ ὁ τρώγων με

Jesus is using eating me figuratively to refer to trusting him. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. See how you translated similar expressions in verses 53–56. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

κἀκεῖνος ζήσει δι’ ἐμέ

Here, live refers to having eternal life. It does not refer to being the source of life, as living and live are used previously in this verse. If this shift in meaning might confuse your readers, you could state the difference explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will also have eternal life because of me” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 6:58

οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ ἄρτος ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ καταβάς

John records Jesus referring to himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person, as in the UST. (See: First, Second or Third Person)

οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ ἄρτος…τοῦτον τὸν ἄρτον

Jesus is continuing the bread metaphor to refer figuratively to himself. Just as bread is necessary for our physical life, Jesus is necessary for our spiritual life. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

οἱ πατέρες

Here Jesus usesfathers figuratively to refer to ancestors. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ancestors” or “the forefathers” (See: Metaphor)

οὐ καθὼς ἔφαγον οἱ πατέρες καὶ ἀπέθανον

John records Jesus leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “this bread is not just as the bread that the fathers ate and died” (See: Ellipsis)

ἔφαγον οἱ πατέρες καὶ ἀπέθανον

The phrase ate and died does not mean that the people died immediately after eating the bread. If this wording would confuse your readers, you could translate it in a way that shows a time gap between eating and drinking. Alternate translation: “the fathers ate and still died at a later time” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ τρώγων τοῦτον τὸν ἄρτον

Jesus spoke about himself as this bread. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person, as in the UST. (See: First, Second or Third Person)

ὁ τρώγων τοῦτον τὸν ἄρτον

Jesus is using eating this bread figuratively to refer to trusting him. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

John 6:59

In this verse John gives background information about when this event happened. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

ταῦτα

Here, these things refers to what Jesus said to the crowd and Jewish leaders in verses 26–58. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these teachings about being the bread of life” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 6:60

ἀκούσαντες

Here, John leaves out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “having heard this” (See: Ellipsis)

ἐστιν ὁ λόγος οὗτος

Here, word stands for what Jesus had just spoken to the crowd in verses 26–58. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What he has just said is” or “These words are” (See: Metonymy)

σκληρός

Here, hard refers to something that causes a negative reaction because it is harsh or unpleasant. It does not refer to something that is difficult to understand, but something that is difficult to accept. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “hard to accept” or “offensive” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τίς δύναται αὐτοῦ ἀκούειν?

Here the disciples use the question form for emphasis. If this would be confusing in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “no one is able to listen to it!” or “it is too hard to listen to!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

John 6:61

εἰδὼς δὲ ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἐν ἑαυτῷ

This phrase implies that Jesus had supernatural knowledge. It indicates that Jesus knew what his disciples were saying even though he did not hear what they said. If it would be helpful to your readers, your could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Even though no one told Jesus, he knew” or “Even though Jesus had not heard them, he was fully aware”(See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

περὶ τούτου…τοῦτο

In this verse, this refers to what Jesus had just spoken to the crowd in verses 26–58. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “about these teachings … what I teach” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὑμᾶς

Here and throughout verses 61–71 you is plural and refers to Jesus’ disciples. If your language distinguishes between singular and plural second person pronouns, you should use the plural form of you. Alternate translation: “you disciples of mine” (See: Forms of You)

John 6:62

ἐὰν…θεωρῆτε τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, ἀναβαίνοντα ὅπου ἦν τὸ πρότερον?

Here, John records Jesus using only one part of a conditional sentence. He leaves out the second part of the conditional sentence for emphasis. Many languages need to have both parts of a conditional sentence in order to make the sentence complete. If this is true for your language, you could supply the second clause from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “if you would see the Son of Man going up to where he was before, would it offend you?” (See: Ellipsis)

τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, ἀναβαίνοντα ὅπου ἦν τὸ πρότερον

Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: First, Second or Third Person)

τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου

See how you translated this phrase in 1:51. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὅπου ἦν τὸ πρότερον

This phrase refers to heaven, where Jesus was before he came down to earth. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to heaven, where I used to be” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 6:63

τὸ Πνεῦμά ἐστιν τὸ ζῳοποιοῦν

Here, making alive refers to giving eternal life, not physical life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “The Spirit is the one giving eternal life” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἡ σὰρξ

Here, the flesh could refer to: (1) human nature, as in the UST. (2) Jesus’ body. Alternate translation: “my flesh” (3) both human nature and Jesus’ body. “your nature and my flesh” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὐκ ὠφελεῖ οὐδέν

Here, profit means to be beneficial or useful. It does not mean to earn money. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “has no benefit” or “is no help at all”(See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὰ ῥήματα…ζωή ἐστιν

Here, words stands for the teachings that Jesus had just spoken to the crowd in verses 26–58. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The teachings … these teachings are life” (See: Metonymy)

πνεῦμά ἐστιν

This could mean: (1) from the Spirit. Alternate translation: “are from the Spirit” (2) about the Spirit. Alternate translation: “are about the Spirit”

καὶ ζωή ἐστιν

This could mean: (1) give life. Alternate translation: “and they give life” (2) about life. Alternate translation: “and they are about life”

ζωή

Here, life refers to eternal life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly, as in the UST. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 6:64

ᾔδει γὰρ ἐξ ἀρχῆς ὁ Ἰησοῦς, τίνες εἰσὶν οἱ μὴ πιστεύοντες, καὶ τίς ἐστιν ὁ παραδώσων αὐτόν

In this sentence John gives background information to explain why Jesus said the earlier part of this verse. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Jesus said this because he knew from the start who did not believe and who would later betray him” (See: Background Information)

οἳ οὐ πιστεύουσιν…οἱ μὴ πιστεύοντες

The implied object of believe and believing is Jesus or Jesus’ teaching. If your language requires an object for these words, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who do not believe in me … the ones not believing in me” or “who do not believe what I say … the ones not believing what I say” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 6:65

διὰ τοῦτο

Here, this refers to the information Jesus said in the previous verse. If it would be misunderstood for your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because of the disbelief I have just told you about” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὐδεὶς δύναται ἐλθεῖν πρός με

See how you translated the identical phrase in verse 44. Alternate translation: “no one is able to come to be my disciple” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ᾖ δεδομένον αὐτῷ

Here, the pronoun it refers to the ability to come to Jesus and be his disciple. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the ability to come to me would be have been granted to him” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ᾖ δεδομένον αὐτῷ ἐκ τοῦ Πατρός

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Father would give it to him” (See: Active or Passive)

Πατρός

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 6:66

ἀπῆλθον εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω

Here, stayed behind is an idiom that refers to going back to living the way one had lived previously. Here, these people left Jesus to go back to living the way they had lived before they met him. If this might confuse your readers, you could state its meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “returned to their former manner of living” or “went back to their previous way of life” (See: Idiom)

οὐκέτι μετ’ αὐτοῦ περιεπάτουν

Although Jesus did walk from one place to another, here walking is used figuratively to refer to how a person lives and behaves. These people were no longer living according to Jesus’ teaching and thus were no longer his disciples. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no longer obeyed his teachings” or “no longer were his disciples” (See: Metaphor)

John 6:67

τοῖς δώδεκα

John is using the adjective Twelve as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or “the 12 men whom he had appointed to be apostles” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

τοῖς δώδεκα

If your language does not ordinarily use adjectives as nouns, you may be able to do that in this case, since this is a title by which the apostles were known. Even though it is a number, if you translate it as a title, as the ULT does, follow the conventions for titles in your language. For example, capitalize main words and write out numbers rather than use digits. (See: How to Translate Names)

μὴ καὶ ὑμεῖς θέλετε ὑπάγειν?

John records Jesus asking this question in a way that expects a negative response. He does this to contrast the Twelve from the many other disciples who had just abandoned him. If your language has a question form that assumes a negative response, you should use it here. Alternate translation: “You probably do not want to go away also, am I right?” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 6:68

Σίμων Πέτρος

See how you translated the name Simon Peter in 1:40. (See: How to Translate Names)

Κύριε, πρὸς τίνα ἀπελευσόμεθα?

Simon Peter is using the form of a question to emphasize that he desires to follow only Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Lord, we could never follow anyone but you!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ῥήματα ζωῆς αἰωνίου ἔχεις

Peter uses of to describe a word that gives eternal life. If this is not clear in your language, you could use express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “You have words that give eternal life” (See: Possession)

ῥήματα

John records Peter using the term words figuratively to describe the things that Jesus taught by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the teaching” (See: Metonymy)

John 6:69

ἡμεῖς

When Peter says we, he is speaking of himself and the rest of the twelve disciples, so we would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ὁ Ἅγιος τοῦ Θεοῦ

Peter uses of to describe the Holy One who comes from God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Holy One from God” (See: Possession)

John 6:70

οὐκ ἐγὼ ὑμᾶς τοὺς δώδεκα ἐξελεξάμην, καὶ ἐξ ὑμῶν εἷς διάβολός ἐστιν?

Jesus gives this remark in the form of a question in order to emphasize that one of the twelve disciples will betray him. Alternate translation: “I chose you, the Twelve, myself, and one of you is a devil!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τοὺς δώδεκα

See how you translated the Twelve in verse 67. (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ἐξ ὑμῶν εἷς διάβολός ἐστιν

The word devil could mean: (1) one of Jesus’ twelve disciples was a wicked person whose thoughts and actions resembled those of the devil or was being influenced or controlled by the devil. It does not mean that this person actually was the devil in human form. It also does not imply that there is more than one devil. Alternate translation: “one of you is wicked like the devil” or “one of you is controlled by the devil” (2) one of Jesus’ twelve disciples was speaking harmful and untrue things about Jesus to others. This meaning is possible because the word translated devil can also mean “slanderer.” Alternate translation: “one of you is a slanderer” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 6:71

In this verse John provides background information about what Jesus said in the previous verse. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

Ἰούδαν Σίμωνος Ἰσκαριώτου

Judas and Simon are names of two men. This Simon is not the same as Simon Peter. Iscariot is a distinguishing term that most likely means he came from the village of Kerioth. (See: How to Translate Names)

τῶν δώδεκα

See how you translated the Twelve in verse 67. (See: Nominal Adjectives)

John 7

John 7 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

Jesus goes to Jerusalem for the Festival of Shelters (7:1–13)
Jesus says his authority is from God (7:14–24)
Jesus says he came from God (7:25–31)
Jesus says he will return to God (7:32–36)
Jesus says he is the living water (7:37–39)
The people disagree about who Jesus is (7:40–44)
The Jewish leaders disagree about who Jesus is (7:45–53)

Translators may wish to include a note at verse 53 to explain to the reader why they have chosen or chosen not to translate verses 7:53–8:11. These verses are not in the best and oldest ancient manuscripts. If the translators have chosen to translate these verses, then they will want to either put them in a footnote outside of the main text or mark them in some way, such as square brackets ([ ]), to indicate that the passage may not have originally been in John’s Gospel. (See: Textual Variants)

Special Concepts in this Chapter

“Believing in him”

A recurring theme in this chapter is the concept of believing Jesus to be the Messiah. Some people believed he was the Messiah, while others did not. Some were willing to recognize his power and even the possibility that he was a prophet, but most were unwilling to believe that he was the Messiah. (See: Christ, Messiah and prophet, prophecy, prophesy, seer, prophetess)

“My time has not yet come”

This phrase and “his hour had not yet come” are used in this chapter to indicate that Jesus is in control of the events that are happening in his life.

“Living water”

This is an important metaphor used in the New Testament to refer to the Holy Spirit. See the discussion of this metaphor in the note about “living water” for 4:10. (See: Metaphor)

Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

Prophecy

In verses 33–34 Jesus gives a prophecy about his return to heaven without explicitly indicating his statement as prophecy.

Irony

Nicodemus explains to the other Pharisees that the Law requires them to hear directly from a person before making a judgment about that person. The Pharisees in turn made a judgment about Jesus without speaking to Jesus.

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

“Did not believe in him”

Jesus’ brothers did not believe that Jesus was the Messiah at the time the events in this chapter took place. (See: believe, believer, belief, unbeliever, unbelief)

“The Jews”

This term is used in two different ways in this passage. It is used specifically to refer to the Jewish leaders who opposed Jesus and were trying to kill him (7:1, 11, 13, 15, 35). It is also used in verse 2 to refer to Jewish people in general. The translator may wish to use the terms “Jewish leaders” and “Jewish people” to clarify this distinction.

John 7:1

μετὰ ταῦτα

This phrase introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “some time later” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι

Here and throughout this chapter, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. Apart from one exception in verse 2, it does not refer to the Jewish people in general. See how you translated this term in 1:19. Alternate translation: “the Jewish authorities” (See: Synecdoche)

John 7:2

In this verse John briefly stops telling about the events in the story in order to give background information about when the events happened. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “This event took place near the time of the Shelters Festival, the festival of the Jews” (See: Background Information)

τῶν Ἰουδαίων

Unlike in the previous verse and throughout this chapter, the Jews here refers to the Jewish people in general. It does not refer to the Jewish leaders. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the Jewish people” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 7:3

οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ

These were Jesus’ younger brothers, the other sons of Mary and Joseph who were born after Jesus. Since the Father of Jesus was God and their father was Joseph, they were actually his half-brothers. That detail is not normally translated, but if your language has a specific word for a man’s younger brother, it would be appropriate to use it here. Alternate translation: “his younger brothers” or “his half-brothers” (See: Kinship)

σοῦ τὰ ἔργα ἃ ποιεῖς

Here, works refers to the powerful miracles that Jesus was performing. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “your miracles that you do” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 7:4

ζητεῖ αὐτὸς

Here, Jesus’ brothers use the reflexive pronoun himself in order to emphasize their belief that Jesus wants to make himself famous. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “seeks for his own benefit” (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

ζητεῖ αὐτὸς ἐν παρρησίᾳ εἶναι

Alternate translation: “seeks publicity for himself” or “seeks public attention”

εἰ ταῦτα ποιεῖς

John records Jesus’ brothers speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but they mean that it is actually true. Although they didn’t believe that Jesus was the Messiah at this time, they did not deny that he was doing miracles. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what the brothers are saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you do these things” (See: Connect — Factual Conditions)

τῷ κόσμῳ

Here, the world is used figurative to refer to all of the people in the world. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: Metonymy)

John 7:5

οὐδὲ γὰρ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ ἐπίστευον εἰς αὐτὸν

In this verse John briefly stops telling about the events in the story in order to give background information about the brothers of Jesus. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ brothers said this because even they did not believe in him” (See: Background Information)

οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ

See how you translated this in verse 3. Alternate translation: “his younger brothers” or “his half-brothers” (See: Kinship)

John 7:6

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ὁ καιρὸς ὁ ἐμὸς οὔπω πάρεστιν

This could mean: (1) It was not the right time for Jesus to go to Jerusalem for the festival because God had not yet told him to go. This meaning explains why he eventually went to the festival in verse 10. Alternate translation: “Now is not the right time for me to go to Jerusalem” (2) It was not the right time for Jesus to publicly reveal himself as the Messiah, which is what his brothers wanted him to do. Alternate translation: “Now is not the right time for me to publicly reveal myself as the Messiah” (See: Metonymy)

ὁ ὑμέτερος

All instances of “you” and your in verses 6–8 are plural. They only refer to Jesus’ brothers. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

ὁ δὲ καιρὸς ὁ ὑμέτερος πάντοτέ ἐστιν ἕτοιμος

Alternate translation: “but any time is good for you”

John 7:7

οὐ δύναται ὁ κόσμος μισεῖν ὑμᾶς

The world here refers figuratively to the people who live in the world. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “All the people in the world are not able to hate you” (See: Metonymy)

μισεῖ…περὶ αὐτοῦ…τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ

In this verse, it refers to the people in the world. If you translated the world with a plural noun, then you should change these pronouns to plural form as well. Alternate translation: “they hate…about them…their works” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐγὼ μαρτυρῶ περὶ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ πονηρά ἐστιν

Alternate translation: “I tell them that what they are doing is evil”

John 7:8

ὑμεῖς ἀνάβητε

John records Jesus saying go up to refer to going to Jerusalem, because that city is at a higher elevation than Galilee, which is where Jesus and his brothers were at this time. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate where they would go. Alternate translation: “You go up to Jerusalem” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ ἐμὸς καιρὸς οὔπω πεπλήρωται

This phrase means the same as “My time is not yet come” in verse 6. See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “Now is not the right time for me to go to Jerusalem” or “Now is not the right time for me to publicly reveal myself as the Messiah” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 7:10

οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ

See how you translated this phrase in verse 3. Alternate translation: “his younger brothers” or “his half-brothers” (See: Kinship)

καὶ αὐτὸς ἀνέβη

See how you translated “go up” in verse 8. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὐ φανερῶς, ἀλλὰ ὡς ἐν κρυπτῷ

These two phrases mean the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Jesus did not want to attract public attention in Jerusalem. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “very secretly” (See: Doublet)

John 7:11

οἱ…Ἰουδαῖοι

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in 1:19. (See: Synecdoche)

ποῦ ἐστιν ἐκεῖνος

Here, John records the Jewish leaders saying that one as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus without saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “Where is that so-and-so” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 7:12

γογγυσμὸς

Although the word translated murmuring usually refers to grumbling or complaining, here it refers to speaking quietly, without a negative meaning. Some people in the crowd were discussing who Jesus was and didn’t want the religious leaders to hear them. If your word for murmuring only has a negative connotation in your language, use a different neutral expression. Alternate translation: “quiet discussion” or “whispering” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τοῖς ὄχλοις…τὸν ὄχλον

Here, crowds refers to several different groups of people, while crowd refers to a group of people in general. See how you translated crowd in 5:13. Alternate translation: “the groups of people … the group of people” (See: Collective Nouns)

πλανᾷ τὸν ὄχλον

Here the people use leads astray figuratively to refer to persuading someone to believe something that is not true. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he misleads the crowd” (See: Metaphor)

John 7:13

διὰ τὸν φόβον τῶν Ἰουδαίων

John is using of to describe the fear that the people had for the Jewish leaders. If this use of the possessive form would be confusing in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “because of their fear that the Jews would harm them” (See: Possession)

τῶν Ἰουδαίων

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in 1:19. (See: Synecdoche)

John 7:14

τῆς ἑορτῆς

Here, the festival refers to the Jewish Festival of Shelters mentioned in verse 1. See how you translated the word festival there. Alternate translation: “the Shelters festival”

εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν

Since only priests could enter the temple building, this refers to the temple courtyard. John is using the word for the entire building to refer to one part of it. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: Synecdoche)

John 7:15

οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in 1:19. (See: Synecdoche)

ἐθαύμαζον

The word translated marveled refers to being amazed or in wonder of something in either a negative or positive way. Since the Jewish leaders despised Jesus, their amazement was unfavorable toward him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “showed their surprise” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πῶς οὗτος γράμματα οἶδεν, μὴ μεμαθηκώς?

The Jewish leaders are using the form of a question to emphasize that they were surprised and annoyed by how much knowledge Jesus had about Scripture. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate their words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “He certainly cannot know so much about the scriptures, not being educated!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

οὗτος

Here, John records the Jewish leaders saying this one as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus and to avoid saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “this so-and-so” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

μὴ μεμαθηκώς

Here, the Jewish leaders use educated to refer to receiving a Jewish religious education, which would include studying the Hebrew scriptures and Jewish religious traditions. This does not mean that they thought Jesus didn’t know how to read or write. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “not being trained in our scriptures and doctrines” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐθαύμαζον…οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι λέγοντες

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “the Jews marveled, and they said” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

John 7:16

τοῦ πέμψαντός με

Here, the one who sent me refers to God. See how you translated it in 4:34. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 7:17

ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν…ἀπ’ ἐμαυτοῦ

Here, from is used to indicate the source of Jesus’ teaching. A teaching could only have authority if God was its source. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is with God’s authority … only with my own authority” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 7:18

ἀφ’ ἑαυτοῦ

Here, from is used to indicate the source of what the person is speaking. A teaching could only have authority if God was its source. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by his own authority” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὴν δόξαν τὴν ἰδίαν ζητεῖ; ὁ δὲ ζητῶν τὴν δόξαν τοῦ πέμψαντος αὐτὸν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “seeks to make himself glorious, but the one seeking to make the one who sent him glorious” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἀδικία ἐν αὐτῷ οὐκ ἔστιν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of unrighteousness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he is not wicked” (See: Abstract Nouns)

John 7:19

οὐ Μωϋσῆς δέδωκεν ὑμῖν τὸν νόμον, καὶ οὐδεὶς ἐξ ὑμῶν ποιεῖ τὸν νόμον?

Jesus is using the form of a question to add emphasis. If your language does not use this type of question, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “It was Moses who gave you the law, but none of you obeys the law!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τὸν νόμον…ποιεῖ τὸν νόμον

See how you translated the law in 1:17. (See: Collective Nouns)

ποιεῖ τὸν νόμον

Here, does the law means to keep, follow, or obey the law. If this use of does would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “obeys the law”

τί με ζητεῖτε ἀποκτεῖναι?

Jesus is using the form of a question to emphasize that the Jewish leaders who want to kill him for breaking the law of Moses are themselves breaking that law. If your language does not use this type of question, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You break the law yourselves and yet you want to kill me!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

John 7:20

ὁ ὄχλος

See how you translated crowd in 5:13. (See: Collective Nouns)

δαιμόνιον ἔχεις

Alternate translation: “A demon is inside of you!” or “You must be under the control of a demon!”

τίς σε ζητεῖ ἀποκτεῖναι?

The crowd is using the form of a question to add emphasis. If your language does not use this type of question, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one wants to kill you!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

John 7:21

ἓν ἔργον

Here, work refers to the time when Jesus miraculously healed a paralyzed man on the Jewish day of rest called the Sabbath, as recorded in 5:5–9. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “one miracle on the Sabbath” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πάντες θαυμάζετε

The word translated marvel refers to being amazed or in wonder of something in either a negative or positive way. Since some people in this crowd despised Jesus, their amazement was unfavorable toward him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you are all surprised” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 7:22

διὰ τοῦτο

Here, this refers to someone doing something on the Sabbath to help someone else. More specifically, Jesus is referring to the time he offended the Jews by healing a paralyzed man on the Sabbath. This event was indirectly mentioned in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “On account of activities like healing taking place on the Sabbath” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὐχ ὅτι ἐκ τοῦ Μωϋσέως ἐστὶν, ἀλλ’ ἐκ τῶν πατέρων

Here Jesus provides additional information about where the Jewish practice of circumcision came from. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

τῶν πατέρων

Here, fathers refers specifically to the first ancestors of the Jewish people, who are often called “the Patriarchs.” Those people are Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. It does not refer to the ancestors of the Jewish people in general. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Patriarchs” or “the men who founded the Jewish people” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐν Σαββάτῳ περιτέμνετε ἄνθρωπον

Jesus implies that the act of circumcision was a kind of work. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you circumcise a male baby on the Sabbath. That is working too” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἄνθρωπον

Jesus is speaking of any Jewish man in general, not of one particular man. If this use of man would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a more natural expression. Alternate translation: “men” (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

John 7:23

εἰ περιτομὴν λαμβάνει ἄνθρωπος ἐν Σαββάτῳ

John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since a man receives circumcision on the Sabbath” (See: Connect — Factual Conditions)

λαμβάνει ἄνθρωπος

See how you translated man in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “men receive” (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

ὁ νόμος

See how you translated the law in 1:17. (See: Collective Nouns)

μὴ λυθῇ ὁ νόμος Μωϋσέως

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you might not break the law of Moses” (See: Active or Passive)

μὴ λυθῇ ὁ νόμος Μωϋσέως

Here, Jesus uses broken figuratively to refer to disobeying the regulations that God gave in the law of Moses. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the regulations of the law of Moses might not be disobeyed” (See: Idiom)

ἐμοὶ χολᾶτε ὅτι ὅλον ἄνθρωπον ὑγιῆ ἐποίησα ἐν Σαββάτῳ?

Jesus is using the question form for emphasis. If your language does not use this type of question, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you should not be angry with me because I made a man completely well on the Sabbath!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

John 7:24

μὴ κρίνετε κατ’ ὄψιν, ἀλλὰ τὴν δικαίαν κρίσιν κρίνετε

Jesus implies that the people should not decide what is right based only on what they can see. A person does something for a reason and that reason cannot be seen. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Do not judge people according to appearance! Instead, decide what is right according to what God says is right” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

κατ’ ὄψιν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of appearance, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “according to what you see” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τὴν δικαίαν κρίσιν κρίνετε

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of judgment, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “judge righteously” (See: Abstract Nouns)

John 7:25

οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὃν ζητοῦσιν ἀποκτεῖναι?

Here, the Jerusalemites are using the question form for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This is the one they are seeking to kill!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

John 7:26

οὐδὲν αὐτῷ λέγουσιν

The Jerusalemites use this phrase in order to imply that the Jewish leaders are not opposing Jesus. Alternate translation: “they say nothing to oppose him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

μήποτε ἀληθῶς ἔγνωσαν οἱ ἄρχοντες, ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ Χριστός?

Here, the Jerusalemites ask this question in a way that expects a negative response, but also expresses uncertainty about that response. If your language has a question form that assumes a negative response with uncertainty, you should use it here. Alternate translation: “Could it be possible that the rulers really know this is the Christ?” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οἱ ἄρχοντες

This phrase refers to the Jewish religious leadership, specifically the Jewish council called the Sanhedrin, which made decisions about Jewish law. (See: council) If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The members of the Jewish ruling council” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 7:27

τοῦτον

Here, John records the Jerusalemites saying this one as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus without saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “this so-and-so” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 7:28

ἔκραξεν οὖν ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ διδάσκων Ἰησοῦς, καὶ λέγων

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus cried out in the temple. While he was teaching, he said” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

ἔκραξεν

Alternate translation: “spoke in a loud voice”

ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ

Jesus and the people were actually in the courtyard of the temple. See how you translated temple in verse 14. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: Synecdoche)

ἀπ’ ἐμαυτοῦ

See how you translated from myself in verse 17. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ πέμψας με

Here, the one who sent me refers to God. See how you translated it in verse 16. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἔστιν ἀληθινὸς ὁ πέμψας με

Here, true could mean: (1) real, in contrast to a false god. In this case, Jesus would be saying that the Father is the only real God. Alternate translation: “the one who sent me is the real God” (2) truthful, in contrast to a liar. In this case, Jesus would be saying that Father who sent him always tells the truth. Alternate translation: “the one who sent me can be trusted” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 7:30

οὖν

Therefore indicates that this verse states the result of what had happened in the previous verses. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “As a result of Jesus saying these things” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἐζήτουν

Here, they could refer to: (1) the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “the Jewish authorities were seeking” (2) the Jerusalemites. Alternate translation: “the people dwelling in Jerusalem were seeking” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

οὐδεὶς ἐπέβαλεν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὴν χεῖρα

To lay a hand on someone is an idiom which means to grab someone or hold onto someone. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “no one grabbed him” (See: Idiom)

οὔπω ἐληλύθει ἡ ὥρα αὐτοῦ

Here, the word hour is used figuratively to refer to the time God had planned for Jesus to be arrested and killed. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the right time to arrest him had not yet come” (See: Metonymy)

John 7:31

ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου

See how you translated crowd in 5:13. (See: Collective Nouns)

ὁ Χριστὸς, ὅταν ἔλθῃ, μὴ πλείονα σημεῖα ποιήσει ὧν οὗτος ἐποίησεν?

The crowd uses the form of a question to add emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this type of question, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “When the Christ may come, surely he will not do more signs than this one has done!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

σημεῖα

See how you translated this term in 2:11. See also the discussion of signs in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracles”

John 7:32

τοῦ ὄχλου

See how you translated crowd in 5:13. (See: Collective Nouns)

γογγύζοντος

Although the word translated murmuring usually refers to grumbling or complaining, here it refers to speaking quietly, without a negative meaning. Some people in the crowd were discussing whether or not Jesus was the Messiah and didn’t want the religious leaders to hear them. See how you translated this word in verse 12.

John 7:33

ἔτι χρόνον μικρὸν μεθ’ ὑμῶν εἰμι

Alternate translation: “I will remain with you for only a short period of time”

ὑπάγω

Here Jesus uses go away figuratively to refer to his death and return to heaven. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

τὸν πέμψαντά με

This phrase refers to God. See how you translated this in verse 16. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 7:34

ὅπου εἰμὶ ἐγὼ ὑμεῖς, οὐ δύνασθε ἐλθεῖν

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “you will not be able to come to the place where I am” (See: Information Structure)

John 7:35

εἶπον οὖν οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι πρὸς ἑαυτούς

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in 1:19. (See: Synecdoche)

οὗτος

Here, John records the Jewish leaders saying this one as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus and to avoid saying his name. See how you translated this phrase in verse 15. Alternate translation: “this so-and-so” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

μὴ εἰς τὴν διασπορὰν τῶν Ἑλλήνων μέλλει πορεύεσθαι, καὶ διδάσκειν τοὺς Ἕλληνας?

The Jewish leaders are using the form of a question to add emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this type of question, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely he is not about to go to the dispersion of the Greeks and to teach the Greeks!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τὴν διασπορὰν

Here, dispersion refers to the Jewish people who were spread across the Greek-speaking world that was outside of the land of Israel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jews who are dispersed” or “the Jews who are scattered” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὴν διασπορὰν τῶν Ἑλλήνων

The Jews used the phrase of the Greeks to describe the location where the Jews were dispersed. If this use of the possessive form would be confusing in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the Jews who are dispersed among the Greeks” (See: Possession)

John 7:36

τίς ἐστιν ὁ λόγος οὗτος ὃν εἶπε

Here, word is used figuratively to refer to the meaning of the message that Jesus had shared. The Jewish leaders had failed to understand that message. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What was he talking about when he said” (See: Metonymy)

εἶπε, ζητήσετέ με, καὶ οὐχ εὑρήσετέ; καὶ ὅπου εἰμὶ ἐγὼ, ὑμεῖς οὐ δύνασθε ἐλθεῖν

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation, as in the UST. (See: Quotes within Quotes)

ζητήσετέ με, καὶ οὐχ εὑρήσετέ; καὶ ὅπου εἰμὶ ἐγὼ, ὑμεῖς οὐ δύνασθε ἐλθεῖν

See how you translated this in verse 34.

John 7:37

About three or four days has passed since the events described in verses 14–36. It is now the last day of the Festival of Shelters, and Jesus speaks to the crowd.

ἔκραξεν λέγων

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “cried out, and he said” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

ἔκραξεν

See how you translated this in verse 28.

ἐάν τις διψᾷ

Here Jesus uses thirst figuratively to refer to a person’s need for God, just as someone would thirst for water. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “If anyone who recognizes their need for God is like a thirsty person who desires water” (See: Metaphor)

ἐρχέσθω πρός με καὶ πινέτω

Here Jesus uses come and drink figuratively to refer together to believing in Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use similes. Alternate translation: “let him believe in me” (See: Metaphor)

John 7:38

ὁ πιστεύων εἰς ἐμὲ, καθὼς εἶπεν ἡ Γραφή

If it would be natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. You will also need to adjust some words to fit the new order. Alternate translation: “As the scripture says about anyone who believes in me” (See: Information Structure)

καθὼς εἶπεν ἡ Γραφή, ποταμοὶ ἐκ τῆς κοιλίας αὐτοῦ ῥεύσουσιν ὕδατος ζῶντος

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “rivers of living water will flow from the stomach of the one believing in me, just as the scripture says” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

εἶπεν ἡ Γραφή

Here Jesus uses scripture as if it were a person who could speak. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the prophets spoke in the scriptures” (See: Personification)

ποταμοὶ…ῥεύσουσιν ὕδατος ζῶντος

Here Jesus uses rivers figuratively to refer to a constant and abundant flow of living water. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “an abundance of living water will flow” (See: Metaphor)

ὕδατος ζῶντος

Jesus uses living water here figuratively to refer to the Holy Spirit who works in a person to save and transform them. However, since John explains this meaning in the next verse, you do not need to explain it further here. See how you translated living water in 4:10. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

ὕδατος ζῶντος

Here, living is used figuratively to mean “giving eternal life” or “causing people to live forever.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of water that gives eternal life” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

αὐτοῦ

The pronoun his could refer to: (1) the person who believes in Jesus. This meaning is used in most Bible translations and assumes that a new sentence begins at the beginning of this verse. Alternate translation, as in the ULT: “his” (2) Jesus. This meaning is used in some ancient church writings and assumes that the sentence at the end of the previous verse continues into through the one believing in me in this verse. Alternate translation: “my” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐκ τῆς κοιλίας αὐτοῦ

Here the stomach is used figuratively to refer to the non-physical part of a person. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from inside of him” or “from his heart” (See: Metonymy)

John 7:39

In this verse John gives information to clarify what Jesus was talking about in the previous verse. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

οὔπω…ἦν Πνεῦμα

John implies here that the Spirit would later come to dwell in those who trusted in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Spirit had not yet come to dwell in the believers” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὐδέπω ἐδοξάσθη

Here the word glorified could refer to: (1) the time when Jesus would die on the cross and rise from the dead (see John 12:23). Alternate translation: “had not yet been crucified and resurrected” (2) the time when Jesus would ascend to his Father in heaven. Acts 1–2 records the Holy Spirit coming after Jesus went up to heaven. Alternate translation: “had not yet returned to God in glory” (3) both the crucifixion, resurrection, and ascension of Jesus. Alternate translation: “had not yet been glorified by his death, resurrection, and return to heaven” See the discussion of double meaning in Part 3 of the Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 7:40

οὖν

Then here indicates that what follows is the continuation of the narrative from verse 38, which John had interrupted with background information in verse 39. If your readers would misunderstand this reference to earlier events, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “After Jesus had said this about the Holy Spirit,” (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου

See how you translated crowd in 5:13. (See: Collective Nouns)

τῶν λόγων τούτων

John uses the term words figuratively to describe the content of what Jesus had said by referring to something associated with it, the words he used to communicate it. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “these things he was saying” (See: Metonymy)

ὁ προφήτης

See how you translated the prophet in 1:21. Alternate translation: “the prophet whom God promised to send to us” (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_ta/src/branch/master/translate/figs-explicit/01.md)

John 7:41

μὴ γὰρ ἐκ τῆς Γαλιλαίας ὁ Χριστὸς ἔρχεται

These people are using the form of a question to add emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this type of question, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Indeed, the Christ surely does not come from Galilee!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

John 7:42

οὐχ ἡ Γραφὴ εἶπεν, ὅτι ἐκ τοῦ σπέρματος Δαυεὶδ, καὶ ἀπὸ Βηθλέεμ, τῆς κώμης ὅπου ἦν Δαυεὶδ, ἔρχεται ὁ Χριστός?

The people are using the form of a question to add emphasis. This group of people does not believe Jesus is the Messiah, because they do not think he came from Bethlehem. If your readers would misunderstand this type of question, you could translate the words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “The scriptures surely say that the Christ will come from the seed of David and from Bethlehem, the village where David was!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

οὐχ ἡ Γραφὴ εἶπεν

Scripture here is referred to as though it were a person who could speak. If this use of said might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Have the prophets not said in the scriptures” (See: Personification)

John 7:43

σχίσμα…ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of division, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the crowd was divided” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ

See how you translated crowd in 5:13. (See: Collective Nouns)

John 7:44

τινὲς…ἐξ αὐτῶν

Here, them refers to the people in the crowd with whom Jesus had just spoken, particularly those who were opposed to him. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “some of his opponents in the crowd” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

οὐδεὶς ἐπέβαλεν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας

See how you translated this phrase in verse 30. (See: Idiom)

John 7:47

μὴ καὶ ὑμεῖς πεπλάνησθε?

The Pharisees ask this question in a way that expects a negative response but also expresses uncertainty about that response. If your language has a question form that assumes a negative response with uncertainty, you should use it here. Alternate translation: “Could it be possible that you have also been deceived?” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

μὴ καὶ ὑμεῖς πεπλάνησθε

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “He has not also deceived you, has he?” (See: Active or Passive)

John 7:48

μή τις ἐκ τῶν ἀρχόντων ἐπίστευσεν εἰς αὐτὸν, ἢ ἐκ τῶν Φαρισαίων?

Here, the Pharisees are using the form of a question to add emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this type of question, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely none from the rulers have believed in him, or from the Pharisees!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τῶν ἀρχόντων

Here, rulers refers to the Jewish religious leadership, specifically the Jewish council called the Sanhedrin, which made decisions about Jewish law. (See: council) See how you translated this in 3:1. Alternate translation: “a member of the Jewish ruling council” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 7:49

ὁ ὄχλος

See how you translated crowd in 5:13. (See: Collective Nouns)

τὸν νόμον

See how you translated the law in 1:17. (See: Collective Nouns)

ἐπάρατοί εἰσιν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has cursed them” (See: Active or Passive)

John 7:50

ὁ ἐλθὼν πρὸς αὐτὸν πρότερον, εἷς ὢν ἐξ αὐτῶν

John provides this information to remind us of who Nicodemus is and the conversation he had with Jesus that is recorded in chapter 3. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “this man was a Pharisee who had spoken with Jesus at an earlier time” (See: Background Information)

εἷς ὢν ἐξ αὐτῶν

Alternate translation: “although he was one of them” or “despite being one of them”

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

John 7:51

μὴ ὁ νόμος ἡμῶν κρίνει τὸν ἄνθρωπον, ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ πρῶτον παρ’ αὐτοῦ, καὶ γνῷ τί ποιεῖ?

Nicodemus is using the form of a question to add emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this type of question, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Our law certainly does not judge a man unless it might first hear from him and might know what he does!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

μὴ ὁ νόμος ἡμῶν κρίνει τὸν ἄνθρωπον, ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ πρῶτον παρ’ αὐτοῦ, καὶ γνῷ

Nicodemus speaks of the law figuratively as if it were a person. If this use of law is not natural in your language, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “It is not written in our law that we may judge a man unless we might first hear from him and might know … is it” (See: Personification)

τὸν ἄνθρωπον

Here, a man does not refer to a specific man. It refers to any man in general. Alternate translation: “any man” (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

John 7:52

μὴ καὶ σὺ ἐκ τῆς Γαλιλαίας εἶ?

The Jewish leaders know that Nicodemus is not from Galilee. They ask this question as a way of scoffing at him. If your language does not use questions in this way, use another way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “You must also be one of those people from Galilee!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἐραύνησον καὶ ἴδε

Here, John records the Jewish leaders leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this sentence, you could supply the missing words from the context. Alternate translation: “Look carefully and read what is written in the Scriptures to learn” (See: Ellipsis)

προφήτης ἐκ τῆς Γαλιλαίας οὐκ ἐγείρεται

The Jewish leaders believed that Jesus came from Galilee and that no prophet in the scriptures came from Galilee. Therefore, based on their reasoning, Jesus could not be a prophet. However, what they believed was incorrect. Jesus did not originally come from Galilee, but Bethlehem in Judea. Also, the prophet Jonah came from Galilee (2 Kings 14:25) and Isaiah 9:1–7 said that the Messiah would be a great light rising from Galilee. If your readers might not understand what the Jewish leaders are implying, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “no prophet rises up from Galilee, so this man cannot be a true prophet” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐγείρεται

Here, rises up means to appear. Alternate translation: “appears”

John 7:53

The best early texts do not have 7:53–8:11. The ULT has set them apart in square brackets ([ ]) to show that John probably did not include them in his original text. See the discussion of this textual issue in the General Notes to this chapter. (See: Textual Variants)

John 8

John 8 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

Jesus forgives the adulterous woman 8:1–11
Jesus says he is the light of the world (8:12–20)
Jesus says he came from above (8:21–30)
Jesus says he frees people from sin (8:31–36)
Jesus describes the true children of Abraham and the children of Satan (8:37–47)
Jesus is greater than Abraham (8:48–59)

Translators may wish to include a note at verse 1 to explain to the reader why they have chosen to translate or to not translate verses 8:1–11. Verses 7:53–8:11 are not in the best and oldest ancient manuscripts. Those ancient texts which do have these verses also have many differences between them, which are additional evidence that these verses were not originally in the Gospel of John. If the translators have chosen to translate these verses, then they will want to either put them in a footnote outside of the main text or mark them in some way, such as square brackets ([ ]), to indicate that the passage may not have originally been in John’s Gospel. (See: Textual Variants)

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Light and darkness

Generally in John’s Gospel, light represents what is true and good and darkness represents what is false and evil. Similar to the discussion of light in 1:4–9, in 8:12 Jesus applies the light metaphor to himself in order to show that he is the embodiment of God’s truth and goodness. Jesus calls himself the Light of the World because he is the one who enables people to know God’s truth and goodness. (See: light, luminary, shine, brighten, enlighten)

I AM

John records Jesus saying these words as an independent phrase three times in this chapter (8:24, 28, 58). They stand alone as a complete sentence, and they literally translate the Hebrew expression “I AM,” by which Yahweh identified himself to Moses in Exodus 3:14. For these reasons, many people believe that when Jesus said these words he was claiming to be Yahweh. (See: Yahweh).

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

“Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter (8:28). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: Son of Man, son of man and First, Second or Third Person)

John 8:1

John 8:12

In this verse Jesus begins speaking to a crowd near the treasury in the temple some time after the events of John 7:1–52. John does not mark the beginning of this new event. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

πάλιν…αὐτοῖς ἐλάλησεν…λέγων

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “spoke to the people again, and he said” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

ἐγώ εἰμι τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμου…ἀλλ’ ἕξει τὸ φῶς

Here Jesus uses light figuratively to refer to God’s truth and goodness that are revealed to the world by Jesus. He is the embodiment of God’s truth and goodness. See the discussion of light and darkness in the General Notes to this chapter. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “I am the one who reveals God’s truth and goodness, that is like a light, to the world … but will have that truth and goodness” (See: Metaphor)

τοῦ κόσμου

Here, world refers figuratively to all the people in the world. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of the people of the world” (See: Metonymy)

ὁ ἀκολουθῶν ἐμοὶ

Here, following means to become Jesus’ disciple and obey his teachings. See how you translated a similar phrase in 1:43. Alternate translation: “the one who becomes my disciple” or “the one who obeys me” (See: Idiom)

οὐ μὴ περιπατήσῃ ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ

Here Jesus uses the phrase walk in the darkness figuratively to refer to living a sinful life. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “may certainly not live as if he were living in the darkness of sin” (See: Metaphor)

φῶς τῆς ζωῆς

Here, John records Jesus using the of to describe light that gives life. If this use of the possessive form is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “light that brings life” (See: Possession)

τῆς ζωῆς

Here, life refers to eternal life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “eternal life” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 8:13

σὺ περὶ σεαυτοῦ μαρτυρεῖς

The Pharisees assumed that their listeners understood that they were referring to Jesus testifying about himself without there being any other witnesses to confirm his testimony. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You are testifying about yourself without any other witnesses” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἡ μαρτυρία σου οὐκ ἔστιν ἀληθής

The Pharisees are implying that the testimony of only one person is not true because of a rule in the law of Moses. According to Deuteronomy 19:15, a statement had to be confirmed by at least two witnesses in order to be considered true in legal decisions. If your audience is not familiar with the law of Moses in the Old Testament, then you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “your testimony about yourself cannot be true because the law of Moses requires at least two witnesses” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 8:14

ὑμεῖς δὲ οὐκ οἴδατε

In verses 14–20 Jesus uses the plural form of you to indicate that he is speaking to the Pharisees. He is not speaking directly to those who believe in him. If this would confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “but you Pharisees do not know” (See: Forms of You)

John 8:15

τὴν σάρκα

Here Jesus uses the flesh figuratively to refer to human standards. Such standards are superficial and based on the limitations of sinful human nature. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “standards limited by human nature” or “superficial human standards” (See: Metaphor)

ἐγὼ οὐ κρίνω οὐδένα

This could mean: (1) Jesus does not judge anyone in the same manner as the Pharisees, that is, according to the flesh. Alternate translation: “I do not judge anyone according to the flesh” (2) Jesus is not judging anyone at that time. Alternate translation: “I do not judge anyone at this time” (See: Ellipsis)

John 8:16

ἡ κρίσις ἡ ἐμὴ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of judgment, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I judge” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἡ κρίσις ἡ ἐμὴ ἀληθινή ἐστιν

Here, Jesus is contrasting the nature of the Pharisees’ judgment with the nature of his own judgment. Alternate translation: “my judgment is right” or “my judgment is according to what is true”

μόνος οὐκ εἰμί

Here, Jesus implies that he is not alone when he judges people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am not alone in how I judge” or “I do not judge alone” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ πέμψας με Πατήρ

Here, this phrase refers to God. See how you translated it in 5:23. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ…Πατήρ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 8:17

γέγραπται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “Moses” did it. Alternate translation: “Moses wrote” (See: Active or Passive)

δύο ἀνθρώπων ἡ μαρτυρία ἀληθής ἐστιν

Here, Jesus is referring to a rule in the law of Moses. According to Deuteronomy 19:15, a statement had to be confirmed by at least two witnesses in order to be considered true in legal decisions. If it would be helpful to your readers, then you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “if the testimony of two men agrees, then it is valid” or “if two men say something that agrees, then it should be considered to be true” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 8:18

μαρτυρεῖ περὶ ἐμοῦ ὁ πέμψας με Πατήρ

In addition to Jesus himself, God the Father also testifies about Jesus. Jesus thus implies that his testimony is true, because there are two witnesses. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “my Father, who sent me, also brings evidence about me. So you should believe that what we tell you is true” or “my Father, who sent me, also testifies about me. Therefore, my testimony is true” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ πέμψας με Πατήρ

Here, this phrase refers to God. See how you translated it in verse 16. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ…Πατήρ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 8:19

οὔτε ἐμὲ οἴδατε, οὔτε τὸν Πατέρα μου. εἰ ἐμὲ ᾔδειτε, καὶ τὸν Πατέρα μου ἂν ᾔδειτε

In this verse, know refers to knowing who Jesus and God actually are, not just knowing information about them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “You know neither who I am nor who my Father is; if you had known who I am, you would have known who my Father is also” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸν Πατέρα

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

εἰ ἐμὲ ᾔδειτε, καὶ τὸν Πατέρα μου ἂν ᾔδειτε.

Here, Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that the Pharisees do not know who he really is and do not really know God. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “you do not know me, because if you did, you would also know my Father” (See: Connect — Contrary to Fact Conditions)

John 8:20

In this verse John finishes telling about the events in the story by giving background information about where these events happened. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Some languages may require the information about the setting to be placed at the beginning of this part of the story in 8:12. (See: Background Information)

ταῦτα τὰ ῥήματα

Here, these words refers to what Jesus had just spoken in verses 12–19. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “these things about himself” or “these things to the Pharisees” (See: Metonymy)

τῷ γαζοφυλακίῳ

A treasury is the place where treasures are stored. In Jesus’ time, the temple treasury referred to a place in the courtyard that had containers for receiving money offerings. If your readers would not be familiar with this use of treasury, you could give a fuller description. Alternate translation: “the place where people gave money” (See: Translate Unknowns)

οὔπω ἐληλύθει ἡ ὥρα αὐτοῦ

Here, the word hour is used figuratively to refer to the time God had planned for Jesus to be arrested and killed. See how you translated this phrase in 7:30. Alternate translation: “the right time to arrest him had not yet come” (See: Metonymy)

John 8:21

εἶπεν οὖν πάλιν αὐτοῖς

Then again here introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “At another time he again said to them” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

ἐγὼ ὑπάγω…ὅπου ἐγὼ ὑπάγω

Two times in this verse Jesus uses go away figuratively to refer to his death and return to God in heaven. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

ἐν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ ὑμῶν

Here, sin is singular. This could refer to one: (1) the specific sin of rejecting Jesus as the Messiah. Alternate translation: “in your sin of unbelief” (2) sinfulness in general. Alternate translation: “in your state of sinfulness” (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

ὅπου ἐγὼ ὑπάγω, ὑμεῖς οὐ δύνασθε ἐλθεῖν

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “You are not able to come to where I go” (See: Information Structure)

John 8:22

οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in 1:19. (See: Synecdoche)

μήτι ἀποκτενεῖ ἑαυτὸν

John records the Jewish leaders using the form of a question in a way that expects a negative response but also expresses uncertainty about that response. If your language has a question form that assumes a negative response with uncertainty, you should use it here. Alternate translation: “Could it be possible that he will kill himself?” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὅτι λέγει, ὅπου ἐγὼ ὑπάγω ὑμεῖς, οὐ δύνασθε ἐλθεῖν

If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Is that why he says that where he goes, we will not be able to come” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

ὅπου ἐγὼ ὑπάγω ὑμεῖς, οὐ δύνασθε ἐλθεῖν

See how you translated this clause in the previous verse.

John 8:23

ὑμεῖς ἐκ τῶν κάτω ἐστέ

In verses 23–30 Jesus uses the plural form of you to indicate that he is speaking to the Jewish leaders. He is not speaking directly to those who believe in him. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “You Jewish authorities are from below” (See: Forms of You)

ὑμεῖς ἐκ τῶν κάτω ἐστέ

The phrase from below could refer to: (1) the origin of the subject. Alternate translation: “You came from the things below” (2) the place where the subject belongs. Alternate translation: “You belong to the things below” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τῶν κάτω

Here, John records Jesus using the things below figuratively to refer to this world. It does not refer to hell. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “You are from this lower world” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐγὼ ἐκ τῶν ἄνω εἰμί

The phrase from the things above could refer to: (1) the origin of the subject. Alternate translation: “I came from the things above” (2) the place where the subject belongs, which is heaven. Alternate translation: “I belong to the things above” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τῶν ἄνω

Here, John records Jesus using the things above figuratively to refer to heaven. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am from heaven” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὑμεῖς ἐκ τούτου τοῦ κόσμου ἐστέ, ἐγὼ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου τούτου

The phrase from this world could refer to: (1) the origin of the subject. Alternate translation: “You come from this world; I do not come from this world” (2) the place where the subject belongs. Alternate translation: “You belong to this world; I do not belong to this world” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τούτου τοῦ κόσμου…τοῦ κόσμου τούτου

Here, this world refers to everything in the universe that has been corrupted by sin and is hostile to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this sinful world … this sinful world” or “this world that opposes God … this world that opposes God” (See: Metonymy)

John 8:24

ἀποθανεῖσθε ἐν ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ὑμῶν…ἐγώ εἰμι, ἀποθανεῖσθε ἐν ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ὑμῶν

This phrase you will die in your sins is different from the similar statement in verse 21 because sins is plural in this verse but singular in that verse. Therefore, make sure that you translate sins differently than how you translated “sin” in verse 21.

ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι

This could mean: (1) Jesus is identifying himself as Yahweh, who identified himself to Moses as “I AM” in Exodus 3:14. Alternate translation: “that I am the I AM” (2) Jesus expects the people to understand that he is referring to what he already has already said about himself in the previous verse: “that I am from above” See the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes for this chapter. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 8:25

ἔλεγον

Here, they refers to the Jewish leaders. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish authorities said” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

τὴν ἀρχὴν ὅ τι καὶ λαλῶ ὑμῖν

Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that he has already told the Jewish leaders who he is. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I am who I have been telling you I am since the beginning!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

John 8:26

ἀλλ’ ὁ πέμψας με ἀληθής ἐστιν, κἀγὼ ἃ ἤκουσα παρ’ αὐτοῦ, ταῦτα λαλῶ εἰς τὸν κόσμον

If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases and make a new sentence. Alternate translation: “But I will say to the world the things that I heard from him who sent me. He is true.” (See: Information Structure)

ὁ πέμψας με…παρ’ αὐτοῦ

These phrases refer to God. However, since the Jewish leaders did not understand what Jesus meant when he used these phrases, you do not need to explain their meaning further here. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

ὁ πέμψας με ἀληθής ἐστιν

Here, true means to be truthful or to speak only the truth. If this use of true would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who sent me is truthful” or “the one who sent me tells the truth”

κἀγὼ ἃ ἤκουσα παρ’ αὐτοῦ, ταῦτα

Jesus says that the one who sent him is true in order to imply that these things he heard and spoke are true. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the true things that I heard from him, these true things” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ταῦτα λαλῶ εἰς τὸν κόσμον

Here, John records Jesus using the world figuratively to refer to the people who live in the world. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “these things I say to everyone” (See: Metonymy)

John 8:27

In this verse John gives information about the Jewish leaders to explain their reaction to Jesus’ teaching. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

τὸν Πατέρα

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 8:28

ὅταν ὑψώσητε

Here, John records Jesus referring to when he would be lifted up on the cross to be killed. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “When you have lifted me up on a cross to kill me” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὅταν ὑψώσητε τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου

Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this clause in the first person, as in the UST. (See: First, Second or Third Person)

τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου

See how you translated the Son of Man in 1:51. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐγώ εἰμι

See how you translated this in verse 24 and also see the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes for this chapter. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀπ’ ἐμαυτοῦ

See how you translated this phrase, from myself, in 5:30. Alternate translation: “on my own authority” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

καθὼς ἐδίδαξέν με ὁ Πατὴρ, ταῦτα λαλῶ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 8:29

ὁ πέμψας με

Here, this phrase refers to God. See how you translated it in 4:34. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

μετ’ ἐμοῦ

Here Jesus uses with me figuratively to refer to God’s help. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “helping me” (See: Metaphor)

John 8:30

ταῦτα αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος

Here, John is describing something that happened at the same time as the other clause in the sentence. If this might confuse your readers, you could make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “At the time Jesus was saying these things” (See: Connect — Simultaneous Time Relationship)

John 8:31

τοὺς…Ἰουδαίους

In verses 31–59 those Jews could refer to: (1) some Jewish people from Judea who were in the temple courtyard with Jesus. Alternate translation: “those Judeans” (2) some of the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “those Jewish authorities” (See: Synecdoche)

ὑμεῖς

In verses 31–59 Jesus uses the plural form of you to indicate that he could be speaking to: (1) some Jewish people from Judea who were in the temple courtyard with Jesus. Alternate translation: “you Judeans” (2) some of the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “you Jewish authorities” (See: Forms of You)

μείνητε ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τῷ ἐμῷ

The phrase remain in my word means to obey what Jesus said. If this might confuse your readers, you can express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “obey what I have said” (See: Idiom)

John 8:32

ἡ ἀλήθεια ἐλευθερώσει ὑμᾶς

Jesus speaks of truth figuratively as though it were a person who could free someone. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “knowing the truth will cause you to be free” or “if you obey the truth, God will set you free” (See: Personification)

τὴν ἀλήθειαν…ἡ ἀλήθεια

Here, the truth refers to what Jesus reveals about God, which would include his plan for forgiving sinful people through Jesus’ death on the cross. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of truth, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what is true about God … those true things” (See: Abstract Nouns).

John 8:33

πῶς σὺ λέγεις, ὅτι ἐλεύθεροι γενήσεσθε

The Jews are using the question form here to emphasize their shock at what Jesus has said. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We do not need to be set free!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

πῶς σὺ λέγεις, ὅτι ἐλεύθεροι γενήσεσθε

John 8:34

ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν

Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in 1:51. (See: Doublet)

δοῦλός ἐστιν τῆς ἁμαρτίας

Here Jesus uses the word slave figuratively to refer to someone who cannot stop sinning. This implies that sin is like a master for the person who sins. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile instead. Alternate translation: “is like a slave to sin” (See: Metaphor)

John 8:35

ὁ…δοῦλος οὐ μένει…ὁ Υἱὸς μένει

Jesus is speaking of slaves and sons in general, not of one particular slave and son. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “slaves do not remain … sons remain” (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ

Here, Jesus uses house figuratively to refer to the family that lives inside the house. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as a permanent member of a family” (See: Metonymy)

ὁ Υἱὸς μένει εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα

This clause is in contrast to the previous clause. Although slaves do not remain permanent members of the family who owns them, sons are permanent family members. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but the son remains into eternity” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

ὁ Υἱὸς μένει εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “the son remains in the house into eternity” (See: Ellipsis)

John 8:36

ἐὰν…ὁ Υἱὸς ὑμᾶς ἐλευθερώσῃ, ὄντως ἐλεύθεροι ἔσεσθε

It is implied that Jesus is talking about freedom from sin. Alternate translation: “if the Son sets you free from sin, you will truly be free” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐὰν…ὁ Υἱὸς ὑμᾶς ἐλευθερώσῃ

Unlike the generic use of son in the previous verse, here Jesus uses the Son to refer to himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “if I, the Son, free you” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

ἐὰν…ὁ Υἱὸς ὑμᾶς ἐλευθερώσῃ

Here Jesus uses frees figuratively to refer to stopping people from being controlled by their sinful desires. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “if the Son frees you from being controlled by sin” (See: Metaphor)

ὁ Υἱὸς

Son is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ὄντως ἐλεύθεροι ἔσεσθε

Here Jesus uses free figuratively to refer to people no longer being controlled by their sinful desires and thus able to avoid sinning. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “you will truly no longer be controlled by sin” or “you will truly be able to refrain from sin” (See: Metaphor)

John 8:37

Ἀβραάμ

Abraham is the name of a man, the most important ancestor of the Jewish people. (See: How to Translate Names)

ὁ λόγος ὁ ἐμὸς οὐ χωρεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν

This phrase has no place in you is an idiom that means to truly accept or believe something. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a similar idiom in your language or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you do not receive my words in your hearts” or “you reject my words” (See: Idiom)

ὁ λόγος ὁ ἐμὸς

Here, word refers to the message or teachings of Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my message” (See: Metonymy)

John 8:38

τῷ Πατρὶ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

καὶ ὑμεῖς…ἃ ἠκούσατε παρὰ τοῦ πατρὸς, ποιεῖτε

In this clause, Jesus uses the phrase the father to refer to the devil. Despite using the same words as in the previous clause, here Jesus is not referring to God. However, since Jesus did not yet reveal what he meant when he used this phrase, but was speaking ambiguously, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

John 8:39

ὁ πατὴρ

Here the people use father figuratively to refer to their ancestor. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Our forefather” (See: Metaphor)

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

τέκνα τοῦ Ἀβραάμ

Here Jesus uses children figuratively to mean “descendants.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “descendants of Abraham” (See: Metaphor)

τὰ ἔργα τοῦ Ἀβραὰμ

Jesus is using of to describe works that were done by Abraham. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the works done by Abraham” (See: Possession)

John 8:40

τοῦτο Ἀβραὰμ οὐκ ἐποίησεν

Here, this refers to what Jesus said earlier in the verse about what the Jews were trying to do to him. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Abraham did not seek to kill someone who told him the truth from God” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 8:41

ὑμεῖς ποιεῖτε τὰ ἔργα τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν

Jesus uses the phrase your father to refer to the devil. However, since the Jews did not understand what Jesus meant when he used this phrase, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

ἡμεῖς ἐκ πορνείας οὐ γεγεννήμεθα

Here, the Jews imply that Jesus does not know who his real father is and that his birth is the result of an immoral sexual relationship. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “We do not know about you, but we are not illegitimate children” or “We were all born from proper marriages” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 8:42

εἰ ὁ Θεὸς Πατὴρ ὑμῶν ἦν, ἠγαπᾶτε ἂν ἐμέ

Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he already knows that the condition is not true. Jesus knows that the Jews speaking to him here do not love him and are not true followers of God. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “God is surely not your father, because if he were, you would love me” (See: Connect — Contrary to Fact Conditions)

ἀπ’ ἐμαυτοῦ ἐλήλυθα

Here, from is used to indicate Jesus’ origin. He could only have authority if he came from God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “have I come on my own authority” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐκεῖνός

Here, that one refers to God the Father. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

John 8:43

διὰ τί τὴν λαλιὰν τὴν ἐμὴν οὐ γινώσκετε?

Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I will tell you why you do not understand what I say!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

οὐ δύνασθε ἀκούειν τὸν λόγον τὸν ἐμόν

Here, hear means to listen to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. It does not mean simply to hear what someone says. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you are not able to heed my words” (See: Metaphor)

τὸν λόγον τὸν ἐμόν

Here, Jesus uses words figuratively to refer to his teachings. See how you translated this phrase in 5:47. Alternate translation: “my teachings.” (See: Metonymy)

John 8:44

ὑμεῖς ἐκ τοῦ πατρὸς τοῦ διαβόλου ἐστὲ

The phrase from your father could refer to: (1) the person to whom the subject belongs, as in the UST. (2) the origin of the subject. Alternate translation: “You came from your father, the devil” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐκεῖνος

Here, that one refers to the devil. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The devil” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἀνθρωποκτόνος ἦν ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς

Here, the beginning refers to the time when the first humans, Adam and Eve, sinned. It does not refer to the very beginning of time. The devil tempted Eve to sin and Adam sinned as well. Because they sinned, all living things die as part of the punishment for sin. Therefore, Jesus calls the devil a murderer for starting the process that brought death to the world. You could indicate this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers, particularly if they would not know the story. Alternate translation: “was a murderer from the time when he tempted the first people to sin” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐν τῇ ἀληθείᾳ οὐκ ἔστηκεν

The phrase does not stand in the truth is an idiom that means to not accept or approve of what is true. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “does not approve of the truth” (See: Idiom)

οὐκ ἔστιν ἀλήθεια ἐν αὐτῷ

Here Jesus speaks figuratively of truth as if it were an object that could exist inside someone. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he never speaks the truth” (See: Metaphor)

ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων λαλεῖ

Alternate translation: “he speaks according to his character” or “he speaks what is most natural for him to speak”

ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ

Here Jesus uses father figuratively to refer to the one who originated the act of lying. Since the devil is the first being to tell a lie, he is called the father of lying. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the first one to lie” (See: Metaphor)

ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ

Here, it refers to the act of lying. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the father of lying” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 8:46

τίς ἐξ ὑμῶν ἐλέγχει με περὶ ἁμαρτίας?

Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that he has never sinned. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “None of you can convict me concerning sin!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

εἰ ἀλήθειαν λέγω

John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since I speak the truth” (See: Connect — Factual Conditions)

διὰ τί ὑμεῖς οὐ πιστεύετέ μοι?

Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to scold the Jews for their unbelief. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you have no reason for not believing me!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

John 8:47

ὁ ὢν ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ…ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐκ ἐστέ

The phrase from God could refer to: (1) the person to whom the subject belongs, as in the UST. (2) the origin of the subject. Alternate translation: “He who came from God … you did not come from God” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ ὢν ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ

Although He is masculine, Jesus is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “A person who is from God” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

ἀκούει…ὑμεῖς οὐκ ἀκούετε

Here, hear means to listen to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. See how you translated hear in verse 43. Alternate translation: “heeds … you do not heed” (See: Metaphor)

τὰ ῥήματα τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here, Jesus uses words figuratively to refer to what God has said. See how you translated words in 5:47. Alternate translation: “the things that God has said” (See: Metonymy)

John 8:48

οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in 1:19. (See: Synecdoche)

οὐ καλῶς λέγομεν ἡμεῖς ὅτι Σαμαρείτης εἶ σὺ, καὶ δαιμόνιον ἔχεις?

The Jews are using a rhetorical question here to accuse Jesus and to dishonor him. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We certainly say rightly that you are a Samaritan and have a demon!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Σαμαρείτης εἶ σὺ

Most Jewish people in Jesus’ time hated and despised Samaritans, so his Jewish opponents here called Jesus a Samaritan in order to insult him. Use the natural form in your language to indicate that this is an insult. Alternate translation: “you are one of those accursed Samaritans” or “you are an enemy Samaritan” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

δαιμόνιον ἔχεις

See how you translated this phrase in 7:20. Alternate translation: “a demon is inside of you!” or “you must be under the control of a demon!”

John 8:49

ἐγὼ δαιμόνιον οὐκ ἔχω

See how you translated the similar phrase in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “a demon is not inside of me” or “I am not under the control of a demon”

John 8:50

ζητῶ τὴν δόξαν μου

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “seek to glorify myself” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἔστιν ὁ ζητῶν καὶ κρίνων

Here, one refers to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “God is the one seeking and judging” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ ζητῶν

Here, Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “one seeking my glory” (See: Ellipsis)

κρίνων

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. Here, judging could refer to: (1) God judging between what Jesus said about himself and what his Jewish opponents were saying about him. Alternate translation: “judging between your testimony and mine” (2) God condemning those who dishonor Jesus. Alternate translation: “judging those who dishonor me” (See: Ellipsis)

John 8:51

ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν

Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this in 1:51. (See: Doublet)

τὸν ἐμὸν λόγον

Here, word refers to the message or teachings of Jesus. See how you translated this phrase in 5:24. Alternate translation: “my message” or “what I say” (See: Metonymy)

θάνατον οὐ μὴ θεωρήσῃ

Here Jesus uses see figuratively to refer to experiencing or participating in something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he will certainly not experience death” (See: Metaphor)

θάνατον οὐ μὴ θεωρήσῃ εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα

Jesus uses death to refer to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. Alternate translation: “he will certainly not die” (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

John 8:52

οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in 1:19. (See: Synecdoche)

δαιμόνιον ἔχεις

Alternate translation: “a demon is inside of you” or “you must be under the control of a demon”

Ἀβραὰμ

See how you translated Abraham in verse 37. (See: How to Translate Names)

σὺ λέγεις, ἐάν τις τὸν λόγον μου τηρήσῃ

ἐάν τις τὸν λόγον μου τηρήσῃ

See how you translated this in the previous verse.

οὐ μὴ γεύσηται θανάτου εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα

The Jews say here that Jesus used taste figuratively to refer to experiencing or participating in something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he will certainly not experience death” (See: Metaphor)

θανάτου

See how you translated death in the previous verse. (See: Metaphor)

John 8:53

μὴ σὺ μείζων εἶ τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ, ὅστις ἀπέθανεν?

The Jews are using this question to emphasize that they do not think that Jesus is greater than Abraham. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are certainly not greater than our father Abraham who died!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν

See how you translated this phrase in verse 39. (See: Metaphor)

τίνα σεαυτὸν ποιεῖς?

The Jews are using this question to rebuke Jesus for thinking that he is more important than Abraham. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not think that you are so important!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

John 8:54

ὁ Πατήρ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ὃν ὑμεῖς λέγετε, ὅτι Θεὸς ἡμῶν ἐστιν

John 8:55

τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ

Here Jesus uses word figuratively to refer what God has said. If this would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what God says” (See: Metonymy)

John 8:56

ὁ πατὴρ ὑμῶν

See how you translated this phrase in verse 39. (See: Metaphor)

ἴδῃ…εἶδεν

Here Jesus uses see figuratively to refer to experiencing or participating in something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he might experience … he experienced it” (See: Metaphor)

τὴν ἡμέραν τὴν ἐμήν

Here Jesus uses my day figuratively to refer to the time when Jesus came to earth. If this would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my coming” or “the time when I would come to earth” (See: Metonymy)

εἶδεν καὶ ἐχάρη

This phrase could mean: (1) Abraham literally saw a prophetic vision of Jesus coming to earth. Alternate translation: “he foresaw my coming through revelation from God and was glad” (2) when his son Isaac was born, Abraham metaphorically saw that God was beginning to fulfill the covenant that would culminate in Jesus coming to earth. Alternate translation: “he perceived my coming when God gave him a son, and he was glad” (See: Metaphor)

John 8:57

οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι

See how you translated the Jews in verse 31. Alternate translation: “the Judeans” or “the Jewish leaders” (See: Synecdoche)

πεντήκοντα ἔτη οὔπω ἔχεις, καὶ Ἀβραὰμ ἑώρακας?

Here, the Jews opposing Jesus are using this question to express their shock that Jesus claims to have seen Abraham. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are less than fifty years old! You could not possibly have seen Abraham!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

John 8:58

ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν

Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this in 1:51. (See: Doublet)

ἐγὼ εἰμί

See how you translated I am verse 24 and also see the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes for this chapter. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 8:59

ἦραν…λίθους, ἵνα βάλωσιν ἐπ’ αὐτόν

The Jews opposing Jesus are outraged at what Jesus said in the previous verse. Here, John implies that they picked up stones in order to kill him by stoning because he had made himself equal to God (See: stone, stoning). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “they picked up stones in order to kill him, because he claimed to be equal with God” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τοῦ ἱεροῦ

Jesus and his Jewish opponents were in the courtyard of the temple. See how you translated temple in verse 14. (See: Synecdoche)

John 9

John 9 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

Jesus’ sixth sign: he heals a blind man (9:1–12)
The Pharisees question the formerly blind man whom Jesus healed (9:13–34)
Jesus speaks with the formerly blind man and some Pharisees (9:35–41)

Special Concepts in this Chapter

“Who sinned?”

Many of the Jews in Jesus’ time believed that if a person was blind or deaf or crippled, it was because he, his parents, or someone else in his family had sinned. The rabbis even taught that it was possible for a baby to sin while still in the womb. This was not the teaching of the law of Moses. (See: sin, sinful, sinner, sinning and law, law of Moses, law of Yahweh, law of God)

“A sinner”

The Pharisees call some people in this chapter “sinners.” The Jewish leaders thought these people were sinful, but in reality the leaders were also sinful. This can be taken as irony. (See: sin, sinful, sinner, sinning and Irony)

“He does not keep the Sabbath”

The Pharisees thought that Jesus was working, and so breaking the Sabbath, by healing the blind man. (See: Sabbath)

Important Metaphors in this Chapter

Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: righteous, righteousness, unrighteous, unrighteousness, upright, uprightness)

Seeing and being blind

Jesus uses the healing of the blind man as a metaphor for spiritual blindness. Just as a blind man cannot see the physical world, a man who is spiritually blind does not recognize God’s truth, which includes his sinfulness and need for salvation. The blind man in this story is first healed from his physical blindness (9:6–7), then from his spiritual blindness (9:38). By contrast, the Pharisees are not physically blind but are spiritually blind. Jesus calls the Pharisees blind because they have seen him do great miracles that only someone sent from God could do, but they still refuse to believe that God sent him or that they are sinners who need to repent (9:39–40). (See: Metaphor)

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

“Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter (9:35). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: Son of Man, son of man and First, Second or Third Person)

John 9:1

καὶ

And here shows that John intended for the events in this chapter to be directly connected to what Jesus said in the previous chapter. In chapter 8, Jesus said that he is the Light of the World. In this chapter, Jesus demonstrates that he is the Light of the World by giving physical sight and spiritual light to a blind man. (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

John 9:2

ἠρώτησαν αὐτὸν…λέγοντες

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “asked him, and they said” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

τίς ἥμαρτεν, οὗτος ἢ οἱ γονεῖς αὐτοῦ, ἵνα τυφλὸς γεννηθῇ?

This question reflects the ancient Jewish belief that sin caused illnesses and other deformities. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “Teacher, we know that sin causes a person to be blind. Whose sin caused this man to be born blind? did this man himself sin, or was it his parents who sinned?” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἵνα τυφλὸς γεννηθῇ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that he might be blind when his mother bore him” (See: Active or Passive)

John 9:3

ἵνα φανερωθῇ τὰ ἔργα τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ

Here, John records Jesus leaving out some information that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “he was born blind so that the works of God might be revealed in him” (See: Ellipsis)

τὰ ἔργα τοῦ Θεοῦ

Jesus is using of to describe works that are performed by God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the works done by God” (See: Possession)

φανερωθῇ τὰ ἔργα τοῦ Θεοῦ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I might reveal the works of God” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐν αὐτῷ

Here, him could refer to: (1) the man’s body, especially his blind eyes. Alternate translation: “in his body” (2) the man’s body and spirit. Alternate translation: “in his body and spirit” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

John 9:4

ἡμᾶς

When Jesus says us here, he is including himself and the disciples who are with him. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

τὰ ἔργα τοῦ πέμψαντός με

Here, Jesus is using of to describe works that God wants Jesus and his disciples to do. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the works that the one who sent me demands” (See: Possession)

τοῦ πέμψαντός με

Here, the one who sent me refers to God. See how you translated it in 4:34. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἕως ἡμέρα ἐστίν; ἔρχεται νὺξ

Here, day and night could mean: (1) the time when Jesus was on the earth with his disciples and the time when he was no longer on earth, respectively. Alternate translation: “while I am still with you. The time when I will leave you is coming” (2) a person’s lifetime and the time that person dies, respectively. Alternate translation: “while we are still alive. The time when we will die is coming” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἕως ἡμέρα ἐστίν

Here Jesus uses day figuratively. He compares the time when he and his disciples can do God’s work to the daytime, which is the time when people normally work. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “while it is the time like the daylight hours when people usually work” (See: Metaphor)

ἔρχεται νὺξ

Here Jesus uses Night figuratively. He compares the time when he and his disciples cannot do God’s work to the nighttime, which is the time when people normally cannot work because it is too dark to see. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “The time like the night hours is coming when people cannot work” (See: Metaphor)

John 9:5

ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ

Here Jesus uses world to refer to the earth on which people live. It does not refer only to the people in the world or to the entire universe. Alternate translation: “on the earth” (See: Metonymy)

φῶς εἰμι τοῦ κόσμου

See how you translated this clause in 8:12. Alternate translation: “I am the one who is like a light and who reveals God’s truth and goodness to the world” (See: Metaphor)

John 9:6

ἐποίησεν πηλὸν ἐκ τοῦ πτύσματος

Jesus used his fingers to mix the dirt and saliva into mud. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “used his fingers to mix the dirt and saliva to make mud” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 9:7

νίψαι…ἐνίψατο

Here, Jesus wanted the blind man to wash the mud off of his eyes in the pool and that is what the man did. Jesus did not want him to bathe or wash his whole body. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and wash your eyes … washed his eyes” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὴν κολυμβήθραν τοῦ Σιλωάμ

Jesus is using of to describe a pool that is called Siloam. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the pool named Siloam” (See: Possession)

ὃ ἑρμηνεύεται, ἀπεσταλμένος

In this clause John provides a brief break in the storyline in order to explain to his readers what Siloam means. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “which means ‘Sent’” (See: Background Information)

ὃ ἑρμηνεύεται, ἀπεσταλμένος

John assumes that his readers will know that he is saying what the name Siloam means when translated from the Aramaic language into Greek. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which is the Aramaic word for ‘Sent’” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἦλθεν

As the next verse suggests, the man came back to his home, not to Jesus. Your language may state “went” rather than came in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went back” (See: Go and Come)

βλέπων

Here, seeing means that the man became able to see before coming back. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “after becoming able to see” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 9:8

ὅτι προσαίτης ἦν

This clause is missing some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “those who had seen that he was a beggar” (See: Ellipsis)

οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ καθήμενος καὶ προσαιτῶν?

The people here are using a rhetorical question to express their surprise at seeing the blind man who has been healed. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This man is the one who used to sit and beg!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

John 9:10

πῶς ἠνεῴχθησάν σου οἱ ὀφθαλμοί?

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “How did your eyes become opened?” (See: Active or Passive)

πῶς ἠνεῴχθησάν σου οἱ ὀφθαλμοί

Here, eyes opened figuratively describes the ability to see by referring to something associated with vision coming into action, specifically, the eyes. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “How are you able to see?” (See: Metonymy)

John 9:11

ὁ λεγόμενος Ἰησοῦς

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom we call Jesus” (See: Active or Passive)

πηλὸν ἐποίησεν

See how you translated a similar phrase in verse 6. Alternate translation: “used his fingers to mix the dirt with saliva to make mud” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

νίψαι…καὶ νιψάμενος

See how you translated wash in verse 7. Alternate translation: “wash your eyes … and having washed my eyes” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀνέβλεψα

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of sight, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I could see” (See: Abstract Nouns)

John 9:13

ἄγουσιν

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

John 9:14

In this verse John briefly stops telling about the events in the story in order to give background information about when Jesus healed the man. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

τὸν πηλὸν ἐποίησεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς, καὶ ἀνέῳξεν αὐτοῦ τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς

The negative reaction of the Pharisees described in the following verses is based on their belief that, according to their religious law, Jesus’ actions were considered to be work. Therefore, they believed that he was disobeying God’s command to rest and not work on the Sabbath. (See: law, law of Moses, law of Yahweh, law of God and work, works, deeds and Sabbath). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus made the mud and opened his eyes. These were two deeds the Pharisees considered to be work.” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀνέῳξεν αὐτοῦ τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς

Here, opened eyes figuratively describes the ability to see by referring to something associated with vision coming into action, specifically, the eyes. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “caused him to see” (See: Metonymy)

John 9:15

πάλιν οὖν ἠρώτων αὐτὸν καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι

Here, again means that this is the second time people questioned the blind man whom Jesus had healed. It does not mean that this is the second time the Pharisees questioned him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then, in addition to his neighbors questioning him, the Pharisees also began asking him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀνέβλεψεν

See how you translated a similar phrase in verse 11. Alternate translation: “he could see” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐνιψάμην

See how you translated washed in verse 11. Alternate translation: “I washed my eyes” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 9:16

τὸ Σάββατον οὐ τηρεῖ

The phrase he does not keep the Sabbath means he disobeys the regulations for the Sabbath that God gave in the law of Moses. The Pharisees added many regulations which they considered to be equal with those that God had given. It was these additional regulations that Jesus was disobeying, thereby making the Pharisees very angry with him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he does not obeying our Sabbath regulations” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὐκ ἔστιν οὗτος παρὰ Θεοῦ ὁ ἄνθρωπος

Here, from is used to indicate Jesus’ origin. He could only have authority if he came from God. Since Jesus was not obeying the Pharisees’ rules, they refused to believe that God had given him authority. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This man does not have God’s authority” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πῶς δύναται ἄνθρωπος ἁμαρτωλὸς τοιαῦτα σημεῖα ποιεῖν?

Some people are using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that Jesus’ signs prove he is not a sinner. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “A sinner cannot possibly do such signs!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

σημεῖα

See how you translated this term in 2:11. See also the discussion of signs in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracles”

σχίσμα ἦν ἐν αὐτοῖς

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of division, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they divided themselves against each other” (See: Abstract Nouns)

John 9:17

λέγουσιν

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ὅτι ἠνέῳξέν σου τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς

Because the next verse indicates that the Pharisees did not believe that the man used to be blind, here, since does not mean that they thought the man had really been healed. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “since you claim that he opened your eyes” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἠνέῳξέν σου τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς

Here, he opened your eyes figuratively describes the newly gained ability to see by referring to something associated with vision coming into action, specifically, the eyes. See how you translated a similar phrase in verse 14. Alternate translation: “he caused you to see” (See: Metonymy)

John 9:18

οὖν

Therefore here indicates that what follows is the result of what the man said about Jesus in the previous verse. Because the formerly blind man believed Jesus was a prophet, the Jews who opposed Jesus refused to believe that the man had really been blind. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Since the man said that Jesus was a prophet” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders, which in this chapter may have been a group of leaders among the Pharisees. See how you translated this term in 1:19. (See: Synecdoche)

John 9:19

ἠρώτησαν αὐτοὺς λέγοντες

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “they asked him, and they said” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

τυφλὸς ἐγεννήθη

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he was blind when you bore him” (See: Active or Passive)

John 9:20

τυφλὸς ἐγεννήθη

John 9:21

ἡλικίαν ἔχει

The phrase full maturity describes a person who is an adult and is legally responsible for himself. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “is an adult” or “is a full-grown man” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 9:22

In this verse John briefly stops telling about the events in the story in order to give background information about the man’s parents being afraid of the Jewish leaders. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

τοὺς Ἰουδαίους…οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders, which in this chapter may have been a group of leaders among the Pharisees. See how you translated this term in 1:19. (See: Synecdoche)

ἀποσυνάγωγος γένηται

Here John uses put out of the synagogue figuratively to refer to no longer being allowed to go into the synagogue and no longer belonging to the group of people who attend services at the synagogue. When people were put out of the synagogue, they were shunned by their local community. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he would not be allowed to enter the synagogue” or “he would no longer belong to the synagogue community” (See: Metaphor)

John 9:23

ἡλικίαν ἔχει

See how you translated this phrase in verse 21. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 9:24

ἐφώνησαν…τὸν ἄνθρωπον

Here, they refers to the Jewish leaders introduced in (verse 18)

δὸς δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ

This is an idiom that Jewish people used when commanding someone to take an oath. It first appears in Joshua 7:19 when Joshua orders Achan to confess his sin. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Speak the truth before God” (See: Idiom)

οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρωπος

Here, John records the Jewish leaders saying this man as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus and to avoid saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “this so-and-so” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 9:25

ἐκεῖνος

Here, that one refers to the man who had been blind. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the man who had been blind” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

John 9:26

πῶς ἤνοιξέν σου τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς

Here, open eyes figuratively describes the ability to see by referring to something associated with vision coming into action, specifically, the eyes. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “How did he cause you to see?” (See: Metonymy)

John 9:27

τί πάλιν θέλετε ἀκούειν?

The man is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize his amazement that the Jewish leaders have asked him to tell them again what happened. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I am surprised that you want to listen again to what happened to me!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

μὴ καὶ ὑμεῖς θέλετε αὐτοῦ μαθηταὶ γενέσθαι?

Here the formerly blind man actually means to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of his words. He knows that the Jewish leaders do not want to follow Jesus, but asks this question to ridicule them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “It sounds like you also want to become his disciples!” (See: Irony)

John 9:28

ἐκείνου

Here John records the Jewish leaders saying that one as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus and to avoid saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “of that so-and-so” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἡμεῖς δὲ τοῦ Μωϋσέως ἐσμὲν μαθηταί

Here, the pronoun we is exclusive. The Jewish leaders are speaking only of themselves. Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “but we true Jews are disciples of Moses” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

John 9:29

τοῦτον

Here John records the Jewish leaders saying this one as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus and to avoid saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “this so-and-so” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τοῦτον…πόθεν ἐστίν

Here, the Jewish leaders use from to indicate Jesus’ origin. He could only have authority if he came from God, but they say that they do not know where he came from. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “where this one gets his authority” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 9:30

ἐν τούτῳ γὰρ τὸ θαυμαστόν ἐστιν, ὅτι ὑμεῖς οὐκ οἴδατε

If the plain statement form for this seems unnatural, you could translate this as an exclamation and you may need to make a new sentence. Alternate translation: “This is amazing! You do not know” or “How remarkable! You do not know” (See: Exclamations)

πόθεν ἐστίν

See how you translated from in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “where he gets his authority” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἤνοιξέν μου τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς

See how you translated a similar phrase in verse 14. Alternate translation: “he caused me to see” (See: Metonymy)

John 9:31

ἁμαρτωλῶν…οὐκ ἀκούει…τούτου ἀκούει

Here, hear and hears mean paying attention to or listening to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. It does not mean simply to hear what someone says. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “does not heed sinners … he heeds this one” (See: Metaphor)

John 9:32

οὐκ ἠκούσθη

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “no one has ever heard” (See: Active or Passive)

ἠνέῳξέν…ὀφθαλμοὺς τυφλοῦ γεγεννημένου

See how you translated a similar phrase in verse 14. Alternate translation: “caused one having been born blind to see” (See: Metonymy)

τυφλοῦ γεγεννημένου

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “of one who was blind when his mother bore him” (See: Active or Passive)

John 9:33

εἰ μὴ ἦν οὗτος παρὰ Θεοῦ, οὐκ ἠδύνατο ποιεῖν οὐδέν

Here, the formerly blind man uses a double negative sentence pattern to emphasize the positive fact that Jesus must be from God. If this double-negative pattern would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Only a man from God would be able to do anything like that!” (See: Double Negatives)

εἰ μὴ ἦν οὗτος παρὰ Θεοῦ

The formerly blind man is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He has concluded that Jesus must have come from God because he healed him. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If this one were not from God, but he is” (See: Connect — Contrary to Fact Conditions)

μὴ ἦν…παρὰ Θεοῦ

See how you translated from God in verse 16. Alternate translation: “did not have God’s authority” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὐδέν

Here, anything does not mean “anything at all.” It means anything like the miraculous signs that Jesus was performing, particularly his healing of this man who was born blind. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “anything like healing a man blind from birth” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 9:34

ἐν ἁμαρτίαις σὺ ἐγεννήθης ὅλος, καὶ σὺ διδάσκεις ἡμᾶς?

The Jewish leaders are using a question to emphasize their belief that this man was not qualified to question their opinion. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You were completely born in sins, and you are not qualified to teach us!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἐν ἁμαρτίαις σὺ ἐγεννήθης ὅλος

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Your mother bore you completely in sins” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐν ἁμαρτίαις σὺ ἐγεννήθης ὅλος

The Jewish leaders mention the formerly blind man being born in sins to imply that the sins of his parents had caused his blindness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “You were born blind completely because of your parents’ sins” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐξέβαλον αὐτὸν ἔξω

Here John uses threw him out figuratively to refer to him no longer being allowed to go into the synagogue and no longer belonging to the group of people who attend services at the synagogue. When people were thrown out of the synagogue, they were shunned by their local community. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he was forbidden to enter the synagogue” or “he was forbidden to belong to the synagogue community” (See: Metaphor)

John 9:35

Jesus finds the man whom he healed in (verses 1–7) and begins to speak to him and the crowd.

ἐξέβαλον αὐτὸν ἔξω

See how you translated a similar phrase in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “they had forbidden him from entering the synagogue” or “they had forbidden him from belonging to the synagogue community” (See: Metaphor)

εὑρὼν αὐτὸν

Here, found implies that Jesus had first searched for the man. It does not mean that Jesus unintentionally or accidentally met the man at another time. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “having looked for him and found him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου

Here Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man”. However, the formerly blind man did not realize that Jesus was speaking of himself, and Jesus does not explain the metaphor to him until verse 37. Therefore, you do not need to explain that Jesus is speaking about himself here. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου

See how you translated this phrase in 1:51. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 9:36

κύριε

The formerly blind man calls Jesus Sir in order to show respect or politeness. He does not yet know that Jesus is the Lord. (See: lord, Lord, master, sir)

John 9:37

καὶ ὁ λαλῶν μετὰ σοῦ ἐκεῖνός ἐστιν

Here, Jesus is referring to himself in third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person form. Alternate translation: “and I, the one who is speaking with you, am that one” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

John 9:38

Κύριε

Now that the formerly blind man knows that Jesus is the Lord, he calls Jesus Lord. (See: lord, Lord, master, sir)

πιστεύω

Here, the formerly blind man is leaving out some words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from verse 36. Alternate translation: “I believe that you are the Son of Man” (See: Ellipsis)

John 9:39

εἰς κρίμα

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of judgment, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “In order to judge” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἵνα οἱ μὴ βλέποντες, βλέπωσιν; καὶ οἱ βλέποντες, τυφλοὶ γένωνται

Here, not seeing, see, seeing, and become blind are metaphors. See the discussion of these metaphors in the General Notes for this chapter. If these uses of these words would confuse your readers, you could use similes or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “so that those who know they are spiritually blind might receive spiritual sight, and those who falsely think they have spiritual sight might remain spiritually blind” or “so that those who recognize that they don’t know God might know him, and those who falsely think they know God might continue not knowing him” (See: Metaphor)

ἵνα οἱ μὴ βλέποντες, βλέπωσιν; καὶ οἱ βλέποντες, τυφλοὶ γένωνται

Here, so that could indicate that: (1) the rest of the verse is the result of Jesus’ judgment, which may require starting a new sentence. Alternate translation: “The result of my judgment will be that those not seeing might see and those seeing might become blind” (2) the rest of the verse is an explanation of the judgment Jesus mentioned at the beginning of the verse, which may also require starting a new sentence. Alternate translation: “That judgment is that those not seeing might see and those seeing might become blind” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

John 9:40

μὴ καὶ ἡμεῖς τυφλοί ἐσμεν

Several Pharisees are using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that they do not think that they are spiritually blind. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We surely are not also blind!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

μὴ καὶ ἡμεῖς τυφλοί ἐσμεν

Here the Pharisees use blind figuratively to refer to not knowing God’s truth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “We are not also ignorant of God’s truth, are we?” (See: Metaphor)

John 9:41

εἰ τυφλοὶ ἦτε, οὐκ ἂν εἴχετε ἁμαρτίαν

See how you translated blind in verses 39–40. Alternate translation: “If you did not know God’s truth, you would have no sin” (See: Metaphor)

οὐκ ἂν εἴχετε ἁμαρτίαν…ἡ ἁμαρτία ὑμῶν μένει

In these two phrases, Jesus speaks figuratively of sin as if it were an object that a person could possess or that could remain with a person. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you would not be sinful … You are still sinful” (See: Metaphor)

λέγετε, ὅτι βλέπομεν, ἡ ἁμαρτία ὑμῶν μένει

See how you translated see in verse 39. Alternate translation: “you say, ‘We know God’s truth.’ Your sin remains” (See: Metaphor)

λέγετε, ὅτι βλέπομεν

John 10

John 10 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

Jesus tells the Parable of the Sheep Pen (10:1–6)
Jesus says he is the gate of the sheep pen (10:7–10)
Jesus says he is the Good Shepherd (10:11–18)
The Jewish leaders disagree about who Jesus is (10:19–21)
Jesus says he is God at the Festival of Dedication (10:22–42)

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Blasphemy

Blasphemy is when a person claims that he is God or claims that God has told him to speak when God has not told him to speak. The law of Moses commanded the Israelites to kill blasphemers by throwing stones at them until they died. When Jesus said, “I and the Father are one,” the Jews thought he was blaspheming, so they picked up stones to kill him. (See: blasphemy, blaspheme, blasphemous and law, law of Moses, law of Yahweh, law of God)

Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

Parables

Parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people who wanted to believe in him could easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. People who did not want to believe in him would not be able to understand the message (10:1–6).

Sheep

Jesus spoke metaphorically of people as sheep because sheep do not see well, do not think well, often walk away from those who care for them, and cannot defend themselves when other animals attack them. God’s people are similar to sheep in that they also are weak and do foolish things like rebelling against God. (See: ewe, ram, sheep, sheepfold, sheepshearers, sheepskins)

Sheep pen

A sheep pen was a space with a stone wall around it in which shepherds would keep their sheep for periods of time, such as over night. There were large sheep pens in which multiple flocks were kept, and also smaller sheep pens for a single flock. Once they were inside the sheep pen, the sheep could not run away, and animals and thieves could not easily get inside to kill or steal them. In 10:1–5, Jesus uses the sheep pen as a metaphor for the people of Israel. Out of the “sheep pen” of the Jewish people, Jesus calls his first “sheep.”

Laying down and taking up life

Jesus speaks of his life as if it were a physical object that he could: (1) lay down on the ground, which is a metaphor for dying, or (2) pick up again, which is a metaphor for becoming alive again.

John 10:1

In verses 1–5, Jesus speaks a parable, which he then uses for teaching purposes in verses 7–18. Here, the “shepherd” is a metaphor for Jesus and “sheep” is a metaphor for people. “His own sheep” are the people who follow Jesus, and the thief, robber, and “strangers” are the Jewish leaders, including the Pharisees, who try to deceive the people. Since Jesus does not explain the meaning of this parable here, you should not explain the metaphors within the parable itself. (See: Parables)

In verses 1–21, Jesus continues to speak to the Pharisees whom he was speaking with at the end of the last chapter. This section continues the story which began in 9:35.

ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν

Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in 1:51. (See: Doublet)

αὐλὴν τῶν προβάτων

A sheep pen is an enclosed or fenced area where a shepherd keeps his sheep. See the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. If your readers would not be familiar with this way of protecting livestock, you could use a general expression for a roofless space surrounded by walls or a fence. Alternate translation: “the walled area for protecting the sheep” or “the place where sheep are kept” (See: Translate Unknowns)

κλέπτης…καὶ λῃστής

The words translated thief and robber describe two different kinds of criminals. A thief is a person who steals by stealth, but a robber is a person who steals by force or violence. For this reason, you may want to use “or” instead of and between these two terms. Alternate translation: “a thief or a robber” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 10:2

ποιμήν…τῶν προβάτων

Jesus is using of to describe a shepherd who takes care of the sheep. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the shepherd who cares for the sheep” or “the shepherd in charge of the sheep” (See: Possession)

John 10:3

ὁ θυρωρὸς

A gatekeeper is a person who guards the sheep pen and opens the gate for the shepherd. If your readers would not be familiar with this way of protecting livestock, you could use a general expression for a person who guards an entrance. Alternate translation: “The gate guard” or “The person guarding the gate” (See: Translate Unknowns)

ὁ θυρωρὸς ἀνοίγει

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “The gatekeeper opens the gate” (See: Ellipsis)

τούτῳ…τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ…τὰ ἴδια πρόβατα φωνεῖ

In this verse, this one, his, and he refer to the shepherd mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for this shepherd … the shepherd’s voice … the shepherd calls his own sheep” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

τὰ πρόβατα τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ ἀκούει

Here, hear could mean: (1) all the sheep in the pen hear the shepherd’s voice, but not all of them respond to it, as in the ULT. This meaning implies that there are multiple flocks in the sheep pen. (2) the sheep that belong to the shepherd heed or obey his voice. This implies that the sheep are identical with his own sheep. Alternate translation: “the sheep heed his voice” (See: Metaphor)

τὰ ἴδια πρόβατα φωνεῖ κατ’ ὄνομα

Here, his own sheep are designated as a separate group among the sheep of the previous clause. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he calls his own sheep by name out from among all the sheep” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 10:4

ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν πορεύεται

Shepherds in Jesus’ culture led their sheep by walking in front of them. If people who take care of livestock in your culture do not do this, you might need to state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he leads them to pasture by walking in front of them” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 10:5

τῶν ἀλλοτρίων τὴν φωνήν

Here, the word voice is singular in form, but it refers to all of the strangers’ voices as a group. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the voices of strangers” (See: Collective Nouns)

John 10:6

ταύτην τὴν παροιμίαν

This parable is an illustration from the work of shepherds that uses metaphors. See the discussion of parables in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “this analogy” (See: Parables)

αὐτοῖς

In this verse, them, those ones, and they refer to the Pharisees, whom Jesus was speaking with in 9:40–41. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly, as the UST does. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

John 10:7

In verses 7–18, Jesus uses ideas from the parable he told in verses 1–5 in order to teach about himself, those who believe in him, and those who deceive the people.

ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν

Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in 1:51. (See: Doublet)

ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ θύρα τῶν προβάτων

Here Jesus uses the word gate differently than he did in verse 1–2. Here, Jesus uses gate figuratively to say that he provides access into heaven, where God dwells. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “I am like the gate” (See: Metaphor)

ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ θύρα τῶν προβάτων

Jesus is using of to describe himself as a gate that is for the sheep to use. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “I am the gate for the sheep” (See: Possession)

τῶν προβάτων

Here, Jesus uses sheep figuratively to refer to people who believe in him. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “of those who follow me like sheep” (See: Metaphor)

John 10:8

πάντες ὅσοι ἦλθον πρὸ ἐμοῦ

Everyone here is an exaggeration that refers to the majority of Israel’s leaders, including the Pharisees and other Jewish leaders. Not every leader of Israel throughout history was wicked, but most were. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “Most leaders who came before me” (See: Hyperbole)

κλέπται…καὶ λῃσταί

Here Jesus uses thief and robber figuratively to refer to the Jewish leaders who were deceiving the people. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “like a thief and a robber” (See: Metaphor)

κλέπται…καὶ λῃσταί

The words translated thief and robber describe two different kinds of criminals. See how you translated this expression in verse 1. Alternate translation: “a thief or a robber” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὰ πρόβατα

In this verse, Jesus uses sheep figuratively to refer specifically to the Jewish people who believed in him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the sheep who follow me” or “the sheep, my disciples” (See: Metaphor)

οὐκ ἤκουσαν αὐτῶν

Here, hear means listening to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. It does not mean simply to hear what someone says. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “did not heed them” (See: Metaphor)

John 10:9

ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ θύρα

Here Jesus uses the word gate figuratively to say that he provides access into heaven, where God dwells. See how you translated this phrase in verse 7. Alternate translation: “I am like the gate” (See: Metaphor)

δι’ ἐμοῦ ἐάν τις εἰσέλθῃ

Here Jesus uses enters through me figuratively to refer to trusting in him for salvation. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “If anyone believes in me for salvation” (See: Metaphor)

σωθήσεται

Here, saved refers to being saved from the eternal punishment in hell that all people deserve because of their sins. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will be saved from hell” (See: Metaphor)

σωθήσεται

εἰσελεύσεται, καὶ ἐξελεύσεται

The phrase go in and go out is a common Old Testament idiom meaning to travel and move around freely in a safe environment. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “he will move about freely” or “he will go around in a safe environment” (See: Idiom)

νομὴν εὑρήσει

Jesus uses the phrase * find pasture* figuratively to refer to having one’s needs provided for. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will find sustenance” or “will receive everything that he needs” (See: Metaphor)

John 10:10

ὁ κλέπτης

Jesus is speaking of thieves in general, not of one particular thief. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “A thief” (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

ὁ κλέπτης

Jesus uses thief figuratively to refer to the Jewish leaders who were deceiving the people. See how you translated the similar use of this word in verse 8. Alternate translation: “Every leader is like a thief who” (See: Metaphor)

οὐκ ἔρχεται εἰ μὴ ἵνα κλέψῃ

If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “comes only in order that he might steal” (See: Double Negatives)

κλέψῃ, καὶ θύσῃ, καὶ ἀπολέσῃ

Here, Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he might steal and kill and destroy the sheep” (See: Ellipsis)

ἔχωσιν

Here, they refers to the sheep, which is a metaphor for God’s people. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the sheep might have” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἵνα ζωὴν ἔχωσιν

Here, life refers to eternal life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that they might have eternal life” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

καὶ περισσὸν ἔχωσιν

Here, abundantly implies that the eternal life Jesus’ followers will receive has more blessings than anyone could expect. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and might have it with abundant blessings” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 10:11

In verses 11–18, Jesus uses ideas from the parable he told in verses 1–5 to proclaim that he is the good shepherd who leads his sheep to heaven and takes care of them.

ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός

Jesus uses the phrase good shepherd figuratively to refer to himself. Just as a good shepherd takes care of his sheep, Jesus takes care of his followers. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “I am like a good shepherd” (See: Metaphor)

τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ τίθησιν

Here Jesus uses lays down his life to refer to voluntarily dying. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “voluntarily dies” (See: Euphemism)

τῶν προβάτων

See how you translated sheep in the verse 8. (See: Metaphor)

John 10:12

ὁ μισθωτὸς

Jesus uses the phrase hired servant figuratively to refer to the Jewish leaders and teachers. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “each of your leaders is like a hired servant” (See: Metaphor)

ὁ μισθωτὸς

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the man whom someone hired” (See: Active or Passive)

τὸν λύκον…ὁ λύκος

A wolf is a fierce wild dog that is known for attacking and devouring livestock. If your readers would not be familiar with this animal, you could use the name of a fierce predator or wild dog in your area that commonly eats farmers’ livestock, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the fierce predator … that predator” (See: Translate Unknowns)

τὰ πρόβατα…τὰ πρόβατα

See how you translated sheep in the verse 8. (See: Metaphor)

ὁ λύκος ἁρπάζει αὐτὰ καὶ σκορπίζει

This clause describes two events. The first event causes the second event. When the wolf attacks and seizes a sheep, the other sheep scatter. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “the wolf seizes a sheep, and the rest of the sheep scatter” (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

John 10:13

μισθωτός

See how you translated a similar phrase in the previous verse. (See: Active or Passive)

οὐ μέλει αὐτῷ περὶ τῶν προβάτων

Jesus compares a hired man who abandons the sheep to the Jewish leaders and teachers who do not care for God’s people. See how you translated sheep in the verse 8. Alternate translation: “he is not concerned about the sheep, just like your leaders are not concerned about God’s people” (See: Metaphor)

John 10:14

ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός

See how you translated this in verse 11. Alternate translation: “I am like a good shepherd” (See: Metaphor)

John 10:15

ὁ Πατὴρ…τὸν Πατέρα

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

τὴν ψυχήν μου τίθημι

See how you translated the similar phrase in verse 11. Alternate translation: “I voluntarily die” (See: Euphemism)

τῶν προβάτων

See how you translated this phrase in the verse 8. (See: Metaphor)

John 10:16

ἄλλα πρόβατα ἔχω, ἃ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ τῆς αὐλῆς ταύτης

Jesus uses other sheep figuratively to refer to his followers who are not Jews. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “I have disciples who are not from the Jews” (See: Metaphor)

τῆς αὐλῆς ταύτης

Jesus uses sheep pen figuratively to refer to the people of Israel. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people” (See: Metaphor)

κἀκεῖνα…ἀγαγεῖν

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. This could mean: (1) Jesus will bring them to himself, as in the UST. (2) Jesus will bring them to God. Alternate translation: “to bring them also to God”(See: Ellipsis)

τῆς φωνῆς μου ἀκούσουσιν

Here, hear refers to listening to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. See how you translated this word in verse 8. Alternate translation: “they will heed my voice” (See: Metaphor)

μία ποίμνη

Jesus uses flock figuratively to refer to all of his followers, including Jews and non-Jews, as if they are one group, like a flock of sheep. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “one group” (See: Metaphor)

εἷς ποιμήν

Jesus uses shepherd figuratively to refer to himself. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for the chapter. See also how you translated shepherd in verse 11. Alternate translation: “one united group” (See: Metaphor)

John 10:17

Jesus finishes speaking to the crowd.

διὰ τοῦτό, με ὁ Πατὴρ ἀγαπᾷ, ὅτι ἐγὼ τίθημι τὴν ψυχήν μου, ἵνα πάλιν λάβω αὐτήν

Here, this refers to all the information in the second clause. If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Because I lay down my life so that I might take it up again, the Father loves me” (See: Information Structure)

Πατὴρ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἐγὼ τίθημι τὴν ψυχήν μου

See how you translated the similar phrase in verse 11. Alternate translation: “I voluntarily die” (See: Euphemism)

ἵνα πάλιν λάβω αὐτήν

Jesus figuratively refers to becoming alive again as if life were an object that he could take up. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “so that I might cause myself to be alive again” (See: Metaphor)

John 10:18

οὐδεὶς ἦρεν αὐτὴν ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ

Here Jesus refers to his life figuratively as if it were an object that someone could take away. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “No one is causing me to die” (See: Metaphor)

ἐγὼ τίθημι αὐτὴν…θεῖναι αὐτήν

See how you translated the similar phrase in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “I voluntarily die … to voluntarily die” (See: Euphemism)

ἐγὼ τίθημι αὐτὴν ἀπ’ ἐμαυτοῦ

The reflexive pronoun myself is used here to emphasize that Jesus voluntarily lays down his own life. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I myself lay it down” (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

πάλιν λαβεῖν αὐτήν

See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “to cause myself to be alive again” (See: Metaphor)

τοῦ Πατρός μου

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 10:19

σχίσμα πάλιν ἐγένετο ἐν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of division, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “The Jews divided themselves against each other again” (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_ta/src/branch/master/translate/figs-abstractnouns/01.md)

τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders, which in this chapter and the previous chapter may have been a group of leaders among the Pharisees. See how you translated this term in 1:19. (See: Synecdoche)

διὰ τοὺς λόγους τούτους

Here, these words refers to what Jesus has just said to the Jews in the previous verses. It wasn’t the words themselves that caused division, but the meaning of what Jesus said. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “because of the things he said” (See: Metonymy)

John 10:20

δαιμόνιον ἔχει

See how you translated a similar phrase in 7:20. Alternate translation: “A demon is inside of him!” or “He must be under the control of a demon!”

τί αὐτοῦ ἀκούετε?

Jesus’ opponents are using the form of a question to emphasize that the people should not listen to Jesus. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should certainly not listen to him!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

John 10:21

ταῦτα τὰ ῥήματα οὐκ ἔστιν δαιμονιζομένου

Here, words refers to what a demon-possessed man would say. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “These things are not what a demon-possessed man would say” (See: Metonymy)

μὴ δαιμόνιον δύναται τυφλῶν ὀφθαλμοὺς ἀνοῖξαι?

The people are using the form of a question to emphasize that they do not believe that a demon could heal a blind person. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Certainly a demon cannot cause a blind man to see!” or “Certainly a demon cannot give sight to blind people!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τυφλῶν ὀφθαλμοὺς ἀνοῖξαι

Here, open the eyes figuratively describes the ability to see by referring to something associated with vision coming into action, specifically, the eyes. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to cause the blind to see” (See: Metonymy)

John 10:22

Some Jews begin to question Jesus during the Festival of Dedication. This verse gives background information about the time when the events of verses 24–39 took place. The next verse gives background information about the place where those events too place. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

τὰ ἐνκαίνια

The Festival of Dedication is an eight-day holiday that Jews celebrate in the winter to remember when they dedicated the Jewish temple to God after it had been defiled by the Syrians. If your readers would not be familiar with this holiday, you could use a general expression to explain it. Alternate translation: “the Jewish temple dedication festival” or “the Jewish festival for remembering the dedication of their temple” (See: Translate Unknowns)

John 10:23

περιεπάτει ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ

Jesus was walking in the courtyard of the temple. See how you translated* temple* in 8:14. Alternate translation: “Jesus was walking in the temple courtyard” (See: Synecdoche)

τῇ στοᾷ τοῦ Σολομῶνος

Here, the possessive form describes the porch that was associated with King Solomon in some way. It may have been the only remaining part of the temple built during the time of Solomon. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the porch associated with Solomon” (See: Possession)

Σολομῶνος

Solomon is the name of a man, the king who oversaw the building of the first Jewish temple. (See: How to Translate Names)

στοᾷ

A porch was a structure with a roof; it had at least one wall missing and was attached to the side of a building. See how you translated this word in 5:2. (See: Translate Unknowns)

John 10:24

οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in 1:19. (See: Synecdoche)

τὴν ψυχὴν ἡμῶν αἴρεις

Here, taking away our life is an idiom that means to keep people in suspense by not telling them something. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “will you keep us from knowing for sure?” (See: Idiom)

John 10:25

τὰ ἔργα

Here, works could refer to: (1) the miracles that Jesus did. Alternate translation: “The miracles” (2) Jesus’ miracles and teaching. Alternate translation: “The miracles and teaching” See how you translated this in 5:36. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Πατρός μου

Here, name could mean: (1) Jesus performed miracles by means of God’s authority. Alternate translation: “through my Father’s authority” (2) Jesus performed miracles as God’s representative. Alternate translation: “as my Father’s representative” (See: Metonymy)

τοῦ Πατρός μου

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ταῦτα μαρτυρεῖ περὶ ἐμοῦ

Jesus speaks figuratively of his works as though they were a person who could testify and offer proof in a court of law. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “these offer proof concerning me” (See: Personification)

John 10:26

οὐκ…ἐκ τῶν προβάτων τῶν ἐμῶν

Jesus uses sheep figuratively to refer to people who believe in him. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not my followers” or “not my disciples” (See: Metaphor)

John 10:27

τὰ πρόβατα τὰ ἐμὰ

See how you translated My sheep in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “My followers” or “My disciples” (See: Metaphor)

τῆς φωνῆς μου ἀκούουσιν

Here, hear means listening to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. See how you translated this word in verse 16. Alternate translation: “heed my voice” (See: Metaphor)

ἀκολουθοῦσίν μοι

See how you translated a similar phrase in 8:12. (See: Idiom)

John 10:28

οὐχ ἁρπάσει τις αὐτὰ ἐκ τῆς χειρός μου

Here, Jesus uses the word hand figuratively to refer to his protective care and snatch to refer to removing someone from that care. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no one will steal any of them away from me” or “they all will remain secure forever in my care” (See: Metonymy)

John 10:29

ὁ Πατήρ μου ὃς δέδωκέν μοι

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

οὐδεὶς δύναται ἁρπάζειν ἐκ τῆς χειρὸς τοῦ Πατρός

Here, Jesus uses the word hand figuratively to refer to God’s protective care and snatch to refer to removing someone from that care. See how you translated hand and snatch in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “no one will steal any of them away from my Father” or “they all will remain secure forever in my Father’s care” (See: Metonymy)

John 10:30

ἕν ἐσμεν

Here, the word translated one means to be one entity. Although this expression implies that Jesus is God, he is not identical to God the Father. Therefore, one cannot be translated as “one person.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “are one entity” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ Πατὴρ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 10:31

οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in 1:19. (See: Synecdoche)

ἵνα λιθάσωσιν αὐτόν

The Jews opposing Jesus are outraged at what Jesus said in the previous verse. Here, John implies that they wanted to kill him with stones because he had made himself equal to God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that they might stone him because he claimed to be equal with God” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 10:32

πολλὰ ἔργα καλὰ…αὐτῶν ἔργον

See how you translated works in verse 25. Alternate translation: “many good miracles … of those miracles” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐκ τοῦ Πατρός

This phrase could refer to: (1) the source of the good works. Alternate translation: “originating from the Father” (2) the one who enabled the good works. Alternate translation: “given to me by the Father”

τοῦ Πατρός

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

διὰ ποῖον αὐτῶν ἔργον, ἐμὲ λιθάζετε

Here Jesus is using irony. Jesus knows the Jewish leaders do not want to stone him because he has done good works. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Your certainly are not stoning me because of those works” (See: Irony)

John 10:33

ἀπεκρίθησαν αὐτῷ οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι

See how you translated this in verse 31. Alternate translation: “The Jewish authorities answered him” (See: Synecdoche)

περὶ βλασφημίας

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of blasphemy, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because you are blaspheming” (See: Abstract Nouns)

βλασφημίας

Here, the Jews use the word blasphemy with its technical sense, which refers to a human being claiming to be God. This is what the Jewish leaders felt Jesus was doing in verse 30. Here, blasphemy does not have a general sense of “insult.” See the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “committing the crime of blasphemy” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ποιεῖς σεαυτὸν Θεόν

This phrase means to claim to be God. It does not mean to try to make oneself into God or become God. Alternate translation: “saying that you are God”

John 10:34

οὐκ ἔστιν γεγραμμένον ἐν τῷ νόμῳ ὑμῶν, ὅτι ἐγὼ εἶπα, θεοί ἐστε?

Here Jesus uses the form of a question to add emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “It is certainly written in your law, ‘I said, “You are gods”’” (See: Rhetorical Question)

οὐκ ἔστιν γεγραμμένον

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Did not a prophet write” (See: Active or Passive)

οὐκ ἔστιν γεγραμμένον ἐν τῷ νόμῳ ὑμῶν

Here Jesus uses written in your law to introduce a quotation from (Psalm 82:6). Psalms is considered to be part of the Old Testament “wisdom literature.” However, the Jews sometimes used law broadly to refer to the entire Old Testament. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state explicitly that Jesus was quoting from Psalms. Alternate translation: “Has it not been written in the Psalms” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

ἐν τῷ νόμῳ ὑμῶν

Jesus is using the name of the first part of the Hebrew Scriptures, the law, to represent the entire Hebrew Scriptures in general. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in your Scriptures” (See: Synecdoche)

ἐγὼ εἶπα, θεοί ἐστε

Jesus quotes Psalm 82:6 where God calls some humans gods. Jesus does this in order to show that God also used the word “god” to refer to people other than himself. In the verse that Jesus quotes, the first person I refers to God. If this might be misunderstood by your readers, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, said, ‘You are gods’” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

ἐγὼ εἶπα, θεοί ἐστε

John 10:35

Verses 35 and 36 are one sentence. In this sentence, Jesus argues by moving from a weaker reason to a stronger reason (an argument from the lesser to the greater). Based on the scripture he quoted in verse 34, Jesus argues that, since God calls humans gods in that verse, it is even more appropriate to call him God because he is the Son of God. You may need to change the order of the clauses in order for this idea to be clearer in your language.

εἰ ἐκείνους εἶπεν θεοὺς

If indicates a conditional sentence that extends until the end of the next verse. Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since he called them gods” (See: Connect — Factual Conditions)

ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐγένετο

Here, Jesus used the term word figuratively to describe the message that God said by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s message came” (See: Metonymy)

ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐγένετο

Jesus speaks of the word of God figuratively as though it were a person who moved toward those who heard it. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “God spoke his word” (See: Personification)

οὐ δύναται λυθῆναι ἡ Γραφή

This phrase could mean: (1) no one can prove that the Scriptures are false or contain errors. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures are not able to be proven false” (2) the authority of Scripture cannot be ignored. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures are not able to be ignored” (See: Metaphor)

John 10:36

ὃν ὁ Πατὴρ ἡγίασεν καὶ ἀπέστειλεν εἰς τὸν κόσμον, ὑμεῖς λέγετε, ὅτι βλασφημεῖς, ὅτι εἶπον, Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰμι?

Here Jesus uses the form of a question to rebuke his opponents for accusing him of blasphemy. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you should not say to the one the Father sanctified and sent into the world, ‘You are blaspheming,’ because I said, ‘I am the Son of God!’” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ὑμεῖς λέγετε, ὅτι βλασφημεῖς, ὅτι εἶπον, Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰμι

If the direct quotations inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the two instances of second direct quotations as indirect quotations. Alternate translation: “do you say … that he is blaspheming because I said that I am the Son of God” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

ὃν ὁ Πατὴρ ἡγίασεν καὶ ἀπέστειλεν εἰς τὸν κόσμον

Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “to me whom the Father sanctified and sent into the world” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

Πατὴρ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

βλασφημεῖς

Jesus is leaving a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply this word from the context. See how you translated “blasphemy” in verse 33 and also see the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “You have committed the crime of blaspheming God” or “You are guilty of blaspheming God” (See: Ellipsis)

Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ

This phrase, the Son of God, is an important title for Jesus. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 10:37

τὰ ἔργα τοῦ Πατρός μου

Here Jesus is using of to describe works that God wants him to do. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. See how you translated a similar phrase in 9:4. Alternate translation: “the works that my Father demands” (See: Possession)

Πατρός

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 10:38

εἰ δὲ ποιῶ

Here, Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “But since I am doing them” (See: Connect — Factual Conditions)

τοῖς ἔργοις πιστεύετε

Here, believe in means to acknowledge that the works Jesus does are done with the authority of the Father and prove that he is God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “believe that the works I do are from God” or “believe that the works I do are done with God’s power”(See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐν ἐμοὶ ὁ Πατὴρ, κἀγὼ ἐν τῷ Πατρί

Here Jesus uses the word in to express the close personal relationship between himself and God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my Father has a close relationship with me, and I have a close relationship with my Father” (See: Idiom)

ἐν ἐμοὶ ὁ Πατὴρ, κἀγὼ ἐν τῷ Πατρί

These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that the truth of what Jesus is saying. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “my Father and I are completely joined together as one” (See: Doublet)

John 10:39

ἐξῆλθεν ἐκ τῆς χειρὸς αὐτῶν

Here, John used the word hand figuratively to refer to the custody or possession of the Jewish leaders. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he escaped from them” (See: Metonymy)

John 10:40

πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου

Here,* beyond the Jordan* refers to the region of Judea that is on the east side of the Jordan River, which is the side opposite from Jerusalem. See how you translated this expression in 1:28. Alternate translation: “on the side of the Jordan River opposite from Jerusalem” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Ἰωάννης

Here, John refers to Jesus’ cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: John (the Baptist)) It does not refer to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. See how you translated this in 1:26. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἦν Ἰωάννης τὸ πρῶτον βαπτίζων

Here, first refers to the beginning of John’s ministry. It does not mean that John was the first person to baptize people in that location. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “John was baptizing during the first days of his ministry” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἔμεινεν ἐκεῖ

Jesus remained on the east side of Jordan for a short period of time. If your language requires a length of time for stay, you can use a general expression. Alternate translation: “Jesus stayed there for several days” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 10:41

σημεῖον

See how you translated this term in 2:11. See also the discussion of signs in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracle”

τούτου

Here, this one refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this man, Jesus” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

John 11

John 11 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

Jesus returns to Judea (11:1–16)
Jesus’ seventh sign: Jesus makes Lazarus become alive again (11:17–46)
The Jewish leaders plan to kill Jesus (11:47–57)

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Ancient Jewish burial customs

According to the burial customs of that time, a dead person’s family would wrap the dead body with many strips of linen cloth and place it on a table inside a tomb. The tomb was either a cave or a room cut out of the side a large rock. According to Jewish tradition, the body was left to decompose in the tomb for one year. Then the family would place the bones in a stone box. If your readers would be unfamiliar with these burial customs, then you may need to provide explanations in your translation or in a note for verses 38–44.

Passover

After Jesus made Lazarus become alive again, the Jewish leaders were determined to kill Jesus, so he started traveling secretly from place to place. The Pharisees knew that he would come to Jerusalem for the Passover festival because God had commanded all Jewish men to celebrate the Passover in Jerusalem. Thus they planned to catch him and kill him during Passover (11:55–57). (See: Passover)

Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

“One man dies for the people”

In the law of Moses, God commanded the priests to kill animals so that God would forgive the people’s sins. In this chapter, the high priest Caiaphas says, “It is better for you that one man dies for the people than that the whole nation perishes” (11:50). He said this because he loved his “place” and “nation” (11:48) more than he loved the God who had made Lazarus become alive again. He wanted Jesus to die so that the Romans would not destroy the temple and Jerusalem. However, God wanted Jesus to die so that he could forgive all of his people’s sins.

“The Jews”

This term is used in three different ways in this chapter. Unlike in other parts of John’s Gospel, it is used here primarily to refer to the Jewish people who were living in Judea, especially Judean friends and relatives of Lazarus. Some of these Judeans believed in Jesus and others opposed him (11:36–37). The term is also used specifically at least once in this chapter to refer to the Jewish leaders who opposed Jesus and were trying to kill him (11:8 and possibly 11:54). Finally, the term is used in 11:55 to refer to the Jewish people in general. The translator may wish to use the terms “Judeans,” “Jewish authorities,” and “Jewish people” to clarify these distinctions.

Hypothetical situation

When Martha and Mary said, “If you had been here, my brother would not have died,” they were speaking of a situation that could have happened but did not happen (11:21, 32). Jesus had not come, and their brother did die.

John 11:1

Verses 1–2 provide background information about Lazarus and his sisters. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

ἦν δέ τις ἀσθενῶν Λάζαρος ἀπὸ Βηθανίας

This verse introduces Lazarus as a new character in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “There was a man named Lazarus, who was from Bethany and was sick” (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

Λάζαρος

Lazarus is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

Βηθανίας

See how you translated Bethany in 1:28. (See: How to Translate Names)

Μαρίας…Μάρθας

Mary and Martha are the names of two women. (See: How to Translate Names)

Μάρθας τῆς ἀδελφῆς αὐτῆς

Because those who wrote scripture usually listed the names of siblings in order from oldest to youngest, the list in verse 5 suggests that Martha was the oldest and Lazarus was the youngest of the three siblings. If your language uses different words for sister depending on birth order, use the word for an older sister here. Alternate translation: “her older sister Martha” (See: Kinship)

John 11:2

ἦν δὲ Μαρία ἡ ἀλείψασα τὸν Κύριον μύρῳ, καὶ ἐκμάξασα τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ ταῖς θριξὶν αὐτῆς

Here, John refers to an event that would happen at a time following the events recorded in this chapter (12:1–8). If this might confuse your readers, you could translate this as a future event. Alternate translation: “Now it was Mary who would later anoint the Lord with myrrh and wipe his feet with her hair” (See: Order of Events)

ὁ ἀδελφὸς Λάζαρος

Because those who wrote scripture usually listed the names of siblings in order from oldest to youngest, the list in verse 5 suggests that Martha was the oldest and Lazarus was the youngest of the three siblings. If your language uses different words for brother depending on birth order, use the word for a younger brother here. Alternate translation: “younger brother Lazarus” (See: Kinship)

John 11:3

ἀπέστειλαν…αἱ ἀδελφαὶ πρὸς αὐτὸν λέγουσαι

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “the sisters sent to him, and they said” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

ἀπέστειλαν…πρὸς αὐτὸν

Here, John is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “sent messengers to him” or “sent a message to him” (See: Ellipsis)

Κύριε, ἴδε, ὃν φιλεῖς ἀσθενεῖ

Here, the sisters are using a present statement to make a request indirectly. They tell Jesus that Lazarus is sick, because they want Jesus to come and heal him. If this use of a statement is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: “Sir, behold, he whom you love is sick and needs your help” (See: Statements — Other Uses)

ἴδε

Here, behold means to take notice of something or pay attention to something. It is used here to emphasize the urgency of the words that follow. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “take notice” (See: Metaphor)

John 11:4

οὐκ ἔστιν πρὸς θάνατον

Here, not to indicates that what follows is not the result of the sickness. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “This sickness will not result in death” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἀλλ’ ὑπὲρ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ

Jesus is stating the purpose for Lazarus’s sickness. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “but for the purpose of glorifying God” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

ὑπὲρ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in order to glorify God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἵνα δοξασθῇ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ αὐτῆς

Jesus is stating the second purpose for Lazarus’s sickness. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a second purpose clause. Alternate translation: “and for the purpose of glorifying the Son of God” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ

Jesus is referring to himself in third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person form, as in the UST. (See: First, Second or Third Person)

Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ

Son of God is an important title for Jesus. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 11:5

In this verse John briefly stops telling about the events in the story in order to give background information about Jesus’ relationship with Lazarus and his sisters. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

τὴν ἀδελφὴν

Because those who wrote scripture usually listed the names of siblings in order from oldest to youngest, the list in verse 5 suggests that Martha was the oldest and Lazarus was the youngest of the three siblings. If your language uses different words for sister depending on birth order, use the word for a younger sister here. Alternate translation: “younger sister” (See: Kinship)

John 11:6

οὖν

Therefore connects this verse to the previous verse in order to indicate that Jesus delayed going to Lazarus because he loved him and his sisters. Jesus’ delay is not in contrast to his love for them. Although Lazarus’s family would suffer for a short time, they would experience a great blessing when Jesus brought Lazarus back to life. Alternate translation: “Because Jesus loved them” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

John 11:7

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

John 11:8

οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in 1:19 and the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. (See: Synecdoche)

πάλιν ὑπάγεις ἐκεῖ?

Here the disciples use the form of a question to emphasize that they do not want Jesus to go to Jerusalem. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you surely should not go back there again!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

John 11:9

οὐχὶ δώδεκα ὧραί εἰσιν τῆς ἡμέρας?

Jesus is using the form of a question for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There are surely 12 hours in the day” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἐάν τις περιπατῇ ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, οὐ προσκόπτει, ὅτι τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμου τούτου βλέπει

Here Jesus speaks figuratively about someone walking in the daytime in order to comfort his disciples who were worried about going to Judea. In this metaphor Jesus uses the light of this world figuratively to refer to himself, who has previously called himself “the Light of the World” in 8:12 and 9:5.This whole metaphor could mean: (1) if Jesus and his disciples did God’s work during the limited time God had given him to work with them (the daytime), they would not fail (stumble) because Jesus was with them. This interpretation has a similar meaning to Jesus’ statement in 9:4. Alternate translation: “If you do God’s work during the time I am here, you will succeed, because you are with me, the light of this world.” (2) someone who acts according to God’s will (walks in the daytime) does not fail (stumble) because Jesus guides that person. Alternate translation: “If someone acts according to God’s will, he will succeed, because I, the light of this world, will guide him” (See: Metaphor)

John 11:10

ἐὰν δέ τις περιπατῇ ἐν τῇ νυκτί, προσκόπτει, ὅτι τὸ φῶς οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν αὐτῷ

In this verse Jesus expands the metaphor from the previous verse about a person walking outside. In this metaphor Jesus uses the light figuratively to refer to himself, who has previously called himself “the Light of the World” in 8:12 and 9:5. This whole metaphor could mean: (1) if his disciples tried to do God’s work after the limited time God had given him to be with them (the night which comes after “the daytime”), they would fail (stumble) because Jesus would not be with them. This interpretation has a similar meaning to Jesus’ statement in 9:4. Alternate translation: “If you try to do this work after I have left, you will fail because I, the light, am not with you.” (2) someone who does not act according to God’s will (walks at night) is an unbeliever who fails completely (stumble) because that person does not know Jesus. Alternate translation: “If someone does not act according to God’s will, he will fail because he does not know me, the light” (See: Biblical Imagery — Extended Metaphors)

John 11:11

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

Λάζαρος ὁ φίλος ἡμῶν κεκοίμηται

Jesus uses fallen asleep to refer to being dead. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. Since Jesus explains the meaning in verse 14, you do not need to explain it here. However, If you have an idiom for this idea in your language, you may use it here. (See: Euphemism)

ἀλλὰ πορεύομαι ἵνα ἐξυπνίσω αὐτόν

Here, wake him out of sleep refers to Jesus’ plan to cause Lazarus to become alive again. If you have an idiom for this idea in your language, you may use it here. Since the disciples do not understand what Jesus is saying here, do not translate this in a non-figurative way. (See: Idiom)

John 11:12

εἰ κεκοίμηται

See how you translated fallen asleep in the previous verse. (See: Euphemism)

John 11:13

In this verse John briefly stops telling the events in the story in order to give background information about Jesus’ conversation with his disciples. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

ἐκεῖνοι

Here, those ones refers to Jesus’ disciples. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

τῆς κοιμήσεως τοῦ ὕπνου

John is using of to describe sleep that is slumber. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “sleep that is actually sleep” or “natural sleep” (See: Possession)

John 11:14

τότε…εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Ἰησοῦς παρρησίᾳ

Here, plainly means to say something clearly without using and metaphors or others figures of speech. Because the disciples did not understand the metaphor Jesus told them in verse 11, he told them the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Jesus then said to them in words that they could understand”

John 11:15

δι’ ὑμᾶς

Alternate translation: “for your benefit” or “for your good”

ἵνα πιστεύσητε

Here, Jesus is leaving out some words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply this word from the context. You may also need to start a new sentence. Alternate translation: “for I allowed this to happen so that you may believe in me” or “for I let Lazarus die so that you may believe that I am the Messiah” (See: Ellipsis)

John 11:16

Θωμᾶς

Thomas is the name of a man, one of Jesus’ disciples. (See: How to Translate Names)

ὁ λεγόμενος Δίδυμος

Δίδυμος

Didymus is the name of a man. It is a Greek word that means “twin” and is Thomas’ other name. (See: How to Translate Names)

John 11:17

ὁ Ἰησοῦς εὗρεν αὐτὸν, τέσσαρας ἤδη ἡμέρας ἔχοντα ἐν τῷ μνημείῳ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jesus found him; people had put his body in the tomb four days earlier” (See: Active or Passive)

John 11:18

ἦν δὲ ἡ Βηθανία ἐγγὺς τῶν Ἱεροσολύμων, ὡς ἀπὸ σταδίων δεκαπέντε

This verse gives background information about the place where this event took place. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “This event took place in Bethany, which was near Jerusalem and was about 15 stadia away” (See: Background Information)

ἀπὸ σταδίων δεκαπέντε

John 11:19

This verse gives background information about the people who were present when this event took place. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

τῶν Ἰουδαίων

Here, the Jews refers to people living in Judea, particularly the Jewish friends of Lazarus’ family. It does not refer to the Jewish leaders or those Jews who opposed Jesus. See the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly, as in the UST. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ

See how you translated brother in verse 2. (See: Kinship)

John 11:20

ἤκουσεν ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ἔρχεται

If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this statement as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “she heard that Jesus was coming” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

John 11:21

εἰ ἦς ὧδε, οὐκ ἂν ἀπέθανεν ὁ ἀδελφός μου

Martha is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but she knows that the condition is not true. Jesus had not been there and her brother had died. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if you had been here, but you were not, my brother would not have died, but he did” (See: Connect — Contrary to Fact Conditions)

ὁ ἀδελφός

See how you translated brother in verse 2. (See: Kinship)

John 11:23

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ἀναστήσεται ὁ ἀδελφός σου

Here, rise again is an idiom that refers to a died person becoming alive again. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Your brother will become alive again” (See: Idiom)

ὁ ἀδελφός

See how you translated brother in verse 2. (See: Kinship)

John 11:24

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ἀναστήσεται

See how you translated rise again in the previous verse. (See: Idiom)

ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of resurrection, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “when God resurrects people” or “when God brings people back from the dead” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ

Here, the last day refers to “the day of the Lord,” which is the time when God judges everyone, Jesus returns to earth, and the bodies of those who are dead are raised from their graves. (See: day of the Lord, day of Yahweh). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the day when God judges everyone” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 11:25

ἡ ἀνάστασις

Here, Jesus calls himself the resurrection in order to say that he is the one who causes dead people to come back to life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one who resurrects dead people” or “the one who brings dead people back to life” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἡ ζωή

Here, Jesus calls himself the life in order to say that he is the one who gives people eternal life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one who makes people live forever” or “the one who causes people to live forever” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

κἂν ἀποθάνῃ

Here, dies refers to physical death. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “even if his body dies” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ζήσεται

Here, live refers to having eternal life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “will have eternal life” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 11:26

πᾶς ὁ ζῶν

Here, living refers to having eternal life, as “live” does in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “everyone who has eternal life” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὐ μὴ ἀποθάνῃ εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα

Here, die refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If your readers would misunderstand this use of die, you could state this explicitly. See how you translated a similar phrase in 6:50. Alternate translation: “may certainly not die spiritually into eternity” or “may certainly not experience spiritual death into eternity” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὐ μὴ ἀποθάνῃ εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα

Jesus is using a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “may certainly live into eternity” (See: Litotes)

John 11:27

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ

Son of God is an important title for Jesus. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ὁ εἰς τὸν κόσμον ἐρχόμενος

This phrase refers to a prophet the Jews were waiting for, based on God’s promise to send into the world a prophet like Moses, which is recorded in Deuteronomy 18:15. If your readers will not be familiar with this Old Testament reference, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “whom God said he would send into the world” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 11:28

τὴν ἀδελφὴν

See how you translated sister in verse 5. (See: Kinship)

διδάσκαλος

Here, Teacher refers to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Teacher, Jesus,” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 11:30

οὔπω δὲ ἐληλύθει ὁ Ἰησοῦς εἰς τὴν κώμην

Here John provides a brief break in the story to give background information regarding the location of Jesus. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “At that time Jesus had not yet come into the village” (See: Background Information)

John 11:31

οἱ…Ἰουδαῖοι

See how you translated the Jews in verse 19.

οἱ ὄντες μετ’ αὐτῆς ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ καὶ παραμυθούμενοι αὐτήν

This phrase is making a distinction between the Jews who were comforting Mary in her house and those who were not doing so. It is not giving us further information about the Jews. If this might confuse your readers, you could make the relationship between these phrases more clear. Alternate translation: “the Jews, that is, those Jews who were with her in the house and comforting her” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

John 11:32

ἔπεσεν αὐτοῦ πρὸς τοὺς πόδας

Here, fell down means that Mary voluntarily threw herself down on the ground in front of Jesus to show the respect that she had for him. The phrase does not mean that Mary involuntarily fell down. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “she prostrated herself at his feet” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἔπεσεν αὐτοῦ πρὸς τοὺς πόδας, λέγουσα αὐτῷ

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “she fell down at his feet and said to him” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

Κύριε, εἰ ἦς ὧδε, οὐκ ἄν μου ἀπέθανεν ὁ ἀδελφός

See how you translated this sentence in 11:21.

John 11:33

τοὺς…Ἰουδαίους

See how you translated the Jews in verse 19.

ἐνεβριμήσατο τῷ πνεύματι καὶ ἐτάραξεν ἑαυτόν

These two phrases mean basically the same thing. John combines these phrases to express the intense emotional distress that Jesus was feeling. Alternate translation: “he was very upset” (See: Doublet)

ἐνεβριμήσατο

The word translated deeply disturbed could mean: (1) Jesus was experiencing very intense negative emotions, in which case the meaning would be similar to troubled. Alternate translation: “he was deeply moved” (2) Jesus was angry or indignant, which is what the word means in other books in the Bible. Alternate translation: “he was outraged” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐνεβριμήσατο τῷ πνεύματι

Here, spirit refers to Jesus’ spirit. It does not refer to the Holy Spirit. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he was deeply disturbed within himself” or “he was deeply disturbed inside” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 11:34

ποῦ τεθείκατε αὐτόν

Jesus is referring to putting Lazarus’ dead body in a tomb as laying him down. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant and accurately describes the Jewish burial practice of laying a dead body on a table inside the tomb. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “Where have you entombed him?” (See: Euphemism)

John 11:35

ἐδάκρυσεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς

The word translated wept is different from the word used to describe the weeping of Mary and the Jews with her in verses 31–33. The word here just means to shed tears. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus cried” or “Jesus shed tears” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 11:36

οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι

See how you translated the Jews in verse 19.

John 11:37

οὐκ ἐδύνατο οὗτος, ὁ ἀνοίξας τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ τυφλοῦ, ποιῆσαι ἵνα καὶ οὗτος μὴ ἀποθάνῃ?

Some of the Jews use the form of a question to express their surprise that Jesus did not heal Lazarus. This could mean: (1) they believed that Jesus loved Lazarus, but doubted his ability to heal him. “He opened the eyes of the blind man, but he was not able to keep this man from dying.” (2) they thought that Jesus did not really love Lazarus because he healed the blind man but not him. Alternate translation: “He could open the eyes of the blind man. So if he really loved this man, he surely would have healed him!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ὁ ἀνοίξας τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ τυφλοῦ

See how you translated a similar phrase in 9:14. Alternate translation: “who caused the blind man to see” (See: Metonymy)

John 11:38

ἐμβριμώμενος ἐν ἑαυτῷ

See how you translated the similar phrase in verse 33.

ἦν δὲ σπήλαιον, καὶ λίθος ἐπέκειτο ἐπ’ αὐτῷ

John provides a brief break in the story to describe the tomb where the people had entombed Lazarus. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “The place Lazarus was entombed was a cave that had a stone laying against it.” (See: Background Information)

John 11:39

λέγει…λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ἡ ἀδελφὴ

Martha was Lazarus’ oldest sister. If your language uses different words for sister depending on birth order, use the word for a older or oldest sister here. Alternate translation: “the oldest sister” (See: Kinship)

τεταρταῖος γάρ ἐστιν

This means that it has been four days since Lazarus died. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “for he has been dead for four days” or “for it has been four days since he died” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 11:40

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

οὐκ εἶπόν σοι, ὅτι ἐὰν πιστεύσῃς, ὄψῃ τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ?

Jesus is using the form of a question to emphasize that God is about to do something wonderful. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I certainly said to you that, if you believe, you would see the glory of God!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἐὰν πιστεύσῃς

Here, Jesus is leaving out some words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “if you believe in me” or “if you believe that I am the Messiah” (See: Ellipsis)

τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ

This could mean: (1) God receives the glory. Alternate translation: “the glorification of God” (2) glory that comes from God. Alternate translation: “the glory from God”(See: Possession)

τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “God glorified” or “how glorious God is” (See: Abstract Nouns)

John 11:41

Ἰησοῦς ἦρεν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς ἄνω

Here, “lifted up his eyes” is an idiom that means to look upward. See how you translated a similar phrase in 4:35. (See: Idiom)

Πάτερ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 11:42

τὸν ὄχλον τὸν περιεστῶτα

See how you translated crowd in 5:13. (See: Collective Nouns)

John 11:44

δεδεμένος τοὺς πόδας καὶ τὰς χεῖρας κειρίαις, καὶ ἡ ὄψις αὐτοῦ σουδαρίῳ περιεδέδετο

Wrapping a dead body in strips of cloth was the burial custom in this culture. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. If your readers would not be familiar with such a custom, you could describe it more specifically, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “his feet and hands having been bound with burial cloths, and his face having been wrapped with a burial cloth” or “his feet, hands, and face having been wrapped in clothes for burial” (See: Translate Unknowns)

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

John 11:45

[Verses 45–54] explain what happened after Jesus raised Lazarus from the dead.

τῶν Ἰουδαίων

See how you translated this phrase in verse 19.

John 11:47

Συνέδριον

The Sanhedrin is the name of the highest ruling council of the Jews. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, their ruling council” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Συνέδριον

Sanhedrin is the name of a governing body. (See: How to Translate Names)

τί ποιοῦμεν

It is implied here that the council members are talking about Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “What are we going to do about Jesus” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρωπος

Here, the Jewish leaders say this man as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus and to avoid saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “this so-and-so” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

σημεῖα

See how you translated signs in 2:11. See also the discussion of signs in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracles”

John 11:48

πάντες πιστεύσουσιν εἰς αὐτὸν

The Jewish leaders were afraid that the people would try to make Jesus their king and rebel against the Roman government. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “everyone will believe in him, make him king, and revolt against the Roman government” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐλεύσονται οἱ Ῥωμαῖοι

The Jewish leaders use the Romans figuratively to refer to the Roman army. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Roman soldiers will come” (See: Synecdoche)

καὶ ἀροῦσιν ἡμῶν καὶ τὸν τόπον

Here, place could mean: (1) the Jewish temple, as in the UST. (2) the city of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “and will take away both our city, Jerusalem” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸ ἔθνος

Here, nation refers to all of the Jewish people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jewish nation” or “the people of our nation” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 11:49

εἷς…τις ἐξ αὐτῶν, Καϊάφας

This phrase introduces Caiaphas as a new character in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “there was a man among them named Caiaphas” (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

ὑμεῖς οὐκ οἴδατε οὐδέν

Here, Caiaphas uses an exaggeration in order to insult his hearers. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows contempt. Alternate translation: “You do not understand what is happening” or “You speak as though you know nothing” (See: Hyperbole)

John 11:50

καὶ μὴ ὅλον τὸ ἔθνος ἀπόληται

Caiaphas implies that the Roman army would kill all of the people of the Jewish nation if Jesus is allowed to live and cause a rebellion. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the Romans would not kill all the people of our nation” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

καὶ μὴ ὅλον τὸ ἔθνος ἀπόληται

Here, nation refers to all of the Jewish people. See how you translated this word in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “and all the people of our nation would not perish” (See: Synecdoche)

John 11:51

In verses 51–52 John interrupts the story to explain that Caiaphas was prophesying even though he did not realize it at the time. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

ἀφ’ ἑαυτοῦ

Here, from himself could mean: (1) Caiaphas was speaking something he had thought of himself. Alternate translation: “on his own initiative” (2) Caiaphas was speaking from his own authority, which is how the phrase is used in 5:19. Alternate translation: “on his own authority” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀλλὰ ἀρχιερεὺς ὢν τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ ἐκείνου

This clause indicates the reason why Caiaphas prophesied a true prophecy from God. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because he was high priest that year” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἀποθνῄσκειν ὑπὲρ τοῦ ἔθνους

See how you translated nation in the previous verse. (See: Synecdoche)

John 11:52

τοῦ ἔθνους

See how you translated nation in the previous verse. (See: Synecdoche)

τὰ τέκνα τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here John uses the word children figuratively to express the relationship between God and those who trust Jesus for salvation. That relationship is like the relationship between children and their father. See the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to chapter 1. Since this is an important metaphor in the Bible, you should keep it in your translation. However, you can use a simile if it might confuse your readers. Alternate translation: “those who are like God’s children” (See: Metaphor)

ἵνα καὶ τὰ τέκνα τοῦ Θεοῦ, τὰ διεσκορπισμένα συναγάγῃ εἰς ἕν

If your language does not use the passive voice, you could express the ideas of these two passive phrases in active forms or in another way that is natural in your language. You may need to change the sentence structure in order to do this. Alternate translation: “so that also Jesus would gather together into one the children of God whom God had scattered” (See: Active or Passive)

συναγάγῃ εἰς ἕν

Here, John is leaving out a word that some languages would need in order for the sentence to be complete. The word people is implied by the context. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “would be gathered into one people” (See: Ellipsis)

John 11:53

οὖν

John is telling his readers what the Jewish leaders did as a result of what Caiaphas said in verses 49–50. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Consequently” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἐβουλεύσαντο

The word translated plotted could mean: (1) the Jewish leaders made plans together for how to kill Jesus. Alternate translation: “they schemed” (2) the Jewish leaders were determined to kill Jesus. Alternate translation: “they resolved”

John 11:54

παρρησίᾳ περιεπάτει ἐν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις

Here, the Jews does not refer to the Jewish people in general. It could refer to: (1) the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “among the Jewish authorities” (2) the people living in Judea. Alternate translation: “among the Judeans” (See: Synecdoche)

παρρησίᾳ περιεπάτει ἐν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις

Here John uses walked openly figuratively to mean “walked around where everyone could see him.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “walked around where all the Jews could see him” (See: Metaphor)

τὴν χώραν

Here, country could refer to: (1) an area of land. Alternate translation: “the area” or “the district” (2) the rural area outside cities where fewer people live. Alternate translation: “the countryside” or “the rural area”

κἀκεῖ ἔμεινεν μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν

Jesus and his disciples stayed in Ephraim for a short period of time. If your language requires a length of time for stayed, you can use a general expression. Alternate translation: “There he stayed with the disciples for a time” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 11:55

ἀνέβησαν…εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα

The phrase went up is used here because Jerusalem is at a higher elevation than the surrounding areas. See how you translated went up in 7:10.

τὸ Πάσχα…πρὸ τοῦ Πάσχα

Here, Passover is the name of a festival. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Passover festival … before the Passover festival” (See: How to Translate Names)

τῆς χώρας

John 11:56

The event in verse 57 occurs before the event in this verse. If this order might confuse your readers, you can combine these verses and put the text of verse 57 before the text of this verse. (See: Order of Events)

ἐζήτουν…τὸν Ἰησοῦν

Here, they refers to the Jewish people who had traveled to Jerusalem before the Passover celebration, as described in the previous verse. If this use of they might be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people who came to Jerusalem before the Passover celebration were looking for Jesus” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ

The people were standing in the courtyard of the temple. See how you translated temple in verse 14. (See: Synecdoche)

τί δοκεῖ ὑμῖν

This is an idiom used to ask for someone’s opinion. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “What is your opinion” (See: Idiom)

ὅτι οὐ μὴ ἔλθῃ εἰς τὴν ἑορτήν?

The people are using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that they do not think Jesus will come to the Passover festival. The speakers here were wondering if Jesus would come to the festival since the Jewish leaders wanted to kill him. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “He will certainly not come to the festival!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ὅτι οὐ μὴ ἔλθῃ εἰς τὴν ἑορτήν?

The people are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Does it seem to you that he will come to the festival?” (See: Ellipsis)

John 11:57

δὲ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς

This event occurs before that of the previous verse. If this order might confuse your readers, you can combine these verses and put the text of this verse before the text of verse 56. Another option would be to clearly state that this verse refers to an earlier event. Alternate translation: “Earlier, the chief priests” (See: Order of Events)

John 12

John 12 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

Mary pours perfume on Jesus (12:1–11)
Jesus enters Jerusalem (12:12–19)
Some Greeks come to Jesus (12:20–26)
Jesus predicts his death (12:27–36)
John explains the Jews’ rejection of Jesus (12:37–43)
Jesus says that he is God (12:44–50)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry sections in 12:38 and 40, which are quotations from the Old Testament.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Mary poured perfume on Jesus’ feet

The Jews would put oil on a person’s head to make that person feel welcome and comfortable. They would also put oil on a person’s body after the person had died but before they buried the body. However, they would never think to put oil on a person’s feet, because they thought that feet were dirty.

The donkey and the colt

Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal, which was a common practice for kings. The kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on donkeys. So by riding on a donkey Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel.

Glory

Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. In 12:16 John says that the glory of Jesus is his resurrection and possibly his return to heaven as well.

Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

Light and darkness

In 12:35–36, 46, Jesus uses an extended metaphor in which light represents what is true and good, and darkness represents what is false and evil. He applies that light metaphor to himself in order to show that he is the embodiment of God’s truth and goodness. (See: righteous, righteousness, unrighteous, unrighteousness, upright, uprightness)

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. A paradox occurs in 12:25: “He who loves his life will lose it; but he who hates his life in this world will keep it for eternal life.” But in 12:26 Jesus explains what it means to keep one’s life for eternal life.

“Son of Man”

John 12:1

οὖν…πρὸ ἓξ ἡμερῶν τοῦ Πάσχα

John uses this phrase to mark the beginning of a new event. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later, six days before the Passover” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

Βηθανίαν

See how you translated this village name, Bethany, in 1:28. (See: How to Translate Names)

Λάζαρος

See how you translated this man’s name, Lazarus, in 11:1. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν

Here, raised is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “had caused to live again” (See: Idiom)

John 12:2

Μάρθα

See how you translated this woman’s name, Martha, in 11:1. (See: How to Translate Names)

τῶν ἀνακειμένων

At a relaxed meal such as this one, it was the custom in this culture for host and guests to eat while lying down comfortably around a table that was close to the ground. You could translate this by using the expression in your language for the customary posture at a meal. Alternate translation: “those sitting down at the table to eat” (See: Translate Unknowns)

John 12:3

Μαρία

See how you translated Mary in 11:1. (See: How to Translate Names)

λίτραν μύρου

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A litra is about one third of a kilogram or three quarters of a pound. If your language does not measure liquids by weight, you may refer to its volume equivalent, which would be about half a liter. You might also refer to the container that could hold that amount. Alternate translation: “about half a liter of perfume” or “a one-half liter bottle of perfume” (See: Biblical Weight)

μύρου

Here, perfumed oil refers to a liquid made from the oils of pleasant-smelling plants and flowers. This oil was put on a person’s skin or hair in order for that person to smell pleasant. If your readers would not be familiar with this oil, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “of scented liquid” (See: Translate Unknowns)

μύρου νάρδου πιστικῆς πολυτίμου

John is using of to describe perfumed oil that is made from very precious pure nard. If this use of the possessive of would be confusing in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of perfumed oil made from very precious pure nard” (See: Possession)

νάρδου πιστικῆς πολυτίμου

The perfumed oil was made from the oil of a nard plant, which is sometimes called “spikenard.” The oil is extracted from the roots of this plant. If your readers would not be familiar with nard plants, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “of very precious scented plants” (See: Translate Unknowns)

ἡ δὲ οἰκία ἐπληρώθη ἐκ τῆς ὀσμῆς τοῦ μύρου

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Now the fragrance of the perfumed oil filled the house” (See: Active or Passive)

John 12:4

Ἰούδας ὁ Ἰσκαριώτης

Judas is the name of a man, and Iscariot is a distinguishing term that most likely means he came from the village of Kerioth. (See: How to Translate Names)

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

John 12:5

διὰ τί τοῦτο τὸ μύρον οὐκ ἐπράθη τριακοσίων δηναρίων, καὶ ἐδόθη πτωχοῖς?

Judas is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that he thought the perfumed oil should not be poured on Jesus. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation, and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This perfume could have been sold for 300 denarii and given to the poor!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

δηναρίων

The word denarii is the plural form of “denarius.” It was a denomination of money in the Roman Empire that was equivalent to one days’ wages. Alternate translation: “for 300 days’ wages” (See: Biblical Money)

πτωχοῖς

Judas is using the adjective poor as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “to people who are poor” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

John 12:6

In this verse John interrupts the story to explain why Judas made the statement in the previous verse. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

εἶπεν…τοῦτο, οὐχ ὅτι περὶ τῶν πτωχῶν ἔμελεν αὐτῷ, ἀλλ’ ὅτι κλέπτης ἦν

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “he said this because he was a thief, not because it was a concern to him about the poor” (See: Information Structure)

τῶν πτωχῶν

See how you translated the poor in the previous verse. (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ἀλλ’ ὅτι κλέπτης ἦν

John is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but he said this because he was a thief” (See: Ellipsis)

τὰ βαλλόμενα

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what people gave him to put in it” (See: Active or Passive)

John 12:7

ἄφες αὐτήν, ἵνα εἰς τὴν ἡμέραν τοῦ ἐνταφιασμοῦ μου, τηρήσῃ αὐτό

This could mean: (1) Jesus is stating the purpose for which Mary did not sell the perfume. In this case he would be leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. This translation would require supplying those words from Judas’ objection in verse 5 and making a new sentence. Alternate translation: “Leave her alone. She did not sell this perfumed oil so that she might keep it for the day of my burial” (2) Jesus is giving the purpose for his command in the previous clause. In this case he would be implying that there was some leftover perfumed oil which Mary could later put on his dead body. Alternate translation: “Leave her alone so that she might keep it for the day of my burial” (See: Ellipsis)

ἄφες αὐτήν, ἵνα εἰς τὴν ἡμέραν τοῦ ἐνταφιασμοῦ μου, τηρήσῃ αὐτό

If Jesus is stating the reason why Mary had the perfume, then Jesus is implying that Mary’s actions can be understood as anticipating his death and burial. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. You may need to add a new sentence. Alternate translation: “Leave her alone. She did not sell this perfumed oil so that she might keep it to prepare my body for burial, as she had just done” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 12:8

τοὺς πτωχοὺς γὰρ πάντοτε ἔχετε μεθ’ ἑαυτῶν, ἐμὲ δὲ οὐ πάντοτε ἔχετε

Jesus’ statement in this verse implies that Mary acted properly by pouring the expensive perfume on him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “She acted appropriately, because you always have the poor with you, but you do not always have me” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τοὺς πτωχοὺς…πάντοτε ἔχετε μεθ’ ἑαυτῶν

Jesus implies that there will always be opportunities to help the poor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you always have the poor with you that you can help” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τοὺς πτωχοὺς

See how you translated the poor in the verse 6. (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ἔχετε μεθ’ ἑαυτῶν…οὐ…ἔχετε

In this verse every occurrence of you is plural and refers to the disciples and those who were with Jesus at the dinner. (See: Forms of You)

ἐμὲ δὲ οὐ πάντοτε ἔχετε

Jesus implies that he will not always be with them, because he will die. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “but I will not always be here with you” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 12:9

οὖν

Then is used here to mark a break in the main storyline. This break continues until the end of verse 11. In this verse John gives background information about a new group of people that has come to Bethany. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

ὁ ὄχλος πολὺς

See how you translated crowd in 5:13. (See: Collective Nouns)

τῶν Ἰουδαίων

Here, the Jews refers to people from Judea. See the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “the Judeans” (See: Synecdoche)

ἐστιν

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν

See how you translated this phrase in verse 1. (See: Idiom)

John 12:10

ἐβουλεύσαντο

See how you translated plotted in 11:53.

καὶ τὸν Λάζαρον ἀποκτείνωσιν

Here, also implies that the chief priests want to kill Lazarus in addition to Jesus, whom they have already plotted to kill in 11:53. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “they might put Lazarus to death in addition to Jesus” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 12:11

δι’ αὐτὸν

This phrase implies that the fact that Lazarus was alive after he had been dead caused many Jews to believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because Lazarus was alive after having died” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τῶν Ἰουδαίων

See how you translated this phrase in verse 9.

ὑπῆγον

Here, John uses went away figuratively to refer to the fact that many of the Jews stopped believing the teachings of the Jewish religious authorities and starting trusting Jesus instead. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “stopped listening to them” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 12:12

Jesus enters Jerusalem and the people honor him as a king of Israel.

τῇ ἐπαύριον

John uses this phrase to mark the beginning of a new event. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “On the day after that happened,” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

ὁ ὄχλος πολὺς

See how you translated crowd in 5:13. (See: Collective Nouns)

τὴν ἑορτήν

Here, festival refers to the Jewish Passover festival. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Passover festival” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 12:13

τὰ βαΐα τῶν φοινίκων

In that culture a palm tree branch was a symbol that represented the nation of Israel. Here, the people were waving these branches to express their belief that Jesus was the Messiah who would free Israel from Roman rule. If your readers would misunderstand this use of the branches of the palm trees, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the branches of the palm trees, which represented their hope to be freed from Roman rule” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐκραύγαζον

This phrase introduces a quotation from the Old Testament book of Psalms (Psalm 118:25–26) which occurs next in the verse. The Jews recite Psalm 118 at the Passover festival to express their hope that the Messiah would come. (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

ὡσαννά! εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου, καὶ ὁ Βασιλεὺς τοῦ Ἰσραήλ

This sentence is a quotation from Psalm 118:25–26. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

ὡσαννά

Hosanna is the Greek pronunciation of an expression in the Hebrew language that means “Please save!” It is a quotation from part of Psalm 118:25. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Save us now!” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου

Here, name refers figuratively to a person’s power and authority. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with the Lord’s authority” or “as God’s representative” (See: Metonymy)

John 12:14

In verses 14–16 John interrupts the story to give background information about how Jesus fulfilled an Old Testament prophecy about the Messiah riding on a donkey. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

εὑρὼν…ὁ Ἰησοῦς ὀνάριον, ἐκάθισεν ἐπ’ αὐτό

John implies that Jesus will ride the donkey into Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, having found a young donkey, sat on it, riding it into the city” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

καθώς ἐστιν γεγραμμένον

This phrase introduces a combination of parts of various quotations from the Old Testament which occur in the next verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that John is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “just as the prophets wrote in the Old Testament” or “as it had been written in the scriptures” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

καθώς ἐστιν γεγραμμένον

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as prophets wrote in the Scripture” (See: Active or Passive)

John 12:15

This verse is a combination of parts of various quotations from the Old Testament. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

θυγάτηρ Σιών

Here, daughter of Zion is used figuratively to refer to the people who lived in Jerusalem. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you people of Jerusalem” (See: Metonymy)

πῶλον ὄνου

A colt is a young male donkey.

John 12:16

ταῦτα…ταῦτα…ταῦτα

In this verse, these things refers to the words of the Old Testament prophecies that were quoted in the previous verse, which were fulfilled in the events described in verses 13–14. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “His disciples did not understand the meaning of these words from the scriptures” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὅτε ἐδοξάσθη Ἰησοῦς

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “when God glorified Jesus” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐδοξάσθη

Here, glorified could refer to: (1) when Jesus became alive again after he was killed. Alternate translation: “when Jesus came back to life” (2) when Jesus returned to heaven. Alternate translation: “when Jesus went back to heaven” (3) both Jesus’ resurrection and return to heaven. Alternate translation: “when Jesus came back to life and went back to heaven” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ταῦτα ἦν ἐπ’ αὐτῷ γεγραμμένα

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the prophets have written these things about him” (See: Active or Passive)

John 12:17

ὁ ὄχλος

See how you translated crowd in 5:13. (See: Collective Nouns)

ἐμαρτύρει…ὁ ὄχλος ὁ ὢν μετ’ αὐτοῦ

Here, the crowd refers to the group of Jews who had seen Jesus raise Lazarus from the dead at Bethany in Chapter 11. This is a different crowd than the crowd mentioned in the next verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “one crowd testified that they had been with him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν

See how you translated this phrase in verse 1.

John 12:18

ὁ ὄχλος

Here, the crowd refers to a group of people who were coming out of Jerusalem to see Jesus as he came. This is a different crowd than the crowd mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a second crowd” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τοῦτο…τὸ σημεῖον

This phrase refers to Jesus raising Lazarus from the dead, an event that was mentioned in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “this sign, bringing a dead man back to life” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸ σημεῖον

See how you translated sign in 2:11. See also the discussion of signs in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracle”

John 12:19

θεωρεῖτε ὅτι οὐκ ὠφελεῖτε οὐδέν

The Pharisees imply here that it might be impossible to stop Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “It seems like we can do nothing to stop him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἴδε, ὁ κόσμος ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ ἀπῆλθεν

The Pharisees use the world as an exaggeration to express their shock that so many people have come out to follow Jesus. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows shock. Alternate translation: “Behold, it seems like everyone has gone after him” (See: Hyperbole)

ὁ κόσμος

Here, world refers to the people who lived in it. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “every person in the world” (See: Metonymy)

ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ ἀπῆλθεν

Here, gone after means to follow Jesus and become his disciple. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “has become his disciple” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 12:20

δὲ Ἕλληνές τινες

This phrase marks the introduction of some Greeks as new characters in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

Ἕλληνές

Here, the term Greeks refers to non-Jewish people who lived in the Roman Empire. It does not refer only to people from the country of Greece or to people who speak the Greek language. (See: Greek, Grecian, Hellenist) If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Gentiles” or “non-Jews” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τῶν ἀναβαινόντων

The phrase going up is used specifically for the act of going to Jerusalem, which is a city at a higher elevation than the area around it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those going up to Jerusalem” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἵνα προσκυνήσωσιν ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ

John is leaving out a word that some languages would need in order a clause to be complete. If you language requires an object for the verb worship, you can supply it from the context. Alternate translation: “to worship God at the festival” (See: Ellipsis)

τῇ ἑορτῇ

This refers to the Jewish Passover festival. See how you translated this word in verse 12.

John 12:21

Φιλίππῳ

See how you translated Philip in 1:43. (See: How to Translate Names)

Βηθσαϊδὰ

See how you translated Bethsaida in 1:44. (See: How to Translate Names)

τῆς Γαλιλαίας

See how you translated Galilee in 1:43. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἠρώτων αὐτὸν λέγοντες

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “asked him by saying” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

κύριε

Speaking to Philip, the Greeks called him Sir in order to show respect or politeness. (See: lord, Lord, master, sir)

θέλομεν τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἰδεῖν

The Greeks are using a statement to make a request. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for a request. Alternate translation: “may we see Jesus?” or “could you take us to see Jesus?” (See: Statements — Other Uses)

John 12:22

λέγει τῷ Ἀνδρέᾳ

Philip tells Andrew about the Greeks’ request to see Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “relates to Andrew what the Greeks had said” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἔρχεται…καὶ λέγει…ἔρχεται…καὶ λέγουσιν

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

λέγουσιν τῷ Ἰησοῦ

Philip and Andrew tell Jesus about the Greeks’ request to see him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “speak to Jesus about what the Greeks had said” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 12:23

ἀποκρίνεται αὐτοῖς λέγων

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “answered them by saying” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

ἐλήλυθεν ἡ ὥρα

See the discussion of this in the General Notes to Chapter 4 and see how you translated it in 4:21. (See: Metonymy)

ἵνα δοξασθῇ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου

Here, Jesus refers to his upcoming death, resurrection, and return to heaven as the time when he would be glorified. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that the Son of Man might be glorified through his death, resurrection, and ascension” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου

Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: First, Second or Third Person)

ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου

See how you translated the Son of Man in 1:51. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἵνα δοξασθῇ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Jesus implies that God will do it. Alternate translation: “so that God might glorify the Son of Man” (See: Active or Passive)

John 12:24

ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν

Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in 1:51. (See: Doublet)

ἐὰν μὴ ὁ κόκκος τοῦ σίτου πεσὼν εἰς τὴν γῆν ἀποθάνῃ, αὐτὸς μόνος μένει; ἐὰν δὲ ἀποθάνῃ, πολὺν καρπὸν φέρει

Here Jesus uses a grain of wheat figuratively to refer to himself. He speaks of the death of that grain to refer to his death, burial, and resurrection. He also uses fruit to refer to those people who will trust in him for salvation after his resurrection. Just as a seed is planted and grows into a plant that will bear much fruit, so will many people trust in Jesus after he is killed, buried, and raised back to life. If this would confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am like a grain of wheat. Unless that grain of wheat, having fallen into the earth, dies, it remains by itself; but if it would die, it bears much fruit” (See: Metaphor)

John 12:25

ὁ φιλῶν τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ, ἀπολλύει αὐτήν

Here, the one loving his life refers to someone who thinks that his own physical life is more important than anything else. If this clause would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Whoever values his own life more than anything else will still die” (See: Idiom)

ὁ μισῶν τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ τούτῳ, εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον φυλάξει αὐτήν

Here, the one hating his life refers to someone who values his own physical life less than he values being a disciple of Jesus. The word “hating” here does not refer to having negative feelings about one’s life or despising oneself. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whoever values being my disciple more than he values his own life will keep it for eternal life” (See: Idiom)

εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον

The phrase eternal life states the result of what precedes it. The one hating his life will keep that life, which will result in eternal life. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and also gain eternal life” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

John 12:26

ἐμοὶ ἀκολουθείτω

In this context, to follow someone means to become that person’s disciple. See how you translated a similar phrase in 1:43. Alternate translation: “let him follow me as my disciple” (See: Idiom)

ὅπου εἰμὶ ἐγὼ, ἐκεῖ καὶ ὁ διάκονος ὁ ἐμὸς ἔσται

Here, Jesus implies that those who serve him will be with him in heaven. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “when I am in heaven, my servant will also be there with me” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ Πατήρ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 12:27

τί εἴπω, Πάτερ, σῶσόν με ἐκ τῆς ὥρας ταύτης?

Here Jesus uses a rhetorical question to emphasize what he will not do. Although Jesus desires to avoid crucifixion, he chooses to be obedient to God and let himself be killed. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I will not say, ‘Father, save me from this hour!’” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Πάτερ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

τῆς ὥρας ταύτης…τὴν ὥραν ταύτην

In this verse this hour refers to the time when Jesus would suffer and die on the cross. See how you translated hour in verse 23. (See: Metonymy)

διὰ τοῦτο

Here, this reason refers to Jesus’ suffering and death on the cross. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “in order to suffer and die,” or (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 12:28

Πάτερ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

δόξασόν σου τὸ ὄνομα…καὶ ἐδόξασα…δοξάσω

In this verse, name and it refer to God himself. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “glorify yourself … I have both glorified myself … I will glorify myself”(See: Metonymy)

ἦλθεν…φωνὴ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ

Here John refers to the sound of God’s voice as if it were an object that came from heaven. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God spoke from heaven” (See: Metaphor)

John 12:29

ὁ…ὄχλος

See how you translated crowd in 5:13. (See: Collective Nouns)

John 12:30

οὐ…ἡ φωνὴ αὕτη γέγονεν

Here, Jesus refers to the sound of God’s voice as if it were an object that came down from heaven (see verse 28). If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God did not speak this” (See: Metonymy)

John 12:31

νῦν κρίσις ἐστὶν τοῦ κόσμου τούτου

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of judgment, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Now God will judge this world”(See: Abstract Nouns)

τοῦ κόσμου τούτου

Here, this world is used figuratively to refer to all the people in the world. See how you translated world in 1:29. (See: Metonymy)

νῦν ὁ ἄρχων τοῦ κόσμου τούτου ἐκβληθήσεται ἔξω

Here, ruler of this world refers to Satan. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Now Satan will be thrown out”(See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

νῦν ὁ ἄρχων τοῦ κόσμου τούτου ἐκβληθήσεται ἔξω

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Jesus implies that God will do it. Alternate translation: “Now God will throw out the ruler of this world” (See: Active or Passive)

John 12:32

ὑψωθῶ ἐκ τῆς γῆς

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people lift me up from the earth” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐὰν ὑψωθῶ ἐκ τῆς γῆς

Here, lifted up from the earth could refer to: (1) Jesus’ crucifixion only, in which case earth would refer to the ground. Alternate translation: “if I am lifted up from the ground on a cross” (2) Jesus’ crucifixion and return to heaven, in which case earth refers to both the ground and the planet. See the discussion about double meaning in the Part 3 of the Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “if I am lifted up from the earth on a cross and then up to heaven” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πάντας ἑλκύσω πρὸς ἐμαυτόν

See how you translated “draws” in 6:44. Alternate translation: “will pull everyone to myself”

πάντας ἑλκύσω πρὸς ἐμαυτόν

Here, everyone is an exaggeration that Jesus uses to refer to all people groups, both Jews and non-Jews. The context of non-Jewish people coming to see Jesus in verse 20 suggests this meaning. This clause does not mean that every individual person will believe in Jesus. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “will draw people from both Jews and non-Jews” or “will draw people, all people, Jews and non-Jews alike” (See: Hyperbole)

John 12:33

In this verse John explains the meaning of what Jesus said in the previous verse. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

John 12:34

ὁ ὄχλος

See how you translated crowd in 5:13. (See: Collective Nouns)

τοῦ νόμου

The crowd is using the name of the first part of the Hebrew Scriptures, the law, to represent the entire Hebrew Scriptures in general. See how you translated this use of the law in 10:34. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures” (See: Synecdoche)

δεῖ ὑψωθῆναι τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου

Here, the phrase lifted up means “crucified.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is necessary for the Son of Man to be crucified” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου…ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου

See how you translated the Son of Man in 1:51. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τίς ἐστιν οὗτος ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου

This could mean: (1) they are asking to know the identity of the Son of Man. Alternate translation: “What is the identity of this Son of Man?” (2) they are asking to know what Jesus means when he says, ‘Son of Man.’ Alternate translation: “What kind of Son of Man are you talking about?” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 12:35

τὸ φῶς ἐν ὑμῖν ἐστιν…ὡς τὸ φῶς ἔχετε

Jesus uses light figuratively to refer to refer to himself. He is “the Light of the World” who reveals God’s truth and goodness the way a light reveals a person’s surroundings. See how you translated light in 8:12. Alternate translation: “The one who reveals God’s truth and goodness will be with you … while you have him” (See: Metaphor)

τὸ φῶς ἐν ὑμῖν ἐστιν…ὡς τὸ φῶς ἔχετε

Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate these phrases in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the light, will be with you … while you have me” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

περιπατεῖτε

Jesus uses walk figuratively to refer to how a person lives and behaves. He is telling the crowd to live and act according to the example that he has shown them while he has been with them. If this would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Behave righteously” (See: Metaphor)

ἵνα μὴ σκοτία ὑμᾶς καταλάβῃ

Jesus uses darkness figuratively as though it were a person who could overtake someone. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way or with a simile. Alternate translation: “so that you do not act sinfully, as if the darkness of sin had taken control of you” (See: Personification)

σκοτία

Here Jesus uses darkness figuratively to refer to what is false and evil. See how you translated this term in 1:5. (See: Metaphor)

ὁ περιπατῶν ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ

Jesus uses this phrase figuratively to refer to a person who lives a sinful life and behaves sinfully. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “the one who lives sinfully” or “the one who does not behave righteously” (See: Metaphor)

John 12:36

τὸ φῶς…εἰς τὸ φῶς

Both occurrences of the light here refer to Jesus. See how you translated light in the previous verse. (See: Metaphor)

υἱοὶ φωτὸς

Here, sons of light is an idiom that refers to people who live according to God’s truth and goodness, which Jesus has revealed to them. Here, sons does not refer specifically to male children and light does not refer to Jesus. If this expression would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “people who share in God’s truth and goodness” (See: Idiom)

John 12:37

In verses 37–43 John interrupts the main storyline in order to explain how the Jewish people had fulfilled prophecies that had been spoken by the prophet Isaiah. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information for these verses. (See: Background Information)

σημεῖα

See how you translated signs in 2:11. See also the discussion of signs in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracles”

John 12:38

ἵνα ὁ λόγος Ἠσαΐου τοῦ προφήτου πληρωθῇ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in order to fulfill the word of Isaiah the prophet” (See: Active or Passive)

ὁ λόγος Ἠσαΐου τοῦ προφήτου

Here, word refers to the specific prophecy written down by Isaiah that is quoted in the second half of this verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this prophecy of Isaiah the prophet” (See: Metonymy)

Ἠσαΐου

See how you translated Isaiah in 1:23. (See: How to Translate Names)

ὃν εἶπεν

This phrase introduces a quotation that occurs in the rest of this verse. The quotation is from the Old Testament book written by Isaiah the prophet (Isaiah 53:1). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that John is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “which Isaiah said in the Old Testament” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

Κύριε, τίς ἐπίστευσεν τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν? καὶ ὁ βραχίων Κυρίου τίνι ἀπεκαλύφθη?

This sentence is a quotation from Isaiah 53:1. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

Κύριε, τίς ἐπίστευσεν τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν? καὶ ὁ βραχίων Κυρίου τίνι ἀπεκαλύφθη?

This quotation from Isaiah 53:1 contains two rhetorical questions to express the prophet’s dismay that the people do not believe his report. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as two statements or exclamations and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Lord, no one has believed our message! It seems like the arm of the Lord has been revealed to no one!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ὁ βραχίων Κυρίου τίνι ἀπεκαλύφθη

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to whom has the Lord revealed his arm” (See: Active or Passive)

ὁ βραχίων Κυρίου

Here, John quotes Isaiah using arm figuratively to refer to the Lord’s power. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Lord’s power” (See: Metaphor)

John 12:39

τοῦτο

Here, this reason refers to the reason for the Jews’ unbelief. That reason is given in the quotation from Isaiah provided in the next verse. It does not refer back to the quotation from Isaiah in the previous verse.

ὅτι πάλιν εἶπεν Ἠσαΐας

This phrase introduces a quotation from the Old Testament book written by Isaiah the prophet (Isaiah 6:10) which occurs in the next verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that John is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “for Isaiah had again said in the Old Testament” or “for according to Isaiah” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

John 12:40

τετύφλωκεν αὐτῶν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς καὶ ἐπώρωσεν αὐτῶν τὴν καρδίαν, ἵνα μὴ ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς καὶ νοήσωσιν τῇ καρδίᾳ, καὶ στραφῶσιν καὶ ἰάσομαι αὐτούς

This verse is a quotation from Isaiah 6:10. It is a prophecy that God told Isaiah to speak against the Jewish people because they kept rejecting God. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

τετύφλωκεν αὐτῶν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς

Here John quotes Isaiah using blinded their eyes figuratively to refer to causing people to not be able to understanding what they see. Although the Jews saw Jesus’ many miracles, most of them did not understand that those miracles proved that Jesus was sent by God. If this use of blinded and eyes would confuse your readers, you could state the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “He has caused them to not be able to understand” or “He has made them like those who are blind” (See: Metaphor)

ἐπώρωσεν αὐτῶν τὴν καρδίαν

John quotes Isaiah using the phrase hardened their heart figuratively to refer to causing the Jewish people to become stubborn. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he has made them stubborn” (See: Metaphor)

αὐτῶν τὴν καρδίαν…τῇ καρδίᾳ

Both occurrences of the singular noun heart in this verse refer to all of the hearts of the people as a group. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “their hearts … with their hearts” (See: Collective Nouns)

μὴ ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς

John quotes Isaiah using the phrase see with their eyes figuratively here to refer to people understanding something that they see. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they might not see and perceive” (See: Metaphor)

νοήσωσιν τῇ καρδίᾳ

John quotes Isaiah using the phrase understand with their heart figuratively to refer to the Jewish people truly understanding something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “might fully understand” or “might understand deep within themselves” (See: Metaphor)

καὶ στραφῶσιν

John quotes Isaiah using turn figuratively to mean “repent,” which means to stop sinning and start obeying the Lord. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and they would repent” or “and they would stop sinning and obey God” (See: Metaphor)

καὶ ἰάσομαι αὐτούς

John quotes Isaiah using heal figuratively to refer to forgiving people of their sins. It does not refer to physical healing. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and I would forgive them” (See: Metaphor)

John 12:41

τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how glorious he is” (See: Abstract Nouns)

John 12:42

τῶν ἀρχόντων

Here, rulers refers to the Jewish religious leadership, specifically the Jewish council called the Sanhedrin, which made decisions about Jewish law. (See: council) See how you translated this in 3:1. Alternate translation: “members of the Jewish ruling council” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἵνα μὴ ἀποσυνάγωγοι γένωνται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that the Pharisees would not ban them from the synagogue” (See: Active or Passive)

ἀποσυνάγωγοι

John uses put out of the synagogue figuratively to refer to no longer being allowed to go into the synagogue and no longer belonging to the group of people who attended services at the synagogue. When people were put out of the synagogue, they were shunned by their local community. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they would not be allowed to enter the synagogue” or “they would no longer belong to the synagogue community” (See: Metaphor)

John 12:43

ἠγάπησαν…τὴν δόξαν τῶν ἀνθρώπων μᾶλλον ἤπερ τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here, loved refers to preferring one thing over something else. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “they preferred the glory of men more than the glory of God” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὴν δόξαν τῶν ἀνθρώπων

John is using of to describe glory that is given by men. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the glory that is given by men” (See: Possession)

τὴν δόξαν τῶν ἀνθρώπων

Although the term men is masculine, John is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “the glory of people” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ

John is using of to describe glory that is given by God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the glory that is given by God” (See: Possession)

John 12:44

δὲ

Now here introduces a new event that happened at some time after the events in verses 20–36. The story does not say how long after the previous events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “At another time” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

Ἰησοῦς…ἔκραξεν καὶ εἶπεν

John uses cried out to imply that Jesus was speaking loudly to a crowd of people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus cried out and said to a crowd” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸν πέμψαντά με

Here, the one who sent me refers to God. See how you translated it in 4:34. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 12:45

τὸν πέμψαντά με

Here, the one who sent me refers to God. See how you translated it in the previous verse. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 12:46

ἐγὼ φῶς εἰς τὸν κόσμον ἐλήλυθα

Here Jesus uses light figuratively to refer to himself. See how you translated light in 8:12. Alternate translation: “I have come as the one who reveals God’s truth and goodness to the world” (See: Metaphor)

εἰς τὸν κόσμον

Here, world refers to the people who live in it. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the people living in the world” (See: Metonymy)

ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ μὴ μείνῃ

Here Jesus uses darkness figuratively to refer to what is false and evil. See how you translated darkness in verse 35 and also see the discussion of light and darkness in the General Notes for Chapter 1. Alternate translation: “might not remain in sin and evil” (See: Metaphor)

John 12:47

μου…τῶν ῥημάτων

Here, words refers to the message or teachings of Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my message” or “what I say” (See: Metonymy)

καὶ μὴ φυλάξῃ

Here, keep means to obey. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “but does not obey them” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐγὼ οὐ κρίνω αὐτόν…ἵνα κρίνω τὸν κόσμον

In this verse, the word judge implies condemnation. Jesus did not come to condemn people to be eternally punished in hell. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I do not condemn him … so that I might condemn the world” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸν κόσμον…σώσω τὸν κόσμον

See how you translated the world in the previous verse. (See: Metonymy)

John 12:48

τὰ ῥήματά μου

See how you translated my words in the previous verse.

τὸν κρίνοντα…κρινεῖ

See how you translated this judge in the previous verse.

τὸν κρίνοντα αὐτόν…ὁ λόγος ὃν ἐλάλησα, ἐκεῖνος κρινεῖ αὐτὸν

Jesus refers to his word figuratively as though it were a person who could judge someone. He means that his teachings will be used as the criterion by which God will judge those who have rejected Jesus. If this might be confusing to your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “one by which he will be judged. The word which I have spoken, this will be the standard by which you will be judged” (See: Personification)

ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ

See how you translated this phrase in 6:39. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 12:49

ἐξ ἐμαυτοῦ

Here, from is used to indicate the source of what Jesus spoke. See how you translated this phrase in 7:17. Alternate translation: “by my own authority” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ…Πατὴρ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

τί εἴπω, καὶ τί λαλήσω

Here, what I should speak could refer to: (1) the manner in which Jesus should speak. Alternate translation: “what I should say and the manner in which I should say it” (2) the same meaning as what I should say, in which case the two phrases would be a doublet used for emphasis and could be combined into one clause. Alternate translation: “exactly what I should say” (See: Doublet)

John 12:50

οἶδα, ὅτι ἡ ἐντολὴ αὐτοῦ

Here, his command refers to the teachings that God commanded Jesus to speak, as mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I know that what he commanded me to speak” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἡ ἐντολὴ αὐτοῦ ζωὴ αἰώνιός ἐστιν

This phrase means that what God commanded Jesus to say gives eternal life to those who believe it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “his command gives eternal life” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 13

John 13 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

The Passover meal begins: Jesus washes his disciples’ feet (13:1–20)
Jesus predicts that Judas will betray him (13:21–30)
Jesus commands his disciples to love each other (13:31–35)
Jesus predicts that Peter will deny him (13:36–38)

The events of this chapter are commonly referred to as the “Last Supper.” In many ways this Passover meal parallels the sacrifice of Jesus as the lamb of God. (See: Lord’s Supper and Passover)

Special Concepts in this Chapter

The washing of feet

People in the Ancient Near East thought that feet were very dirty. Only servants would wash people’s feet. The disciples did not want Jesus to wash their feet, because they considered him to be their master and themselves to be his servants, and it was a servant’s job to wash the feet of master and guests. However, Jesus wanted to show them that his disciples need to humbly serve and love each other. (See: Symbolic Action)

I AM

John records Jesus saying these words as an independent phrase one time in this chapter (13:19). They stand alone as a complete sentence, and they literally translate the Hebrew expression “I AM,” by which Yahweh identified himself to Moses in Exodus 3:14. For these reasons many people believe that when Jesus said these words he was claiming to be Yahweh. (See: Yahweh).

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

“The disciple whom Jesus loved”

The Apostle John first referred to himself as the disciple “whom Jesus loved” in this chapter (13:23). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. If this is the case, then you will need to add a first person pronoun to these references and the other references to John in (13:23–25). If your language can retain the third person references, then you may still want to make these references to John explicit by adding “John” next to them. See the discussion of this in Part 1 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: John (the apostle) and First, Second or Third Person)

“Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter (13:31). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: Son of Man, son of man and First, Second or Third Person)

John 13:1

It is not yet Passover, and Jesus is with his disciples for the evening meal. Verses 1–4 explain the setting of the story and give background information about Jesus and Judas. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

ἦλθεν αὐτοῦ ἡ ὥρα

Here, the word hour is used figuratively to refer to the time God had planned for Jesus to be arrested and killed. See how you translated this word in 7:30. Alternate translation: “the right time to arrest him had come” (See: Metonymy)

Πατέρα

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

τοὺς ἰδίους τοὺς ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ

This phrase refers to Jesus’ disciples. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “his own disciples who were with him in the world” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

εἰς τέλος ἠγάπησεν αὐτούς

Here, to the end could mean: (1) to the end of Jesus’ life. If you use this meaning, make sure that you do not translate this phrase in a way that could imply that Jesus did not continue to love them after his death. Alternate translation: “he loved them to the time of his death” (2) utterly or completely. Alternate translation: “he loved them to the uttermost” (See: Idiom)

John 13:2

τοῦ διαβόλου ἤδη βεβληκότος εἰς τὴν καρδίαν, ἵνα παραδοῖ αὐτὸν Ἰούδας, Σίμωνος Ἰσκαριώτης

Here, put into the heart is an idiom that means to cause someone to think about something. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the devil had already caused Judas Iscariot, the son of Simon, to think about betraying Jesus” (See: Idiom)

Ἰούδας, Σίμωνος Ἰσκαριώτης

See how you translated this phrase in 6:71. (See: How to Translate Names)

John 13:3

εἰδὼς

Here, the word knowing could mean: (1) the rest of this verse is the reason why Jesus did the result that John describes in the next verse. Alternate translation: “because he knew” (2) this verse provides a contrast between who Jesus is and what he would do in the next verse. Alternate translation: “although he knew” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Πατὴρ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

εἰς τὰς χεῖρας

Here, John uses hands figuratively to refer to power and authority. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “into his power” (See: Metonymy)

John 13:4

ἐγείρεται…τίθησιν

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ἐγείρεται ἐκ τοῦ δείπνου

During Jesus’ time, people would often eat meals while lying on their sides on low couches next to the table. Here, gets up means that Jesus went from lying on his side on a couch next to the table where he was eating supper to standing up. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he gets up from the table where he was eating supper” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τίθησιν τὰ ἱμάτια

Here, outer clothing refers to clothing that is worn over undergarments. It does not refer to a coat that would be worn over a person’s regular clothing. Use the term in your language for the regular clothing that people wear on top of their underwear.

λαβὼν λέντιον

Here, towel refers to piece of cloth that is long enough to wrap around Jesus’ waist and still has enough leftover cloth to wipe the disciples’ feet. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “having taken a long towel” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 13:5

βάλλει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ᾧ ἦν διεζωσμένος

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that he had tied around himself” (See: Active or Passive)

John 13:6

ἔρχεται…λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

Κύριε, σύ μου νίπτεις τοὺς πόδας?

Peter is using a rhetorical question here to show that he does not want Jesus to wash his feet. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Lord, it is not right for you to wash my feet!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

John 13:7

μετὰ ταῦτα

Here, these things refers to Jesus’ crucifixion and resurrection. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “after the events that are about to take place” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 13:8

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ἐὰν μὴ νίψω σε, οὐκ ἔχεις μέρος μετ’ ἐμοῦ

Jesus uses two negative statements to convince Peter to allow him to wash his feet. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “I must wash you so that you can have a share with me” (See: Double Negatives)

ἐὰν μὴ νίψω σε, οὐκ ἔχεις μέρος μετ’ ἐμοῦ

Here, Jesus’ use of no share with me could imply: (1) that Peter must let him wash his feet if he wants to receive his share of the inheritance that God promised to give his people. Alternate translation: “If I do not wash you, you will not share in God’s promised inheritance with me” (2) that Peter must let him wash his feet if he wants to continue being his disciple. Alternate translation: “If I do not wash you, you will no longer be my disciple” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 13:9

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

μὴ τοὺς πόδας μου μόνον,

Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “wash not only my feet” (See: Ellipsis)

John 13:10

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ὁ λελουμένος οὐκ ἔχει χρείαν, εἰ μὴ τοὺς πόδας νίψασθαι

In this verse, Jesus uses washed figuratively to refer to God forgiving a person for their sins. He also uses feet figuratively to refer to daily sins, because people in Jesus’ culture had to wash their feet frequently due to wearing sandals while walking on dusty, dirty roads. If this might confuse your readers, you could state their meanings clearly or use similes. Alternate translation: “The one who has received God’s forgiveness for their sins, only needs to be forgiven for his daily sins” (See: Metaphor)

ὁ λελουμένος

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The one who someone had washed” (See: Active or Passive)

ἀλλ’ ἔστιν καθαρὸς ὅλος; καὶ ὑμεῖς καθαροί ἐστε

In this verse, Jesus uses clean figuratively to refer to someone who has been forgiven for their sins. If this might be confusing in your language, you could state its meaning clearly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “but he has been completely forgiven for his sins, and you have been forgiven” (See: Metaphor)

ὑμεῖς

Here Jesus uses the word you to refer to all of his disciples, not only Peter. Use a plural form of you if your language distinguishes between singular and plural you. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

John 13:11

Here John interrupts the story to give the reason why Jesus made his comment in the end of the previous verse. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

οὐχὶ πάντες καθαροί ἐστε

See how you translated clean in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Not all of you have received God’s forgiveness” (See: Metaphor)

John 13:12

γινώσκετε τί πεποίηκα ὑμῖν?

Jesus is using a question to emphasize the importance of what he is teaching his disciples. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You need to understand what I have done for you!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

John 13:13

ὑμεῖς φωνεῖτέ με ὁ Διδάσκαλος καὶ, ὁ Κύριος

Here Jesus implies that his disciples have great respect for him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “You show me great respect when you call me ‘teacher’ and ‘Lord.’” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 13:14

εἰ οὖν ἐγὼ ἔνιψα ὑμῶν τοὺς πόδας, ὁ Κύριος καὶ ὁ Διδάσκαλος

Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If I then, the Lord and the Teacher, have washed your feet, and I have” (See: Connect — Factual Conditions)

John 13:15

καθὼς ἐγὼ ἐποίησα ὑμῖν, καὶ ὑμεῖς ποιῆτε

Jesus is using a statement to give an instruction. Jesus is telling his disciples to follow his example and serve one another. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: “you also must do just as I did to you” (See: Statements — Other Uses)

John 13:16

ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν

Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in 1:51. (See: Doublet)

οὐκ ἔστιν δοῦλος μείζων τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ, οὐδὲ ἀπόστολος μείζων τοῦ πέμψαντος αὐτόν

Here, greater means to be more important or deserving of more respect than another person. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “a slave is not respected more than his master, nor is a messenger respected more than the one who sent him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὐκ ἔστιν δοῦλος μείζων τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ, οὐδὲ ἀπόστολος μείζων τοῦ πέμψαντος αὐτόν

These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Jesus’ disciples are not more important than him, so they should humbly serve each other. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “none of you are greater than me” (See: Doublet)

οὐκ ἔστιν δοῦλος μείζων τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ

Jesus uses the words slave and master figuratively to refer to his disciples and himself, respectively. He is telling his disciples that they should humbly serve each other because they are not more important than him, and he has humbly served them. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Jesus’ meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “you are not greater than me” (See: Metaphor)

οὐδὲ ἀπόστολος μείζων τοῦ πέμψαντος αὐτόν

Jesus uses messenger and the one who sent him figuratively to refer to his disciples and himself, respectively. He is telling his disciples that they should humbly serve each other because they are not more important than him, and he has humbly served them. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Jesus’ meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “and you are not greater than me” (See: Metaphor)

John 13:17

εἰ ταῦτα οἴδατε

Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If you know these things, which you do,” (See: Connect — Factual Conditions)

μακάριοί ἐστε

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that God did it. See the UST. (See: Active or Passive)

John 13:18

οὐ περὶ πάντων ὑμῶν λέγω

Here Jesus is referring back to what he just said in the previous verse. He means that not all of those to whom he is speaking will be blessed for serving each other, because one of them, Judas Iscariot, will betray him. If this clause would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am not speaking this about all of you” or “I am not saying that God will bless all of you” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐγὼ οἶδα τίνας ἐξελεξάμην

Here Jesus states that he knew the character of every person he chose to be his disciple. Therefore, he knew Judas would betray him when he chose him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I know exactly the kind of men I have chosen to be my disciples” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but I chose one who will betray me so that the scripture might be fulfilled” (See: Ellipsis)

ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this is in order to fulfill the scripture” (See: Active or Passive)

ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ

Here Jesus uses that the scripture might be fulfilled to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Psalm 41:9). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “so that what is written in the Psalms might be fulfilled” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

ὁ τρώγων μετ’ ἐμοῦ τὸν ἄρτον, ἐπῆρεν ἐπ’ ἐμὲ τὴν πτέρναν αὐτοῦ

This sentence is a quotation from Psalm 41:9. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

ὁ τρώγων μετ’ ἐμοῦ τὸν ἄρτον, ἐπῆρεν ἐπ’ ἐμὲ τὴν πτέρναν αὐτοῦ

The phrase, The one eating bread with me, here is an idiom that refers to someone who acts like a friend would act. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “The one who has acted like he is my friend” (See: Idiom)

ἐπῆρεν ἐπ’ ἐμὲ τὴν πτέρναν αὐτοῦ

Here, lifted up his heel is an idiom that refers to someone who has become an enemy. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “has turned against me” or “has become my enemy” (See: Idiom)

John 13:19

ἀπ’ ἄρτι λέγω ὑμῖν

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context, as modeled by the UST. (See: Ellipsis)

ἐγώ εἰμι

See how you translated I am in 8:24, and also see the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes for Chapter 8. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 13:20

ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν

Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in 1:51. (See: Doublet)

ὁ λαμβάνων…λαμβάνει…λαμβάνων…λαμβάνει

In this verse, receiving and receives mean to accept or welcome a person into one’s presence with friendliness. See how you translated this word in 1:12. (See: Doublet)

τὸν πέμψαντά με

Here, the one who sent me refers to God. See how you translated it in 4:34. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 13:21

ἐταράχθη τῷ πνεύματι

See how you translated a similar phrase in 11:33. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν

Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in 1:51. (See: Doublet)

John 13:23

εἷς ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ…ὃν ἠγάπα ὁ Ἰησοῦς

This phrase refers to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. See the discussion of this phrase in Part 1 of the Introduction to the Gospel of John and the discussion in the General Notes for this chapter. If this phrase would be confusing to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, one of his disciples, whom Jesus loved” or “John, one of his disciples, whom Jesus loved” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀνακείμενος

During Jesus’ time, people would often eat meals while lying on their sides on low couches next to a table. If your readers would not be familiar with this meal practice, you could use a general expression for sitting to have a meal. Alternate translation: “seated at the table” (See: Translate Unknowns)

ἐν τῷ κόλπῳ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ

In Jesus’ culture, lying with one’s head against the side of another person when having a meal was considered to be a sign that the two people had a very close friendship. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “closely beside Jesus as a close friend” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 13:24

τούτῳ

Here, this one refers to John, who calls himself the disciple “whom Jesus loved” in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the disciple whom Jesus loved” or “to me” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 13:25

ἐκεῖνος…λέγει

Here, that one refers to John, who calls himself the disciple “whom Jesus loved” in verse 23. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “that disciple whom Jesus loved says” or “I say” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

λέγει

Verse 28 indicates that the disciples did not know why Jesus spoke to Judas in the way he did. This means that they must not have heard the conversation in this verse and the next, because John and Jesus were speaking quietly. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “said in a quite voice” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

John 13:26

Ἰούδᾳ Σίμωνος Ἰσκαριώτη

See how you translated this phrase in 6:71. (See: How to Translate Names)

John 13:27

καὶ μετὰ τὸ ψωμίον

John is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “And after Judas took the bread” (See: Ellipsis)

τότε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς ἐκεῖνον ὁ Σατανᾶς

Here, entered into is an idiom that means that Satan took control of Judas. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Satan then started to command Judas” (See: Idiom)

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

John 13:28

In verses 28–29 John interrupts the main storyline in order to provide background information about the disciples’ confusion. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

τῶν ἀνακειμένων

See how you translated reclining to eat in verse 23. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 13:29

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ἑορτήν

Here, festival refers to the Jewish Passover festival. See how you translated this word in 12:12. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τοῖς πτωχοῖς ἵνα τι δῷ

If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “Give something to the poor” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

John 13:30

ἦν δὲ νύξ

In this sentence John provides background information about the time of day when Judas went out to betray Jesus. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

John 13:31

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

νῦν ἐδοξάσθη ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς ἐδοξάσθη ἐν αὐτῷ

In this verse, Jesus twice uses the past tense has been glorified figuratively in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. He is doing this to show that the event will certainly happen. If this is confusing in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “Now the Son of Man will be glorified, and God will be glorified in him” (See: Predictive Past)

νῦν ἐδοξάσθη ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “Now God will glorify the Son of Man” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐδοξάσθη ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου

Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man, have been glorified” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου

See how you translated the Son of Man in 1:51. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ Θεὸς ἐδοξάσθη ἐν αὐτῷ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he will glorify God” (See: Active or Passive)

John 13:32

In some Bibles, this verse begins with the clause, “If God has been glorified in him”. However, these words are not in most of the oldest ancient manuscripts. Nevertheless, if a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: Textual Variants)

ὁ Θεὸς δοξάσει αὐτὸν…αὐτόν

Both occurrences of the pronoun him refer to the Son of Man, Jesus. If this use of him would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “God will glorify the Son of Man … the Son” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ὁ Θεὸς δοξάσει αὐτὸν ἐν αὐτῷ

The word himself here refers to God and is used to emphasize that God is the one who would glorify Jesus. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “God himself will glorify him” (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

John 13:33

τεκνία

Jesus is using the phrase Little children figuratively to describe the disciples to whom he is speaking. He loves them as if they were his own children. If this might confuse your readers, you could translate this in a non-figurative way or use a simile. Alternate translation: “You dear disciples who are like children to me” (See: Metaphor)

τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in 1:19. (See: Synecdoche)

καὶ καθὼς εἶπον τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις, ὅτι ὅπου ἐγὼ ὑπάγω, ὑμεῖς οὐ δύνασθε ἐλθεῖν, καὶ ὑμῖν λέγω ἄρτι

If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “and just as I said to the Jews, now I also say this to you, ‘Where I go, you are not able to come.’” (See: Information Structure)

ὅπου ἐγὼ ὑπάγω, ὑμεῖς οὐ δύνασθε ἐλθεῖν

See how you translated this sentence in 8:21. (See: Information Structure)

John 13:34

καθὼς ἠγάπησα ὑμᾶς, ἵνα καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀγαπᾶτε ἀλλήλους

Jesus is using a future statement to give an instruction. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: “just as I have loved you, so also you must love one another” (See: Statements — Other Uses)

John 13:35

πάντες

Here, Jesus uses everyone as an exaggeration that refers only to those people who would see how the disciples loved each other. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression. (See: Hyperbole)

John 13:36

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

John 13:37

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

τὴν ψυχήν μου…θήσω

See how you translated a similar phrase in 10:11. (See: Euphemism)

John 13:38

τὴν ψυχήν σου ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ θήσεις?

Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. He knows that Peter is not really willing to lay down his life for Jesus. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You will certainly not lay down your life for me!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω σοι

Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in 1:51. (See: Doublet)

οὐ μὴ ἀλέκτωρ φωνήσῃ, ἕως οὗ ἀρνήσῃ με τρίς

If your readers would misunderstand this negative statement, you could express it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “you will surely deny me three times before the rooster crows”

οὐ μὴ ἀλέκτωρ φωνήσῃ, ἕως οὗ

Jesus is referring figuratively to a certain time of day. Roosters crow just before the sun appears in the morning. In other words, Jesus is referring to dawn. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “before another morning begins” (See: Metonymy)

ἀλέκτωρ

A rooster is a bird that calls out loudly around the time the sun comes up. If your readers would not be familiar with this bird, you could use the name of a bird in your area that calls out or sings just before dawn, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the bird that sings in the morning” (See: Translate Unknowns)

ἀλέκτωρ

Jesus is not speaking of one particular rooster but of roosters in general. Alternate translation: “the roosters” or “the birds” (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

John 14

John 14 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

Jesus says he is the way to the Father (14:1–14)
Jesus promises that the Holy Spirit will come (14:15–31)

Special Concepts in this Chapter

“My Father’s house”

Jesus used these words to refer to heaven, where God dwells. It does not refer to any temple in Jerusalem or to a church building. (See: heaven, sky, heavens, heavenly)

The Holy Spirit

Jesus told his disciples that he would send the Holy Spirit to them. He called the Holy Spirit the Helper (14:16), who is always with God’s people to help them and to speak to God for them. Jesus also called him the Spirit of Truth (14:17), who tells God’s people what is true about God so they know him better and serve him well. (See: Holy Spirit, Spirit of God, Spirit of the Lord, Spirit)

John 14:1

The part of the story from the previous chapter continues in this chapter. Jesus reclines at the table with his disciples during the evening meal and continues to speak to them.

In verses 1–7 the word “you” is always plural and refers to Jesus’ disciples. (See: Forms of You)

μὴ ταρασσέσθω ὑμῶν ἡ καρδία

Jesus uses heart figuratively to represent the disciples’ thoughts and emotions. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Do not let your thoughts be troubled” (See: Metaphor)

πιστεύετε εἰς τὸν Θεόν, καὶ εἰς ἐμὲ πιστεύετε

Both of these clauses could be: (1) commands, as in the UST. (2) statements. Alternate translation: “You believe in God; you also believe in me” (See: Statements — Other Uses)

John 14:2

ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ τοῦ Πατρός μου

Jesus uses house figuratively to refer to heaven, which is the place where God dwells. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “In the place where my Father dwells” or “In heaven where my Father dwells”(See: Metaphor)

Πατρός

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

εἰ δὲ μή, εἶπον ἂν ὑμῖν, ὅτι πορεύομαι ἑτοιμάσαι τόπον ὑμῖν

The word translated for could also be translated “that,” in which case this sentence would be a question instead of a statement. With either interpretation the point of the sentence is the same: Jesus is emphasizing that what he has just said in the previous sentence is true. He is going to heaven to prepare a place for his people. Alternate translation: “But if not, would I have told you that I am going to prepare a place for you?”

John 14:3

ἐὰν πορευθῶ

Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he knows that it will actually take place. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when I go” (See: Connect — Factual Conditions)

John 14:4

τὴν ὁδόν

Here Jesus uses the way figuratively. This could refer to: (1) himself as the means by which people can go to God in heaven, which is clearly the meaning for the way in verse 6. (2) a manner of life that will eventually lead someone to be with God in heaven. Since the disciples did not understand this when Jesus said it, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

John 14:5

Θωμᾶς

See how you translated the name Thomas in 11:16. (See: How to Translate Names)

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

πῶς δυνάμεθα τὴν ὁδὸν εἰδέναι

Thomas is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We surely do not know the way!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

John 14:6

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ἡ ὁδὸς

Here Jesus uses the way figuratively to indicate that he is the means by which people can go to God, who is in heaven. Trusting in Jesus is the only way to have access to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who gives people access to the Father” or “the means by which one may come to the Father” (See: Metaphor)

ἡ ἀλήθεια

Jesus uses the truth figuratively to indicate that he is the one who reveals God’s truth to people. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who reveals God’s truth” or “the means by which people can know God’s truth” (See: Metaphor)

ἡ ζωή

Jesus uses the life figuratively to indicate that he is the means by which people can receive eternal life. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who makes people spiritually alive” or “the means by which one may receive eternal life” (See: Metaphor)

οὐδεὶς ἔρχεται πρὸς τὸν Πατέρα, εἰ μὴ δι’ ἐμοῦ

Here, through me means that a person can come to God only by trusting Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “No one comes to the Father except by believing in me” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Πατέρα

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 14:7

εἰ ἐγνώκατε με

Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If you have known me, and you have known me” (See: Connect — Factual Conditions)

John 14:8

Φίλιππος

See how you translated the name Philip in 1:43. (See: How to Translate Names)

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

Κύριε, δεῖξον ἡμῖν τὸν Πατέρα

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 14:9

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

τοσοῦτον χρόνον μεθ’ ὑμῶν εἰμι, καὶ οὐκ ἔγνωκάς με, Φίλιππε?

Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “So long a time I am with you, and you should know me, Philip!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ὑμῶν…σὺ

The first occurrence of you in this verse is plural, but the second occurrence is singular. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: Forms of You)

τὸν Πατέρα

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

πῶς σὺ λέγεις, δεῖξον ἡμῖν τὸν Πατέρα?

Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize what he is saying to Philip. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You really should not say, ‘Show us the Father!’” (See: Rhetorical Question)

John 14:10

οὐ πιστεύεις ὅτι ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ Πατρὶ, καὶ ὁ Πατὴρ ἐν ἐμοί ἐστιν?

Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize what he is saying to Philip. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You really should believe that I am in the Father, and the Father is in me.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ Πατρὶ, καὶ ὁ Πατὴρ ἐν ἐμοί ἐστιν

See how you translated this expression in 10:38. (See: Idiom)

Πατρὶ…ὁ Πατὴρ…Πατὴρ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

τὰ ῥήματα ἃ ἐγὼ λαλῶ ὑμῖν

Here, you is plural. Jesus shifts from speaking to Philip to speaking to all of his disciples. (See: Forms of You)

τὰ ῥήματα

Here, words refers to the message or teachings of Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The message” or “The teachings” (See: Metonymy)

ἀπ’ ἐμαυτοῦ

See how you translated from myself in 5:30. Alternate translation: “on my own authority” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὰ ἔργα

See how you translated work in 7:3. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 14:11

ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ Πατρὶ, καὶ ὁ Πατὴρ ἐν ἐμοί

See how you translated this in the previous verse. (See: Idiom)

τὰ ἔργα

See how you translated work in the previous verse. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 14:12

ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν,

Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in 1:51. (See: Doublet)

ὁ πιστεύων εἰς ἐμὲ, τὰ ἔργα ἃ ἐγὼ ποιῶ, κἀκεῖνος ποιήσει

If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “the one believing in me will also do the works that I do” (See: Information Structure)

τὰ ἔργα

See how you translated works in the previous verse. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

καὶ μείζονα τούτων ποιήσει

Jesus is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “and he will do greater works than these” (See: Ellipsis)

Πατέρα

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 14:13

ὅ τι ἂν αἰτήσητε

Jesus is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “whatever you might ask God” (See: Ellipsis)

ὅ τι ἂν αἰτήσητε ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου

Here, ask in my name could mean: (1) to request something as the representative of Jesus or as if Jesus himself were requesting it. Alternate translation: “whatever you might ask as if I were asking” or “whatever you might ask that I would ask” (2) to request something with the authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “whatever you ask with my authority” (See: Idiom)

ἵνα δοξασθῇ ὁ Πατὴρ ἐν τῷ Υἱῷ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The one that may do the action could be: (1) Jesus, in which case in the Son would mean “by the Son.” Alternate translation: “so that the Son may glorify the Father” (2) everyone who experiences the result of what has been asked. Alternate translation: “so that everyone may glorify the Father in the Son” (See: Active or Passive)

ὁ Πατὴρ…Υἱῷ

Father and Son are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἐν τῷ Υἱῷ

Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this phrase in the first person. Alternate translation: “in me, the Son” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

John 14:14

ἐάν τι αἰτήσητέ με ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου

See how you translated in my name in the previous verse. (See: Idiom)

John 14:15

τὰς ἐντολὰς τὰς ἐμὰς τηρήσετε

Here, keep means to obey. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you will obey my commandments” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 14:16

Παράκλητον

Helper here refers to the Holy Spirit. See the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “one who helps, the Holy Spirit” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 14:17

τὸ Πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας

The Spirit of Truth refers to the Holy Spirit. See the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Holy Spirit of Truth” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸ Πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας

Jesus is using of to describe the Spirit who teaches people the Truth about God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the Spirit that teaches God’s truth” (See: Possession)

ὃ ὁ κόσμος οὐ δύναται λαβεῖν

Here Jesus uses world figuratively to refer to the people in the world who oppose God. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whom the people in this world who oppose God are not able to receive” or “whom those who oppose God are not able to receive” (See: Metonymy)

ἐν ὑμῖν ἔσται

Jesus uses the future tense will to indicate that the Holy Spirit would be inside Jesus’ disciples at a future point in time. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “will be in you at a future time” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 14:18

οὐκ ἀφήσω ὑμᾶς ὀρφανούς

Jesus uses orphans figuratively to refer to people who have no one to care for them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will not leave you with no one to care for you” (See: Metaphor)

ἔρχομαι

Here Jesus uses the present tense I am coming to refer to something that will happen in the near future. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the future tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “I will come” (See: Predictive Past)

John 14:19

ὁ κόσμος

See how you translated the world in verse 17. (See: Metonymy)

ὅτι ἐγὼ ζῶ, καὶ ὑμεῖς ζήσεσθε

In this verse, Jesus uses live to refer to living forever after one’s resurrection. Because Jesus will live forever after his death and resurrection, so too will his disciples life forever after they die and are resurrected. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because I live forever, you will also life forever” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὅτι ἐγὼ ζῶ

Here Jesus uses the present tense I live to refer to when he comes back to life after his death. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the future tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Because I will live” (See: Predictive Past)

John 14:20

ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ

On that day here refers to the time that Jesus’ disciples would see him again after his resurrection. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “When you see me again” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ Πατρί μου, καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν ἐμοὶ, κἀγὼ ἐν ὑμῖν

In this verse Jesus uses in to indicate being united with someone. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am united with my Father, and you are united with me, and I am united with you” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Πατρί μου

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ὑμεῖς ἐν ἐμοὶ, κἀγὼ ἐν ὑμῖν

These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize the unity between Jesus and his disciples. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “you and I are just like one person” (See: Doublet)

John 14:21

ὁ ἔχων τὰς ἐντολάς μου

Jesus speaks figuratively of commandments as if they were an object that someone could possess. If your readers would not speak of knowing commandments in this way, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “The one knowing my commandments” (See: Metaphor)

τηρῶν αὐτὰς

Here, keeping means obeying. See how you translated this word in verse 15. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ δὲ ἀγαπῶν με, ἀγαπηθήσεται ὑπὸ τοῦ Πατρός μου

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and my Father will love the one loving me” (See: Active or Passive)

Πατρός μου

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἐμφανίσω αὐτῷ ἐμαυτόν

This could mean: (1) Jesus will reveal himself to his disciples after his resurrection, as also stated in verse 19. Alternate translation: “I will show myself to him after I live again” (2) Jesus will reveal his character to the minds of anyone who loves and obeys him, as suggested by his statement in verse 23. Alternate translation: “I will reveal to him what I am like” (3) Jesus will both reveal himself to his disciples after his resurrection and reveal his character to everyone who loves and obeys him. Alternate translation: “I will reveal myself to him after I live again and will reveal what I am like” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 14:22

Ἰούδας, οὐχ ὁ Ἰσκαριώτης

Here, Judas is the name of a man who was another disciple of Jesus. He was not the other disciple named Judas who was from the village of Kerioth and betrayed Jesus. (See: How to Translate Names)

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

τί γέγονεν, ὅτι ἡμῖν μέλλεις ἐμφανίζειν σεαυτὸν

Judas uses the expression what has happened to express his confusion about what Jesus said in the previous verse. The Jewish people were expecting the Messiah to come and reveal himself to the whole world, but Jesus said he would only show himself to his disciples. Therefore, Judas thinks something has caused Jesus to act differently than he had expected. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “what is causing you to only show yourself to us” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἡμῖν

When Judas says us, he is speaking of himself and Jesus’ other disciples, so us would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

τῷ κόσμῳ

John 14:23

τὸν λόγον μου τηρήσει

See how you translated a similar phrase in 8:51. (See: Metonymy)

ὁ Πατήρ μου

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

πρὸς αὐτὸν ἐλευσόμεθα, καὶ μονὴν παρ’ αὐτῷ ποιησόμεθα

When Jesus says we in this verse, he is speaking of himself and God the Father, so we would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

καὶ μονὴν παρ’ αὐτῷ ποιησόμεθα

This clause refers to God and Jesus dwelling within the person who loves and obeys Jesus. After Jesus’ resurrection and return to heaven, he and God live inside every believer through the Holy Spirit. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and we will live within him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 14:24

τοὺς λόγους μου…τηρεῖ

See how you translated a similar phrase in 8:51. (See: Metonymy)

ὁ λόγος

Here, word refers to what Jesus has just said in the preceding verses. If this would confuse your readers, you could express that meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “these things I have just said” or “this statement” (See: Metonymy)

οὐκ ἔστιν ἐμὸς

Here, mine refers to the source of what Jesus has said. What Jesus has said did not come from himself, but from God. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “does not come from me” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τοῦ πέμψαντός με Πατρός

Jesus is using of to describe the source of the word. If this is not clear in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “has come from the Father who sent me” (See: Possession)

τοῦ πέμψαντός με Πατρός

Here this phrase refers to God. See how you translated it in 5:23. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τοῦ…Πατρός

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 14:26

ὁ δὲ Παράκλητος, τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, ὃ πέμψει ὁ Πατὴρ ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου, ἐκεῖνος ὑμᾶς διδάξει πάντα, καὶ ὑπομνήσει ὑμᾶς πάντα ἃ εἶπον ὑμῖν.

If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of the phrases in this verse. Alternate translation: “Now the Helper will teach you everything, and he will remind you of everything that I said to you. He is the Holy Spirit, whom the Father will send in my name.” (See: Information Structure)

ὁ…Παράκλητος

See how you translated the Helper in verse 16.

Πατὴρ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου

Here, in my name could mean: (1) as the representative of Jesus or in place of Jesus. Alternate translation: “as my representative” or “in place of me” (2) with the authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “with my authority” (See: Idiom)

πάντα

Here, everything is an exaggeration that Jesus uses for emphasis. He means that the Holy Spirit would teach the disciples all that they needed to know about what he had taught them. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the plain meaning. Alternate translation: “everything that you need to know about what I have said” (See: Hyperbole)

John 14:27

εἰρήνην ἀφίημι ὑμῖν; εἰρήνην τὴν ἐμὴν δίδωμι ὑμῖν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I leave you a peaceful feeling; I give you my peaceful feeling” (See: Abstract Nouns)

εἰρήνην ἀφίημι ὑμῖν

Jesus speaks of peace figuratively as if it were an object that he could leave with someone. If this would confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “You will feel peace after I leave” (See: Metaphor)

οὐ καθὼς ὁ κόσμος δίδωσιν, ἐγὼ δίδωμι ὑμῖν

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “I do not give to you peace as the world gives peace” (See: Ellipsis)

οὐ καθὼς ὁ κόσμος δίδωσιν, ἐγὼ δίδωμι ὑμῖν

Here, as the world gives could mean: (1) the manner in which the world gives peace. Alternate translation: “I do not give to you in the manner that the world gives” (2) the type of peace that the world gives. Alternate translation: “I do not give to you the kind of peace that the world gives” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

κόσμος

See how you translated the world in verse 17. (See: Metonymy)

μὴ ταρασσέσθω ὑμῶν ἡ καρδία

See how you translated this clause in verse 1. (See: Metaphor)

John 14:28

ἐγὼ εἶπον ὑμῖν, ὑπάγω καὶ ἔρχομαι πρὸς ὑμᾶς

εἰ ἠγαπᾶτέ με, ἐχάρητε ἄν

Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he knows that the condition is not true. Jesus knows that at this point his disciples don’t truly love him in the way that they should. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If you loved me, but you don’t, you would be glad, but your aren’t” (See: Connect — Contrary to Fact Conditions)

πορεύομαι πρὸς τὸν Πατέρα

Here Jesus implies that he will return to his Father. Alternate translation: “I am going back to the Father” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ Πατὴρ μείζων μού ἐστιν

Here Jesus could mean: (1) that the Father has greater authority than the Son while the Son is on the earth. Alternate translation: “the Father has greater authority than I have here” (2) that Jesus functions in a subordinate role to the Father for all time. Alternate translation: “the role of the Father is superior to the role that I have” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸν Πατέρα…ὁ Πατὴρ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 14:29

εἴρηκα ὑμῖν

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “I have told you this” or “I have told you what will happen” (See: Ellipsis)

John 14:30

ὁ τοῦ κόσμου ἄρχων

Here, the ruler of this world refers to Satan. See how you translated this phrase in 12:31. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐν ἐμοὶ οὐκ ἔχει οὐδέν

Here, has nothing in me means that Satan has no control over Jesus and cannot make him do anything. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he is not able to control me” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 14:31

ἀλλ’ ἵνα γνῷ ὁ κόσμος, ὅτι ἀγαπῶ τὸν Πατέρα, καὶ καθὼς ἐνετείλατο μοι ὁ Πατὴρ, οὕτως ποιῶ

Here, so that introduces a purpose clause. The first event that is done to accomplish this purpose could be: (1) a phrase Jesus left out that can be supplied from the context of the previous verses. Alternate translation: “but the ruler of this world is coming so that the world might know that I love the Father, and just as the Father commanded me, thus I do” or “but these things will happen so that the world might know that I love the Father, and just as the Father commanded me, thus I do” (2) what is stated later in the sentence, in which case the order of the clauses must be changed. Alternate translation: “but just as the Father commanded me, thus I do so that the world might know that I love the Father” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

ὁ κόσμος

See how you translated the world in verse 17. (See: Metonymy)

τὸν Πατέρα…ὁ Πατὴρ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 15

John 15 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

Jesus says he is the vine (15:1–8)
Jesus commands his disciples to love each other (15:9–17)
Jesus promises that his disciples will be persecuted (15:18–16:4)

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Vine

Jesus used the vine as a metaphor for himself. The vine of the grape plant takes water and minerals from the ground and gives them to the leaves and grapes that are on the branches. Without the vine, the branches, grapes, and leaves die. He wanted his followers to know that unless they loved and obeyed him, they would be unable to do anything that pleased God. (See: vine, grape, grapevine, and Metaphor)

“Remain in me”

Jesus uses the word “remain” as a metaphor. He is speaking of a believer being spiritually joined to someone else as if the person “remained” in the other person. Christians are said to “remain” in Christ. The Son is said to “remain” in believers. Many translators will find it impossible to represent these ideas in their languages in exactly the same way. In (15:7), the UST expresses this idea of “my words remain in you” as “obey what I have taught you.” Translators may find it possible to use this translation as a model.

John 15:1

The part of the story from the previous chapter continues. Jesus continues to speak to his disciples either at the end of their evening meal or after they have finished that meal and are walking to Gethsemane. It is unclear whether or not they left immediately after Jesus said “Let us go from here,” at the end of the previous chapter (John 14:31).

ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ἄμπελος ἡ ἀληθινή

Jesus uses the true vine figuratively to refer to himself. As a vine is the source of life for its branches, so Jesus causes people to live in a way that pleases God and brings other people to believe in Jesus. Since the vine is an important metaphor in the Bible, you should translate the words directly or use a simile and not provide a non-figurative explanation in the text of your translation. Alternate translation: “I am like a true vine” (See: Metaphor)

ἡ ἀληθινή

The word translated vine refers specifically to the grapevine plant that produces grapes. If your readers would not be familiar with grapevines, use an equivalent word in your language for a vine that produces fruit. Alternate translation: “grapevine” or “fruit-producing vine” (See: Translate Unknowns)

ὁ Πατήρ μου

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ὁ Πατήρ μου ὁ γεωργός ἐστιν

Jesus uses farmer figuratively to refer to God. Just as a farmer takes care of thevine to ensure it is as fruitful as possible, so God takes care of his people. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “my Father is like a gardener” (See: Metaphor)

ὁ γεωργός

While farmer is a general term for anyone who farms the ground, in this context it refers to someone who takes care of grapevines and grows grapes. Alternate translation: “vine grower” or “grape farmer”

John 15:2

πᾶν κλῆμα ἐν ἐμοὶ μὴ φέρον καρπὸν…καὶ πᾶν τὸ καρπὸν φέρον…ἵνα καρπὸν πλείονα φέρῃ

Jesus speaks about people who claim to be his disciples but are not by continuing the metaphor of a vine. In this paragraph, Jesus uses branch figuratively to refer to both true and false disciples. He also uses bearing fruit, bears fruit, and bear more fruit figuratively to refer to living in a manner that pleases God, especially demonstrating the Christian qualities called the “fruit of the Spirit” in Galatians 5:22–23. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “Everyone who claims to be my disciple but does not please God is like a branch in me that does not bear fruit … and every person who pleases God is like a branch that bears fruit … so that he might be like a branch that bears more fruit” (See: Biblical Imagery — Extended Metaphors)

αἴρει αὐτό

Alternate translation: “he cuts it off of the vine and takes it away” or “he breaks it off of the vine and throws it away”

καθαίρει αὐτὸ

The word translated prunes could mean: (1) to remove excess parts from a plant. Alternate translation: “he trims it” (2) to cause something to become clean. Alternate translation: “he cleans it” (3) to remove excess parts from a plant in order to make it clean. See the discussion of John’s use of double meaning in Part 3 of the Introduction to this book. Alternate translation: “he prunes it so that it will be clean”

John 15:3

ἤδη ὑμεῖς καθαροί ἐστε

The word translated clean is related to the word translated “prunes” in the previous verse. Here Jesus uses clean to imply that the branches have already been cleaned by pruning off the excess parts. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “You are like branches that have already been pruned and are clean” (See: Metaphor)

τὸν λόγον

Here, word refers to the message or teachings of Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: Metonymy)

ὑμεῖς…ὑμῖν

The words You and you in this verse are plural and refer to the disciples of Jesus. (See: Forms of You)

John 15:4

μείνατε ἐν ἐμοί, κἀγὼ ἐν ὑμῖν…ἐν ἐμοὶ μένητε

See how you translated a similar phrase in 6:56. See also the discussion of Remain in me in the General Notes for this chapter. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 15:5

ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ἄμπελος; ὑμεῖς τὰ κλήματα

See how you translated vine in verse 1 and “branch” in verse 2. (See: Metaphor)

ὁ μένων ἐν ἐμοὶ κἀγὼ ἐν αὐτῷ

See how you translated this similar expression in the previous verse. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὗτος φέρει καρπὸν πολύν

See how you translated bears fruit in verse 2. (See: Metaphor)

ποιεῖν οὐδέν

Here Jesus uses do nothing to refer to doing nothing that pleases God. It does not refer to doing nothing at all. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “do nothing that pleases God” or “do nothing acceptable to God” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 15:6

ἐὰν μή τις μένῃ ἐν ἐμοί, ἐβλήθη ἔξω ὡς τὸ κλῆμα καὶ ἐξηράνθη, καὶ συνάγουσιν αὐτὰ καὶ εἰς τὸ πῦρ βάλλουσιν, καὶ καίεται

In the middle of this verse, Jesus changes from referring to the branch in a singular form to a plural form. If this change would be confusing in your language, you could change the singular forms into plural forms. Alternate translation: “If people do not remain in me, they are thrown outside like branches and are dried up, and they gather them into the fire, and they are burned up”

μένῃ ἐν ἐμοί

See how you translated remain in me in the previous two verses. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐβλήθη ἔξω ὡς τὸ κλῆμα καὶ ἐξηράνθη

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the farmer throws him outside like a branch, and he dries up” (See: Active or Passive)

τὸ κλῆμα

Jesus uses branch figuratively to refer to someone who claims to be Jesus’ disciple, but is not. See how you translated the similar use of branch in verse 2. (See: Metaphor)

καὶ συνάγουσιν αὐτὰ καὶ εἰς τὸ πῦρ βάλλουσιν, καὶ καίεται

The first they in this verse refers to an indefinite subject, but the second they refers to the object. If this would be confusing in your language, you could translate them differently. Alternate translation: “and some helpers gather them and throw them into the fire, and they are burned up” or “and someone gathers them and throws them into the fire, and those branches are burned up” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

καίεται

John 15:7

μείνητε ἐν ἐμοὶ

See how you translated remain in me in the previous three verses. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὰ ῥήματά μου ἐν ὑμῖν μείνῃ

This is an idiom that means to obey Jesus. See how you translated a similar expression in 8:31 (See: Idiom)

ὃ ἐὰν θέλητε, αἰτήσασθε

γενήσεται ὑμῖν

John 15:8

ἐν τούτῳ ἐδοξάσθη ὁ Πατήρ μου

Jesus is figuratively using the past tense in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. He is doing this to show that the event will certainly happen. If this is confusing in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “My Father will be glorified in this” (See: Predictive Past)

ἐν τούτῳ ἐδοξάσθη ὁ Πατήρ μου

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You have glorifed my Father in this” (See: Active or Passive)

ὁ Πατήρ μου

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

καρπὸν πολὺν φέρητε

See how you translated a similar expression in verse 5. (See: Metaphor)

γένησθε ἐμοὶ μαθηταί

Alternate translation: “show that you are my disciples” or “demonstrate that you are my disciples”

John 15:9

ὁ Πατήρ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

μείνατε ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ τῇ ἐμῇ

Jesus uses remain in figuratively to refer to continuing in a certain state. Jesus is commanding his disciples to continue being in a close and loving relationship with him by obeying his commands. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “continue having a loving relationship with me” or “live in a way that enables you to continue experiencing my love” (See: Metaphor)

John 15:10

τηρήσητε…τετήρηκα

Here, keep and kept refer to obeying. See how you translated this word in 14:15. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

μενεῖτε ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ μου…μένω αὐτοῦ ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ

See how you translated the similar clause in the previous verse. (See: Metaphor)

τοῦ Πατρός

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 15:11

ταῦτα λελάληκα ὑμῖν, ἵνα ἡ χαρὰ ἡ ἐμὴ ἐν ὑμῖν ᾖ

Alternate translation: “I have told you these things so that you will have the same kind of joy that I have”

καὶ ἡ χαρὰ ὑμῶν πληρωθῇ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that you will be completely joyful” or “so that you will be joyful to the fullest extent” (See: Active or Passive)

John 15:13

μείζονα ταύτης ἀγάπην οὐδεὶς ἔχει, ἵνα τις τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ θῇ ὑπὲρ τῶν φίλων αὐτοῦ

Alternate translation: “The greatest love a person can have for his friends is to voluntarily die for them” or “The best way that a person can show that he loves his friends is to willingly die for them”

τὴν ψυχὴν

Here, life refers to physical life. It does not refer to eternal life. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “physical life” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ θῇ

See how you translated the similar phrase in 10:11. (See: Euphemism)

John 15:15

τοῦ Πατρός μου

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 15:16

καρπὸν φέρητε

In this verse, bear fruit could mean: (1) preach the gospel to people who respond by trusting in Jesus, as suggested by the use of go before bear. Alternate translation: “would lead people to believe in me” (2) live in a manner that pleases God, as bear fruit is used in verses 2–8. Alternate translation: “would do what pleases God” (See: Metaphor)

καὶ ὁ καρπὸς ὑμῶν μένῃ

Here, remain means to last forever. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and your fruit should last forever” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἵνα ὅ τι ἂν αἰτήσητε

Here, so that introduces a purpose clause. It could mean: (1) the content of this clause is the purpose for Jesus choosing his disciples. Alternate translation: “and he chose you so that whatever you would ask” (2) the content of this clause is the purpose for the disciples’ fruit remaining. Alternate translation: “and this fruit would remain so that whatever you would ask” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

τὸν Πατέρα

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου

See how you translated in my name in 14:13. (See: Idiom)

John 15:17

ταῦτα

Here, These things could refer to: (1) the commands Jesus referred to in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “These commands” (2) the command in the second half of this verse. Alternate translation: “This”

John 15:18

εἰ ὁ κόσμος ὑμᾶς μισεῖ

Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If the world hates you, and it does hate you” (See: Connect — Factual Conditions)

ὁ κόσμος

Here Jesus uses world figuratively to refer to the people in the world who oppose God. See how you translated this in 14:17. (See: Metonymy)

John 15:19

εἰ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου ἦτε

Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that his disciples are not from the world. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If you were from the world, but you are not” (See: Connect — Contrary to Fact Conditions)

τοῦ κόσμου…ὁ κόσμος…τοῦ κόσμου…τοῦ κόσμου…ὁ κόσμος

See how you translated the world in the previous verse. (See: Metonymy)

ὅτι δὲ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου οὐκ ἐστέ, ἀλλ’ ἐγὼ ἐξελεξάμην ὑμᾶς ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου, διὰ τοῦτο μισεῖ ὑμᾶς ὁ κόσμος

If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “But because you are not from the world, this world hates you, but I chose you from the world” (See: Information Structure)

John 15:20

μνημονεύετε τοῦ λόγου οὗ ἐγὼ εἶπον ὑμῖν

Here, Jesus uses word figuratively to refer to what he says later in this sentence. If this use of word might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Remember the teaching that I said to you” (See: Metonymy)

οὐκ ἔστιν δοῦλος μείζων τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ

See how you translated this in 13:16. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

εἰ τὸν λόγον μου ἐτήρησαν…τηρήσουσιν

See how you translated a similar phrase in 8:51. (See: Metonymy)

John 15:21

ταῦτα πάντα ποιήσουσιν εἰς ὑμᾶς

Here, all these things refers to the bad things Jesus told his disciples that the unbelievers in the world would do to them in verses 18–20. If this use of these things might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they will hate and persecute you” (See: Metonymy)

διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου

Here, Jesus uses my name figuratively to refer to himself. People will make his followers suffer because they belong to him. If this use of name would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “because you belong to me” (See: Metonymy)

τὸν πέμψαντά με

Here, the one who sent me refers to God. See how you translated it in 4:34. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 15:22

εἰ μὴ ἦλθον καὶ ἐλάλησα αὐτοῖς

Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he knows that the condition is not true. He knows that he did come and speak to the world. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If I had not come and spoken to them, but I did” (See: Connect — Contrary to Fact Conditions)

ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν

Jesus speaks figuratively of sin as if it were an object that a person could possess. See how you translated a similar phrase in 9:41. (See: Metaphor)

ἁμαρτίαν…ἁμαρτίας

Here, Jesus uses sin to refer specifically to the sin of rejecting Jesus and his teachings. It does not refer to sin in general, because everyone is guilty of sin. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the sin of rejecting me and my teachings … sin of rejecting me” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 15:23

τὸν Πατέρα

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 15:24

εἰ τὰ ἔργα μὴ ἐποίησα ἐν αὐτοῖς ἃ οὐδεὶς ἄλλος ἐποίησεν, ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν…δὲ

If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Because I have done the works that no one else did among them, they have sin, and” (See: Double Negatives)

εἰ τὰ ἔργα μὴ ἐποίησα ἐν αὐτοῖς ἃ οὐδεὶς ἄλλος ἐποίησεν, ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν

Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he knows that the condition is not true. He has done works that no one else did among the people. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If I had not done the works that no one else did among them, but I did, they would have no sin, but they do have sin” (See: Connect — Contrary to Fact Conditions)

ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν

See how you translated this in 15:22. (See: Metaphor)

καὶ ἑωράκασιν

The object of the verb seen could be: (1) the works referred to earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “they have both seen the works” (2) Jesus and the Father, referred to at the end of the verse. Alternate translation: “they have both seen me and my Father” (See: Ellipsis)

τὸν Πατέρα μου

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 15:25

ὁ λόγος

Here, Jesus uses word figuratively to refer to a specific prophecy in the Old Testament. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the prophecy” (See: Metonymy)

ὁ λόγος ὁ ἐν τῷ νόμῳ αὐτῶν γεγραμμένος

Here Jesus uses the word that is written to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Psalm 35:19 or 69:4). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that John is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “the statement that has been written in their scriptures” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

πληρωθῇ ὁ λόγος ὁ ἐν τῷ νόμῳ αὐτῶν γεγραμμένος

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they might fulfill the word that a prophet wrote in their law” (See: Active or Passive)

τῷ νόμῳ

Jesus is using the name of the first part of the Hebrew Scriptures, the law, to represent the entire Hebrew Scriptures in general. See how you translated a similar expression in 10:34. (See: Synecdoche)

ἐμίσησάν με δωρεάν

This sentence is a quotation from Psalm 35:19 or 69:4. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

John 15:26

ὁ Παράκλητος

See how you translated this in 14:16. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Πατρός…Πατρὸς

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

τὸ Πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας

See how you translated the Spirit of Truth in 14:17. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 15:27

ἀρχῆς

Here Jesus uses beginning figuratively to refer to the first days of his ministry. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the very first days when I began teaching the people and doing miracles” (See: Metonymy)

John 16

John 16 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

Jesus promises that his disciples will be persecuted (15:18–16:4)
Jesus describes the work of the Holy Spirit (16:5–15)
Jesus says that he will return to his Father (16:16–28)
Jesus says that his disciples will soon abandon him (16:29–33)

Special Concepts in this Chapter

The Holy Spirit

Jesus told his disciples that he would send the Holy Spirit to them. The Holy Spirit is the Helper (14:16) who is always with God’s people to help them and to speak to God for them. He is also the Spirit of Truth (14:17) who tells God’s people what is true about God so they know him better and serve him well. (See: Holy Spirit, Spirit of God, Spirit of the Lord, Spirit)

“The hour is coming”

Jesus used the words, “the hour is coming,” to begin prophecies about events that were about to occur. He is not referring to the 60 minute hour, but to a point in time when these prophecies will be fulfilled. “The hour” in which people would persecute his followers (16:2) lasted for many years. However, “the hour” in which his disciples would scatter and leave him alone (16:32) was less than sixty minutes long. (See: prophet, prophecy, prophesy, seer, prophetess)

Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

Simile

Jesus said that just as a woman is in pain when she gives birth to a baby, so also his followers would be sad when he died. But just as the woman is happy after the baby is born, so also his followers would be happy when Jesus became alive again. (See: Simile)

John 16:1

Verses 1–4 are part of the same topic Jesus began in 15:18. He is speaking about the persecution that his disciples will experience.

ταῦτα

Here, these things refers to what Jesus has just said in 15:18–25 about the coming persecution of his disciples. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the warnings that you will be hated by everyone” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

μὴ σκανδαλισθῆτε

Here, Jesus uses fall away figuratively to refer to no longer trusting in him or no longer being his disciple. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you might not stop trusting me” or “you might not stop being my disciple” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 16:2

ἀποσυναγώγους

See how you translated a similar phrase in 9:22. (See: Metaphor)

ἔρχεται ὥρα

See how you translated this in 4:21 and see the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to Chapter 4. (See: Metonymy)

ἵνα πᾶς ὁ ἀποκτείνας ὑμᾶς

Here, for could indicate: (1) time, as in the UST. (2) an explanation of to what an hour refers. Alternate translation: “that everyone who kills you wants” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

John 16:3

Πατέρα

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 16:4

ταῦτα λελάληκα ὑμῖν

Here, these things refers to what Jesus has just said in 16:2–3 regarding what the Jews will do to his disciples. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I have told you that the Jews will persecute you” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὅταν ἔλθῃ ἡ ὥρα αὐτῶν

See how you translated hour in verse 2. (See: Metonymy)

ἐξ ἀρχῆς

See how you translated beginning in 15:27. (See: Metonymy)

John 16:5

τὸν πέμψαντά με

Here, the one who sent me refers to God. See how you translated this phrase in 4:34. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

καὶ οὐδεὶς ἐξ ὑμῶν ἐρωτᾷ

Here Jesus uses and to emphasize his surprise that they are not asking him where he is going, as they had done previously in 13:36 and 14:5. Use a natural form in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “but none of you are even asking” or “but how is it that none of you asks” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐρωτᾷ με, ποῦ ὑπάγεις

John 16:6

ἡ λύπη πεπλήρωκεν ὑμῶν τὴν καρδίαν

Jesus speaks of sadness figuratively as if it were a thing that could fill someone. If this use of sadness would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “your heart is very sad” (See: Metaphor)

ἡ λύπη πεπλήρωκεν ὑμῶν τὴν καρδίαν

See how you translated heart in 14:1. (See: Metaphor)

John 16:7

ἐὰν…μὴ ἀπέλθω, ὁ Παράκλητος οὐκ ἐλεύσεται πρὸς ὑμᾶς

If it would be more natural in your language, you can translate this double negative expression in a positive form. Alternate translation: “the Helper will come to you only if I go away” (See: Double Negatives)

Παράκλητος

See how you translated Helper in 14:26.

John 16:8

ἐκεῖνος

Here, that one refers to the Holy Spirit, who is called “the Helper” in the previous verse. If this use of that one might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

κόσμον

See how you translated this in 1:29. (See: Metonymy)

περὶ ἁμαρτίας, καὶ περὶ δικαιοσύνης, καὶ περὶ κρίσεως

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of sin, righteousness, and judgment, you could express the same ideas in other ways. Alternate translation: “about what is sinful and about what is righteous and about the fact that God will judge them” (See: Abstract Nouns)

περὶ δικαιοσύνης

Here, righteousness could refer to: (1) God’s righteousness, which the world does not have. Alternate translation: “about the righteousness that the world lacks” (2) the false righteousness in the world, such as the actions of the Pharisees, which people thought were righteous. Alternate translation: “about the world’s false righteousness” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 16:9

περὶ ἁμαρτίας μέν, ὅτι οὐ πιστεύουσιν εἰς ἐμὲ

Alternate translation: “about their sinfulness, because they are guilty of sin by not believing in me”

John 16:10

περὶ δικαιοσύνης

See how you translated the phrase about righteousness in verse 8. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Πατέρα

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

οὐκέτι θεωρεῖτέ με

Jesus uses this phrase to imply that anyone who could see him saw true righteousness. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you will no longer see my righteous example” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 16:11

περὶ…κρίσεως

See how you translated the phrase about judgment in verse 8. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ ἄρχων τοῦ κόσμου τούτου

Here, the ruler of this world refers to Satan. See how you translated this in 12:31. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ ἄρχων τοῦ κόσμου τούτου κέκριται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “God has judged the ruler of this world” (See: Active or Passive)

κέκριται

This could mean: (1) Satan has already been condemned to future judgment. Alternate translation: “has already been condemned” (2) Satan’s future judgment is so certain that Jesus uses the past tense. Alternate translation: “will be judged” (See: Predictive Past)

John 16:13

τὸ Πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας

See how you translated the phrase the Spirit of Truth in 14:17. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁδηγήσει ὑμᾶς ἐν τῇ ἀληθείᾳ πάσῃ

Here, truth refers to true information about Jesus and God. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will guide you into all truth about me” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀφ’ ἑαυτοῦ

See how you translated this phrase in 5:19. Alternate translation: “on his own authority” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὅσα ἀκούσει, λαλήσει

Jesus implies that God the Father will speak to the Spirit. If this might confuse to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will say whatever God tells him to say” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὰ ἐρχόμενα

Alternate translation: “things that are about to happen” or “things that will soon take place”

John 16:14

ἐκεῖνος

Here, that one refers to the Holy Spirit, who is called “the Spirit of Truth” in the previous verse. If this use of that one might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐκ τοῦ ἐμοῦ

Here, the things of mine could refer to: (1) what Jesus has said. Alternate translation: “the things I have said” (2) who Jesus is and what he has said and done. Alternate translation: “my true identity and the things I have done” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 16:15

Πατὴρ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἐκ τοῦ ἐμοῦ

See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 16:16

οὐκέτι θεωρεῖτέ με

Here Jesus uses see in the present tense to refer to something that will happen in the near future. If this is confusing in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “you will no longer see me” (See: Predictive Past)

John 16:17

τί ἐστιν τοῦτο ὃ λέγει ἡμῖν, μικρὸν καὶ οὐ θεωρεῖτέ με; καὶ πάλιν μικρὸν καὶ ὄψεσθέ με; καί ὅτι ὑπάγω πρὸς τὸν Πατέρα

If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “What is this that he says to us when he says that in a little while we will not see him, and again a little while and we will see him, and also says that it is because he goes to the Father” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

τί ἐστιν τοῦτο ὃ λέγει ἡμῖν

The disciples use this clause to indicate that they do not understand what Jesus has just said about his death that will happen soon. Use the most natural way in your language to express this confusion. Alternate translation: “What is he talking about when he says to us” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

μικρὸν καὶ οὐ θεωρεῖτέ με; καὶ πάλιν μικρὸν καὶ ὄψεσθέ με

See how you translated the similar statement in the previous verse.

ὅτι ὑπάγω πρὸς τὸν Πατέρα

See how you translated this statement in verse 10.

τὸν Πατέρα

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 16:18

τὸ μικρόν

See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse.

John 16:19

περὶ τούτου ζητεῖτε μετ’ ἀλλήλων, ὅτι εἶπον, μικρὸν καὶ οὐ θεωρεῖτέ με; καὶ πάλιν μικρὸν καὶ ὄψεσθέ με?

Jesus is using this question to get his disciples to focus on what he has just told them so that he can give an explanation. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are seeking among yourselves concerning this, that I said, ‘A little while and you do not see me, and again a little while and you will see me.’” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ὅτι εἶπον

The word that introduces a clause that explains to what the preceding this refers. Use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation or elaboration in your language. Alternate translation: “namely, that I said,” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

μικρὸν καὶ οὐ θεωρεῖτέ με; καὶ πάλιν μικρὸν καὶ ὄψεσθέ με

See how you translated this statement in verses 16.

John 16:20

ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν

Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in 1:51. (See: Doublet)

ὁ δὲ κόσμος χαρήσεται

Here Jesus uses world figuratively to refer to the people in the world who oppose God. See how you translated this is 14:17. (See: Metonymy)

ὑμεῖς λυπηθήσεσθε

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You will have grief” or “What happens will grieve you” (See: Active or Passive)

ἡ λύπη ὑμῶν εἰς χαρὰν γενήσεται

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of sorrow and joy, you could express the same ideas in other ways. Alternate translation: “you will change from being sorrowful to being joyful” (See: Abstract Nouns)

John 16:21

ἡ γυνὴ ὅταν τίκτῃ, λύπην ἔχει, ὅτι ἦλθεν ἡ ὥρα αὐτῆς; ὅταν δὲ γεννήσῃ τὸ παιδίον, οὐκέτι μνημονεύει τῆς θλίψεως διὰ τὴν χαρὰν, ὅτι ἐγεννήθη ἄνθρωπος εἰς τὸν κόσμον

Jesus is speaking of women in general, not of one particular woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a more natural expression. Alternate translation: “When women give birth, they have pain because their hour has come, but when they have given birth to their children, they no longer remember their suffering, because of the joy that men have been born into the world” (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

ἡ ὥρα αὐτῆς

Here, her hour refers to the time when the woman gives birth. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the time for her to give birth” (See: Metonymy)

οὐκέτι μνημονεύει τῆς θλίψεως

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of suffering, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “she no longer remembers that she suffered” (See: Abstract Nouns)

John 16:22

χαρήσεται ὑμῶν ἡ καρδία

See how you translated heart in 14:1. (See: Metaphor)

John 16:23

ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ

Here, in that day refers to the time that Jesus’ disciples would see him again after his resurrection. See how you translated this phrase in 14:20. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν

Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in 1:51. (See: Doublet)

τὸν Πατέρα

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου

See how you translated the phrase in my name in 14:13. (See: Idiom)

John 16:24

ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου

See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: Idiom)

ἡ χαρὰ ὑμῶν ᾖ πεπληρωμένη

See how you translated a similar phrase in 15:11. (See: Active or Passive)

John 16:25

παροιμίαις…παροιμίαις

See how you translated this phrase in 10:6. (See: Parables)

ἔρχεται ὥρα

See how you translated this in 4:21 and see the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to Chapter 4. (See: Metonymy)

παρρησίᾳ περὶ τοῦ Πατρὸς ἀπαγγελῶ ὑμῖν

Alternate translation: “I will tell you about the Father in a way that you will clearly understand.”

Πατρὸς

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 16:26

ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ

See how you translated this phrase in 14:20. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου

See how you translated this phrase in 14:13. (See: Idiom)

οὐ λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι ἐγὼ ἐρωτήσω τὸν Πατέρα

Here Jesus implies that he will not have to ask the Father on behalf of his disciples, because they can ask God directly after Jesus becomes alive again. If this statement would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I do not say to you that I will need to ask the Father” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Πατέρα

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 16:27

ὁ Πατὴρ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 16:28

τοῦ Πατρὸς…τὸν Πατέρα

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

εἰς τὸν κόσμον…ἀφίημι τὸν κόσμον

Here, world refers to the earth on which people live. It does not refer to the people in the world or to the entire universe. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the earth … I am leaving the earth” (See: Metonymy)

John 16:29

λέγουσιν

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

παροιμίαν

See how you translated this word in verse 25. (See: Parables)

John 16:30

οὐ χρείαν ἔχεις, ἵνα τίς σε ἐρωτᾷ

By saying that Jesus does not need anyone to ask him questions, his disciples are implying that Jesus already knows what people will ask him before they ask. Since he already knows what they will ask him, he does not need them to ask him. If this statement would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “So, now you finally place your trust in me!” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 16:31

ἄρτι πιστεύετε?

This could mean: (1) Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize what he is saying. Alternate translation: “So, now you finally place your trust in me!” (2) Jesus is asking a question in order to express doubt that the disciples really believe in him, since he knows they will soon leave him. Alternate translation: “Do you really trust me now” (See: Rhetorical Question)

John 16:32

ἔρχεται ὥρα

See how you translated this phrase in verse 25. (See: Metonymy)

καὶ ἐλήλυθεν

Here Jesus uses has come in the past tense to refer to something that will happen in the very near future. If this use of has come might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and will come right away” (See: Predictive Past)

σκορπισθῆτε

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “others will scatter you” (See: Active or Passive)

εἰς τὰ ἴδια

Alternate translation: “each of you to his own place” or “every one of you to his own place”

ὁ Πατὴρ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 16:33

ἵνα ἐν ἐμοὶ εἰρήνην ἔχητε

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun peace in another way. Alternate translation: “so that you might experience a peaceful feeling in me” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

εἰρήνην ἔχητε…θλῖψιν ἔχετε

Here, Jesus speaks figuratively of peace and troubles as if they were objects that someone can possess. If these uses of peace and troubles might confuse your readers, you could use different expressions. Alternate translation: “you might be peaceful … you experience troubles” (See: Metaphor)

ἐν ἐμοὶ

Here, in me refers to being united with Jesus or having a close relationship with him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “because of your relationship with me” (See: Idiom)

ἐγὼ νενίκηκα τὸν κόσμον

Here Jesus uses world figuratively to refer to the people in the world who oppose God. See how you translated this is 14:17. (See: Metonymy)

John 17

John 17 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

This chapter is one long prayer that can be divided into three parts according to the topics of Jesus’ prayer requests:

Jesus prays for himself (17:1–5)
Jesus prays for his disciples (17:6–19)
Jesus prays for all Christians (17:20–26)

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Glory

Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, bright light that visually represents how great God is. When people see this light, they are afraid. In this chapter Jesus asks God to show his followers his true glory (17:1). (See: glory, glorious, glorify)

Jesus is eternal

Jesus existed before God created the world (17:5). John wrote about this in 1:1.

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

Prayer

Jesus is God’s one and only Son (3:16), so he could pray differently from the way other people pray. He used many words that might seem to be commands. Your translation should make Jesus sound like a son speaking with love and respect to his father and telling him what the father needs to do so that the father will be honored.

John 17:1

The part of the story from the previous chapter continues. Jesus had been speaking to his disciples, but now he begins to pray to God.

ταῦτα ἐλάλησεν

Here, these things refers to everything that Jesus told his disciples in chapters 13–16. If this use of these things might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “described what would happen to him and his disciples” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐπάρας τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτοῦ

See how you translated this idiom in 6:5. (See: Idiom)

εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν

Here, heaven refers to the sky. The Jews believed that heaven, the place where God dwells, was located above the sky. If this use of heaven might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “beyond the sky toward God in heaven” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Πάτερ…Υἱὸς

Father and Son are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἐλήλυθεν ἡ ὥρα

Here, Jesus uses hour figuratively to refer to the time when Jesus would suffer and die. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the time for me to suffer and die has come” (See: Metonymy)

δόξασόν

Glorify here is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please glorify” (See: Imperatives — Other Uses)

σου τὸν Υἱόν…ὁ Υἱὸς

Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: First, Second or Third Person)

John 17:2

καθὼς ἔδωκας αὐτῷ ἐξουσίαν πάσης σαρκός

Here, since indicates that this clause is the reason for the request given in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because you gave him authority over all flesh” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

αὐτῷ…αὐτῷ…δώσῃ

Throughout this verse Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: First, Second or Third Person)

πάσης σαρκός

Jesus is describing people figuratively by referring to something associated with them, the flesh that they are made of. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “over all human beings” (See: Metonymy)

John 17:3

αὕτη δέ ἐστιν ἡ αἰώνιος ζωὴ

The clause could mean: (1) the rest of the verse describes what eternal life is. Alternate translation: “Now this is what it means to have eternal life” (2) the rest of the verse describes the means by which one receives eternal life. Alternate translation: “Now this is how people live forever”

ὃν ἀπέστειλας, Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν

Jesus uses the one whom you sent and Jesus Christ to refer to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: First, Second or Third Person)

John 17:4

τὸ ἔργον…ὃ δέδωκάς μοι

Here, Jesus uses work figuratively to refer to Jesus’ entire ministry while on the earth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ministry that you have given me here” (See: Metonymy)

John 17:5

δόξασόν με σύ, Πάτερ, παρὰ σεαυτῷ, τῇ δόξῃ ᾗ εἶχον…παρὰ σοί

Here, with yourself and with you refer to Jesus and God the Father being physically near to each other. If this use of with might be confusing to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Father, glorify me at your side with the glory that I had at your side” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Πάτερ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

δόξασόν

Here, glorify is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please glorify” (See: Imperatives — Other Uses)

τῇ δόξῃ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “with the glorious characteristics” (See: Abstract Nouns)

πρὸ τοῦ τὸν κόσμον, εἶναι

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “before we made the world” (See: Active or Passive)

John 17:6

ἐφανέρωσά σου τὸ ὄνομα

Jesus uses name figuratively to refer to God himself. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I revealed you” (See: Metonymy)

ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου

See how you translated world in 1:29. (See: Metonymy)

τὸν λόγον σου τετήρηκαν

See how you translated a similar phrase in 8:51. (See: Metonymy)

John 17:8

τὰ ῥήματα

See how you translated words in 5:47. (See: Metonymy)

John 17:9

τοῦ κόσμου

Here Jesus uses world figuratively to refer to the people in the world who oppose God. See how you translated this in 14:17. (See: Metonymy)

John 17:10

δεδόξασμαι ἐν αὐτοῖς

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they glorify me” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐν αὐτοῖς

This could mean: (1) all things are the means by which Jesus is glorified. Alternate translation: “by means of them” (2) Jesus is glorified in all things. Alternate translation: “within them” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 17:11

οὐκέτι εἰμὶ…πρὸς σὲ ἔρχομαι

Here Jesus uses am in the present tense to refer to something that will happen in the near future. If this is confusing in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “I will no longer … I am about to come to you” (See: Predictive Past)

ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ, καὶ αὐτοὶ ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ εἰσίν

Here Jesus uses world figuratively to refer to both being on the earth and being among the people in the world who oppose God. If this use of world would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in this world with people who oppose you, but they are in this hostile world” (See: Metonymy)

Πάτερ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

τήρησον

Here, keep is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please keep” (See: Imperatives — Other Uses)

τήρησον αὐτοὺς ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί σου

Here, name could refer to: (1) God’s power. Alternate translation: “keep them by your power” (2) God himself, as in verse 6. In this case, Jesus would be requesting that God keep his disciples united with God. Alternate translation: “keep them in unity with you” (See: Metonymy)

John 17:12

ἐγὼ ἐτήρουν αὐτοὺς ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί σου

See how you translated a similar phrase in the previous verse. (See: Metonymy)

οὐδεὶς ἐξ αὐτῶν ἀπώλετο, εἰ μὴ ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας

Here Jesus uses perished and destruction figuratively to refer to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If this use of these words might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not one of them died spiritually, except for the son of spiritual death” or “not one of them experienced spiritual death, except for the son of spiritual death” (See: Metaphor)

οὐδεὶς ἐξ αὐτῶν ἀπώλετο, εἰ μὴ ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας

Jesus uses the past tense perished to refer to eternal punishment as if it had already happened, even though the son of destruction had not yet perished. If this use of the past tense might confuse your readers, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “not one of them will perish, except for the son of destruction” (See: Predictive Past)

ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας

Here, son of destruction refers to Judas, the disciple who betrayed Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Judas, the son of destruction” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας

Here, son of is an idiom used to describe what a person is like. The defining characteristic of Judas was that he would be destroyed because he betrayed Jesus. If this use of son of might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one characterized by destruction” (See: Idiom)

ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of destruction, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the son that must be destroyed” or “the son whom you will destroy”(See: Abstract Nouns)

ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that he would fulfill the scripture” (See: Active or Passive)

John 17:13

τῷ κόσμῳ

See how you translated the world in verse 11. (See: Metonymy)

ἵνα ἔχωσιν τὴν χαρὰν τὴν ἐμὴν, πεπληρωμένην ἐν ἑαυτοῖς

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that I might give them my full joy” (See: Active or Passive)

John 17:14

τὸν λόγον σου

See how you translated your word in verse 6. (See: Metonymy)

ὁ κόσμος…ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου…ἐγὼ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου

Here, the world refers to the people in the world who oppose God. If this use of the world might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people who oppose you … from those who oppose you … I am not from them” (See: Metonymy)

οὐκ εἰσὶν ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου, καθὼς ἐγὼ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου

The phrase from the world could refer to: (1) the place where the subject belongs. Alternate translation: “they do not belong to the world, just as I do not belong to the world” (2) the origin of the subject. Alternate translation: “they did not come from the world, just as I did not come from the world” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 17:15

τοῦ κόσμου

Here Jesus uses world figuratively to refer to both being on the earth and being among the people in the world who oppose God. See how you translated this use of world in verse 11. (See: Metonymy)

τηρήσῃς αὐτοὺς ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ

Here, the evil one refers to Satan. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you would keep them from Satan, the evil one” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 17:16

ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου οὐκ εἰσὶν, καθὼς ἐγὼ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου

See how you translated from the world in verse 14. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 17:17

ἁγίασον

Sanctify is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please sanctify” (See: Imperatives — Other Uses)

ἁγίασον αὐτοὺς ἐν τῇ ἀληθείᾳ

The phrase by the truth could refer to: (1) the means by which Jesus’ disciples would be sanctified. Alternate translation: “Sanctify them by means of the truth” (2) the realm in which Jesus’ disciples would be sanctified. Alternate translation: “Sanctify them in the truth” (3) both the means and realm of the disciples’ sanctification. Alternate translation: “Sanctify them by means of and in the truth” See the discussion of John’s use of double meaning in Part 3 of the Introduction to this book. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ λόγος ὁ σὸς

See how you translated your word in verse 6. (See: Metonymy)

John 17:18

εἰς τὸν κόσμον

Here, the world refers to the people who live in the world. See how you translated the world in 1:29. (See: Metonymy)

John 17:19

ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν ἐγὼ ἁγιάζω ἐμαυτόν

Jesus uses the phrases for their sakes and sanctified together to refer to his sacrificial death on the cross. If this clause might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “for their sakes I have sanctified myself to die as a sacrifice” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἵνα ὦσιν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἡγιασμένοι ἐν ἀληθείᾳ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that they may also sanctify themselves in truth” (See: Active or Passive)

ἡγιασμένοι ἐν ἀληθείᾳ

The phrase in truth could refer to: (1) the means by which Jesus’ disciples would be sanctified. Alternate translation: “sanctified by means of truth” (2) the nature or degree of their sanctification. Alternate translation: “truly sanctified” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 17:20

διὰ τοῦ λόγου αὐτῶν

Here, word refers to the message that Jesus and his disciples proclaimed. If this use of word might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “through their message” (See: Metonymy)

John 17:21

ἵνα…ἵνα

The first that in this verse indicates one of Jesus’ prayer requests, namely, that all those who believe in Jesus would be united to each other. The second that indicates another prayer request, namely, that all those who believe in Jesus would be united to Jesus and God the Father. If this would not be clear in your language, you could make these two prayer requests more explicit by making them into two sentences. Alternate translation: “I request that … I also request that” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

σύ, Πάτερ, ἐν ἐμοὶ, κἀγὼ ἐν σοί

These two phrases mean basically the same thing. See how you translated a similar phrase in 10:38. Alternate translation: “you, Father, and I are completely joined together as one” (See: Doublet)

Πάτερ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἵνα ὁ κόσμος πιστεύῃ ὅτι σύ με ἀπέστειλας

Here, so that could indicate: (1) that what follows is the purpose for believers to be united to Jesus and God the Father, as in the UST. (2) that what follows is the result of believers being united to Jesus and God the Father. Alternate translation (with a comma preceding): “with the result that the world would believe that you have sent me”

ὁ κόσμος

Here, the world is used figuratively to refer to all the people in the world. See how you translated the world in 1:29. (See: Metonymy)

John 17:22

κἀγὼ τὴν, δόξαν ἣν δέδωκάς μοι, δέδωκα αὐτοῖς

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “I have also given to them the glory that you gave to me” or “I have honored them just as you have honored me” (See: Information Structure)

John 17:23

ἐγὼ ἐν αὐτοῖς

This verse explains the statement “they would be one, just as we are one,” which is in the previous verse. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I mean that I am in them” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἵνα ὦσιν τετελειωμένοι εἰς ἕν

Here, so that indicates that this is the second purpose for Jesus giving the glory he received from God to those who believe in him, which he stated in the previous verse. If this use of so that might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly by repeating the idea from the previous verse and starting a new sentence. Alternate translation: “I have given them your glory so that they may be completely united” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

ἵνα γινώσκῃ ὁ κόσμος ὅτι σύ με ἀπέστειλας

Here, so that could refer to: (1) the purpose for those who believe in Jesus being complete as one. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of the world knowing that you send me” (2) a third purpose for Jesus giving the glory he received from God to those who believe in him. This interpretation would require making a new sentence. Alternate translation: “I have also given them your glory so that the world may know that you sent me” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

ὁ κόσμος

See how you translated the world in verse 21. (See: Metonymy)

ἠγάπησας αὐτοὺς

Here, them refers to those who believe in Jesus, just like them does at the beginning of the verse. These believers are also the main subject of Jesus’ prayer in verses 20–26. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you loved those who believe in me” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 17:24

Πάτερ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ὅπου εἰμὶ ἐγὼ

Jesus uses where I am to refer to heaven. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “where I am in heaven” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πρὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of foundation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “before we founded the world” (See: Abstract Nouns)

κόσμου

Here, world refers to the universe that God created. It does not refer only to the people in the world or only to the earth. Alternate translation: “the whole universe” (See: Metonymy)

John 17:25

Πάτερ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ὁ κόσμος σε οὐκ ἔγνω

Here, the world refers to the people in the world who are opposed to God. Alternate translation: “those who are against you did not know you” (See: Metonymy)

John 17:26

τὸ ὄνομά

Here, name refers to God himself. See how you translated this word in verse 6. (See: Metonymy)

ἡ ἀγάπη ἣν ἠγάπησάς με, ἐν αὐτοῖς ᾖ

Here Jesus speaks of God’s love figuratively as if it were an object that could be inside a person. If this use of love might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they may love others in the same way that you have loved me” or “the love with which you have loved me may be experienced by them” (See: Metaphor)

κἀγὼ ἐν αὐτοῖς

Here, Jesus uses the word in to express the close personal relationship between himself and those who believe in him. See how you translated a similar phrase in 10:38. (See: Idiom)

John 18

John 18 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

Soldiers and guards arrest Jesus (18:1–11)
The priests question Jesus, and Peter denies Jesus (18:12–27)
Pilate questions Jesus (18:28–40)

Special Concepts in this Chapter

“It is not lawful for us to put any man to death”

The Roman government did not allow the Jews to kill criminals, so the Jews needed to ask Pilate, the governor, to kill him (18:31).

King of the Jews

When Pilate asked if Jesus were the King of the Jews (18:33), he was asking if Jesus were claiming to be a political leader like King Herod, whom the Romans allowed to rule Judea. When he asked the crowd if he should release the King of the Jews (18:39), he is mocking the Jews, because the Romans and Jews hated each other. He was also mocking Jesus, because he did not think that Jesus was a king at all. (See: Irony)

John 18:1

Verses 1–2 give background information for the events that follow. Verse 1 says where the events took place. Verse 2 gives background information about Judas. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

ταῦτα εἰπὼν, Ἰησοῦς

John uses this phrase to mark the beginning of a new event that happened soon after the events that the story has just told. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Soon after Jesus spoke these words, he” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

τοῦ χειμάρρου τοῦ Κεδρὼν

John is using of to describe a brook that is called Kidron. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the Kidron Brook” or “the brook that people called ‘Kidron’” (See: Possession)

τοῦ χειμάρρου τοῦ Κεδρὼν

Kidron is a valley in Jerusalem that is between the Temple Mount and the Mount of Olives. (See: How to Translate Names)

ὅπου ἦν κῆπος

The word translated garden can refer to a place with flowers, vegetables, or trees. Matthew 26:36 and Mark 14:32 indicate that the garden that Jesus and his disciples went to was a grove of olive trees. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “where there was a grove of olive trees” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 18:3

ὑπηρέτας

See how you translated this word in 7:32.

ἔρχεται

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

John 18:4

εἰδὼς πάντα τὰ ἐρχόμενα ἐπ’ αὐτὸν

Here, knowing introduces a clause that indicates the reason why Jesus went out to meet the soldiers and guards. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “since he knew all things happening to him” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

John 18:5

Ἰησοῦν τὸν Ναζωραῖον

The soldiers and guards call Jesus the Nazarene because he was from the town of Nazareth in Galilee. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a more natural expression in your language. Alternate translation: “Jesus, from the town of Nazareth” (See: How to Translate Names)

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ἐγώ εἰμι

This could mean: (1) Jesus is just answering their question. In this case he is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Alternate translation: “I am he” or “I am whom you are looking for” (2) Jesus is not only answering their question but also identifying himself as Yahweh, who identified himself to Moses as “I AM” in Exodus 3:14. Alternate translation: “I am God” or “I am the I AM” (See: Ellipsis)

ἵστήκει δὲ καὶ Ἰούδας, ὁ παραδιδοὺς αὐτὸν, μετ’ αὐτῶν

In this sentence John provides background information about Judas’ location when he was betraying Jesus. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Now Judas was also there with them to betray Jesus” (See: Background Information)

John 18:6

ἐγώ εἰμι

See how you translated I am in the previous verse. (See: Ellipsis)

ἔπεσαν χαμαί

Here John implies that the men fell to the ground involuntarily because of Jesus’ power. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “fell to the ground because of Jesus’ power” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 18:7

Ἰησοῦν τὸν Ναζωραῖον

See how you translated Jesus the Nazarene in verse 5. (See: How to Translate Names)

John 18:8

ἐγώ εἰμι

See how you translated I am in verse 5. (See: Ellipsis)

John 18:9

In this verse John provides some background information about Jesus fulfilling Scripture. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

ἵνα πληρωθῇ ὁ λόγος ὃν εἶπεν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “This happened in order to fulfill the word that he had said” (See: Active or Passive)

ὁ λόγος ὃν εἶπεν

Here, the word refers to what Jesus said while praying to God the Father in 17:12. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “what he had said when he was praying to his Father” (See: Metonymy)

John 18:10

Σίμων…Πέτρος

See how you translated Simon Peter in 1:40. (See: How to Translate Names)

μάχαιραν

The word translated sword here refers to a small sword that is similar to a dagger or long knife. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “a dagger” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Μάλχος

Malchus is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

John 18:11

τὸ ποτήριον ὃ δέδωκέν μοι ὁ Πατὴρ, οὐ μὴ πίω αὐτό?

Jesus is using the form of a question to add emphasis to his statement. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I should certainly drink the cup that the Father has given to me!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τὸ ποτήριον ὃ δέδωκέν μοι ὁ Πατὴρ, οὐ μὴ πίω αὐτό

Here Jesus uses cup figuratively to refer to the sufferings he will soon experience as if they were a cup of bitter-tasting liquid that God would give him to drink. If this use of cup and drink would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “My suffering which the Father wants me to endure, should I certainly not endure it” (See: Metaphor)

Πατὴρ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 18:12

τῶν Ἰουδαίων

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in 1:19. (See: Synecdoche)

ἔδησαν αὐτὸν

The soldiers tied Jesus’ hands together in order to prevent him from escaping. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “tied his hands to prevent him from escaping” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 18:13

Ἅνναν…τοῦ Καϊάφα

Annas and Caiaphas are names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

πρὸς Ἅνναν πρῶτον, ἦν γὰρ πενθερὸς τοῦ Καϊάφα, ὃς ἦν ἀρχιερεὺς τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ ἐκείνου

Usually there would only have been one high priest, but at this time the Romans were appointing the high priests for Judea, and it caused a controversy. One Roman official had appointed Annas, but ten years later another official deposed him and caused Caiaphas to be high priest instead. However, the Jews still considered Annas to be high priest. It would probably be best to state the matter as simply as possible for your readers. Alternate translation: “first to the high priest Annas, for he was the father-in-law of Caiaphas, who was the other high priest that year” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 18:14

In this verse John interrupts the main storyline in order to provide some background information about Caiaphas. This information helps the reader understand why they took Jesus to Caiaphas. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις

See how you translated to the Jews in verse 12. (See: Synecdoche)

συμφέρει ἕνα ἄνθρωπον ἀποθανεῖν ὑπὲρ τοῦ λαοῦ

See how you translated the similar clause in 11:50.

συμφέρει ἕνα ἄνθρωπον ἀποθανεῖν ὑπὲρ τοῦ λαοῦ

Caiaphas is leaving out a clause that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from his original statement in 11:50. Alternate translation: “it would be better for one man to die on behalf of the people than to let the Romans kill all of the Jewish people” (See: Ellipsis)

John 18:15

Σίμων Πέτρος

See how you translated Simon Peter in 1:40. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἠκολούθει…τῷ Ἰησοῦ…ἄλλος μαθητής. ὁ δὲ μαθητὴς ἐκεῖνος ἦν γνωστὸς τῷ ἀρχιερεῖ, καὶ συνεισῆλθεν

Here, another disciple and that disciple could refer to: (1) the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. This interpretation would mean that these phrases would be similar to the phrase “the other disciple, whom Jesus loved” that occurs in (20:2). Alternate translation: “I, another disciple, followed Jesus. Now I was known to the high priest, and I entered” (2) an unknown disciple. Alternate translation: “a certain disciple, followed Jesus. Now that other disciple was known to the high priest, and he entered” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ δὲ μαθητὴς ἐκεῖνος ἦν γνωστὸς τῷ ἀρχιερεῖ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Now the high priest knew that disciple” (See: Active or Passive)

τῷ ἀρχιερεῖ…τοῦ ἀρχιερέως

In verses 15–23, the high priest refers to Annas, which is indicated in verse 13. It does not refer to Caiaphas. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the high priest Annas … of Annas” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 18:16

ὁ μαθητὴς ὁ ἄλλος

See how you translated the other disciple in the previous verse. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὅς ἦν γνωστὸς τοῦ ἀρχιερέως

John 18:17

λέγει…λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

μὴ καὶ σὺ ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν εἶ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τούτου?

The female servant is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that she believes Peter is one of Jesus’ disciples. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are certainly also from the disciples of this man!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

John 18:18

In this verse John interrupts the main storyline in order to provide some background information about the people who were warming themselves around the fire. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

ἵστήκεισαν δὲ οἱ δοῦλοι καὶ οἱ ὑπηρέται, ἀνθρακιὰν πεποιηκότες, ὅτι ψῦχος ἦν, καὶ ἐθερμαίνοντο

If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “Now because it was cold, the servants and the officers had made a charcoal fire and were standing there, warming themselves” (See: Information Structure)

οἱ δοῦλοι

Here, the servants refers to the personal servants of the high priest. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the servants of the high priest” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 18:19

ὁ…ἀρχιερεὺς

According to 18:13 the high priest here is Annas. He would later send Jesus to Caiaphas in verse 24. If this use of high priest might confuse your readers, you could state who the person is explicitly. Alternate translation: “Annas, the high priest” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 18:20

τῷ κόσμῳ

Here Jesus uses the world figuratively to refer to all of the people in the world. If this use of world would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: Metonymy)

ἐγὼ παρρησίᾳ λελάληκα τῷ κόσμῳ

Here, to the world is an exaggeration that Jesus uses to emphasize that he spoke publicly. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows emphasis. Alternate translation: “I have spoken openly to the people” or “I have spoken openly for everyone to hear” (See: Hyperbole)

ἐν συναγωγῇ

Jesus is speaking of synagogues in general, not of one particular synagogue. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “in synagogues” (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

ὅπου πάντες οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι συνέρχονται

Here, all the Jews is an exaggeration that Jesus uses to emphasize that Jesus spoke where many Jewish people could hear him. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows emphasis. Alternate translation: “where so many Jews come together” (See: Hyperbole)

οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish people in general. It does not refer to the Jewish leaders. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 18:21

τί με ἐρωτᾷς?

Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. The Jewish law required the Jewish leaders to question witnesses first in legal cases. Therefore, Jesus is using this question to emphasize that the Jewish leaders are breaking their own law by questioning him instead of questioning witnesses. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not be asking me these questions!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἴδε

Jesus uses Behold to call attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. Alternate translation: “Take notice” (See: Metaphor)

John 18:22

ἔδωκεν ῥάπισμα τῷ Ἰησοῦ εἰπών

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “gave Jesus a slap and said” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

οὕτως ἀποκρίνῃ τῷ ἀρχιερεῖ?

The officer is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation, and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not answer the high priest in this manner!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

John 18:23

μαρτύρησον περὶ τοῦ κακοῦ

Alternate translation: “tell me what I said that was wrong”

εἰ δὲ καλῶς, τί με δέρεις?

Jesus is using the form of a question to add emphasis to what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “but if rightly, you should not strike me!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

John 18:24

ὁ Ἅννας…πρὸς Καϊάφαν τὸν ἀρχιερέα

For political reasons both Annas and Caiaphas were high priests at this time. See how you translated these names in verse 13. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 18:25

δὲ

Now here indicates that John is changing topics to return to the story about Peter in the high priest’s courtyard. Verses 25–27 describe what Peter was doing in the courtyard while the high priest was questioning Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “In the meantime,” or “While Jesus was being questioned,” (See: Connect — Simultaneous Time Relationship)

μὴ καὶ σὺ ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ εἶ?

Someone in the high priest’s courtyard is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that he believes Peter is one of Jesus’ disciples. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are certainly also from the disciples of this man!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

John 18:26

οὐκ ἐγώ σε εἶδον ἐν τῷ κήπῳ μετ’ αὐτοῦ?

One of the high priest’s servants is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that he believes Peter is one of Jesus’ disciples. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I surely saw you in the garden with him” (See: Rhetorical Question)

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

τῷ κήπῳ

See how you translated garden in verse 1. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 18:27

πάλιν οὖν ἠρνήσατο Πέτρος

Here it refers to Peter knowing and being with Jesus. If this use of it might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter then denied again that he knew Jesus or had been with him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀλέκτωρ

See how you translated rooster in 13:38. (See: Translate Unknowns)

John 18:28

Here John changes topics from describing what Peter was doing to describing what was happening to Jesus. In the next section, Jesus’ accusers bring him to Caiaphas to be questioned by him.

ἄγουσιν

Here, they refers to the Jewish leaders and temple guards who were accusing Jesus. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish authorities and their guards led” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἄγουσιν οὖν τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἀπὸ τοῦ Καϊάφα

Here John implies that they are leading Jesus away from Caiaphas’ house. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then they led Jesus from Caiaphas’ house” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

εἰς τὸ πραιτώριον

The governor’s palace refers to the headquarters of the Roman governor. The next verse indicates that the Roman governor’s name was Pilate. If this would confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the house of the Roman governor, Pilate” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἦν δὲ πρωΐ. καὶ αὐτοὶ οὐκ εἰσῆλθον εἰς τὸ πραιτώριον, ἵνα μὴ μιανθῶσιν, ἀλλὰ φάγωσιν τὸ Πάσχα

In this sentence John interrupts the main storyline in order to provide some background information about why the Jewish people with Jesus did not enter the governor’s palace. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

αὐτοὶ οὐκ εἰσῆλθον εἰς τὸ πραιτώριον, ἵνα μὴ μιανθῶσιν, ἀλλὰ φάγωσιν τὸ Πάσχα

If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “they remained outside the governor’s palace so that they would remain ceremonially clean, and might eat the Passover” (See: Double Negatives)

αὐτοὶ οὐκ εἰσῆλθον εἰς τὸ πραιτώριον, ἵνα μὴ μιανθῶσιν, ἀλλὰ φάγωσιν τὸ Πάσχα

Pilate, the Roman governor, was not a Jew. The Jewish leaders believed that they would become ceremonially unclean if they entered the house of someone who was not a Jew. If they became ceremonially unclean, then they would not be allowed to celebrate the Passover festival. Therefore, the Jewish leaders did not enter the governor’s palace. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain this in the simplest way possible. Alternate translation: “they themselves did not enter into the governor’s palace because the governor was a Gentile. They believed that entering a Gentile’s home would defile them, so that they would not be allowed to eat the Passover.” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸ Πάσχα

John is using the name of this part of the festival, Passover, to refer figuratively to the meal that people shared on that occasion. If your readers might not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal” (See: Metonymy)

John 18:29

ὁ Πειλᾶτος

Pilate is the name of a man. He was the Roman governor. (See: How to Translate Names)

τίνα κατηγορίαν φέρετε κατὰ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τούτου

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of accusation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “What crime do you accuse this man of committing” (See: Abstract Nouns)

John 18:30

οὗτος

Here the Jewish leaders say this one as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus without saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “this so-and-so” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

εἰ μὴ ἦν οὗτος κακὸν ποιῶν, οὐκ ἄν σοι παρεδώκαμεν αὐτόν

The Jewish leaders are making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but they are already convinced that the condition is not true. They have concluded that Jesus is an evildoer. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If this one were not an evildoer, but he is, we would not have handed him over to you, but we did” (See: Connect — Contrary to Fact Conditions)

εἰ μὴ ἦν οὗτος κακὸν ποιῶν, οὐκ ἄν σοι παρεδώκαμεν αὐτόν

If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “This man is an evildoer, so we have brought him to you” (See: Double Negatives)

John 18:31

εἶπον αὐτῷ οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in 1:19. (See: Synecdoche)

ἡμῖν οὐκ ἔξεστιν ἀποκτεῖναι οὐδένα

According to Roman law, the Jews could not put anyone to death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “According to Roman law, it is not lawful for us to put anyone to death” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 18:32

In this verse John interrupts the main storyline in order to provide some background information about Jesus predicting how he would die. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

ἵνα ὁ λόγος τοῦ Ἰησοῦ πληρωθῇ

σημαίνων ποίῳ θανάτῳ ἤμελλεν ἀποθνῄσκειν

Here, kind of death refers to the manner in which Jesus would die. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to indicate in what manner he was about to die” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 18:33

ἐφώνησεν τὸν Ἰησοῦν

Here, summoned implies that Pilate ordered some of his soldiers to bring Jesus to him inside his headquarters. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “ordered his soldiers to bring Jesus inside to him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 18:34

ἀπὸ σεαυτοῦ

Here, from indicates the origin of Pilate’s question. Jesus is asking Pilate if the question Pilate asked in the previous verse was his own idea. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “based on your own idea” or “on your own initiative” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 18:35

μήτι ἐγὼ Ἰουδαῖός εἰμι?

Pilate is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that he was not interested in Jewish religious disagreements. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Well I am certainly not a Jew, and I have no interest in these matters!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τὸ ἔθνος τὸ σὸν

Here, nation refers to the people who were part of the Jewish nation. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Your fellow Jews” (See: Metonymy)

John 18:36

ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου τούτου

See how you translated from this world in 8:23. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τοῦ κόσμου τούτου…τοῦ κόσμου τούτου…ἐντεῦθεν

In this verse, Jesus uses this world and here figuratively to refer to everything in the universe that has been corrupted by sin and is hostile to God. See how you translated a similar use of this world in 8:23. (See: Metonymy)

εἰ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου τούτου ἦν ἡ βασιλεία ἡ ἐμή, οἱ ὑπηρέται οἱ ἐμοὶ ἠγωνίζοντο ἄν, ἵνα μὴ παραδοθῶ τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις

Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he already knows that the condition is not true. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If my kingdom were from this world, but it is not, my servants would fight so that I would not be handed over to the Jews, but they do not” (See: Connect — Contrary to Fact Conditions)

ἵνα μὴ παραδοθῶ τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that someone would not have handed me over to the Jews” (See: Active or Passive)

τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in 1:19. (See: Synecdoche)

John 18:37

σὺ λέγεις ὅτι βασιλεύς εἰμι

Here Jesus is probably answering Pilate’s question in the affirmative. However, since he doesn’t clearly say, ‘Yes, I am a king,’ you do not need to explain the meaning further here. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

ἐγὼ εἰς τοῦτο γεγέννημαι, καὶ εἰς τοῦτο ἐλήλυθα εἰς τὸν κόσμον

These two phrases mean the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Jesus came to the earth to tell people the truth about God. If stating the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “For this reason I came here” (See: Parallelism)

τὸν κόσμον

Here, world refers to the universe that God created. It does not refer only to the people in the world or only to the earth. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the universe” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τῇ ἀληθείᾳ

Here, truth refers to what Jesus reveals about God, which would include his plan for forgiving sinful people through Jesus’ death on the cross. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of truth, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to the true things about God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ὁ ὢν ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας

This phrase is an idiom that refers to someone who believes the truth about God. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “who believes the truth” (See: Idiom)

ἀκούει

Here, hears means to listen to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. See how you translated this word in 8:43. Alternate translation: “heeds” (See: Metaphor)

μου τῆς φωνῆς

Jesus uses voice figuratively to refer to what Jesus says. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the things I say” or “to me” (See: Synecdoche)

John 18:38

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

τί ἐστιν ἀλήθεια?

Pilate is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that he does not believe anyone really knows what truth is. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one can know the truth!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἀλήθεια

Here, truth refers to any true information. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of truth, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “What is true” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τοὺς Ἰουδαίους

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in 1:19. (See: Synecdoche)

ἐγὼ οὐδεμίαν αἰτίαν εὑρίσκω ἐν αὐτῷ

Pilate speaks figuratively of guilt as if it were an object that can be inside a person. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “I find no evidence that he is guilty of any crime” (See: Metaphor)

John 18:39

ἕνα ἀπολύσω ὑμῖν

Pilate implies that he would release a prisoner when the Jewish leaders asked him to do so. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would release one prisoner to you at your request” or “I would release one prisoner to you when you asked” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐν τῷ Πάσχα

Here, the Passover refers to the entire Passover festival. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the Passover festival” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 18:40

ἐκραύγασαν…πάλιν λέγοντες

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “they cried out again and said” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

μὴ τοῦτον, ἀλλὰ τὸν Βαραββᾶν

The Jewish leaders are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Do not release this one, but release Barabbas” (See: Ellipsis)

τοῦτον

ἦν δὲ ὁ Βαραββᾶς λῃστής

In this sentence John provides background information about Barabbas. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

τὸν Βαραββᾶν…ὁ Βαραββᾶς

Barabbas is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

λῃστής

The word usually translated robber can also refer to an insurrectionist, as is indicated by the description of Barabbas in Mark 15:7. Alternate translation: “an insurrectionist”

John 19

John 19 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

Soldiers beat and mock Jesus (19:1–3)
The Jewish leaders convince Pilate to crucify Jesus (19:4–16)
Soldiers crucify Jesus (19:17–27)
Jesus dies on the cross (19:28–37)
Jesus’ friends put his body in a tomb (19:38–42)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text in order to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 19:24, which are words from the Old Testament.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

“Purple garment”

Purple is a color that is from a mixture of red and blue. The soldiers mocked Jesus by putting a purple garment on him. This was because kings wore purple garments. They spoke and acted like they were giving honor to a king, but everyone knew that they were doing it because they hated Jesus. (See: Irony)

“You are not Caesar’s friend”

Pilate knew that Jesus was not a criminal, so he did not want to have his soldiers kill him. But the Jews told him that Jesus was claiming to be a king, and anyone who did that was breaking Caesar’s laws (19:12).

Ancient Jewish burial customs

According to the burial customs of that time, a dead person’s family would wrap the dead body with many strips of linen cloth and place it on a table inside a tomb. The tomb was either a cave or a room cut out of the side a large rock. According to Jewish tradition, the body was left to decompose in the tomb for one year. Then the family would then place the bones in a stone box. If your readers would be unfamiliar with these burial customs, then you may need to provide explanations in your translation or in a note for verses 39–42.

The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried (19:41) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

Sarcasm

The soldiers were insulting Jesus when they said, “Hail, King of the Jews.” Pilate was insulting the Jews when he asked, “Should I crucify your king?” He was probably also insulting both Jesus and the Jews when he wrote, “Jesus of Nazareth, King of the Jews.” (See: Irony)

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

Gabbatha, Golgotha

John explained the meanings of these two Aramaic words (“The Pavement” and “The Place of a Skull”). Then he used Greek letters to express the sound of these words. You should also use the letters of your language to express the sounds of these Aramaic words.

John 19:1

The part of the story from the previous chapter continues. Pilate has been speaking outside his headquarters with the Jewish leaders who are accusing Jesus.

ὁ Πειλᾶτος

See how you translated Pilate in 18:29. (See: How to Translate Names)

τότε οὖν ἔλαβεν ὁ Πειλᾶτος τὸν Ἰησοῦν καὶ ἐμαστίγωσεν

Pilate himself did not whip Jesus. John uses Pilate to refer to the soldiers whom Pilate ordered to whip Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Pilate then ordered his soldiers to take Jesus and whip him” (See: Synecdoche)

John 19:2

πλέξαντες στέφανον ἐξ ἀκανθῶν

John uses thorns to refer to small branches with thorns on them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “twisted together a crown from thorny branches” (See: Synecdoche)

ἐπέθηκαν αὐτοῦ τῇ κεφαλῇ, καὶ ἱμάτιον πορφυροῦν περιέβαλον αὐτόν

In Roman culture, a crown and purple garment were worn by kings. The soldiers put a crown made from thorns and a purple garment on Jesus in order to mock him. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. See the discussion of this idea in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “They put it on his head and put a purple garment on him in order to ridicule him by pretending that he was a king” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 19:3

καὶ ἔλεγον, χαῖρε, ὁ Βασιλεὺς τῶν Ἰουδαίων

Hail was a common greeting, but the soldiers use this greeting in order to mock Jesus. They also did not believe that Jesus was really the King of the Jews. They actually mean to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of their words. If this might confuse your readers, you could provide a brief explanation. Alternate translation: “and they said in a mocking manner, ‘Hail, King of the Jews’” (See: Irony)

John 19:4

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

αὐτοῖς

The pronoun them refers to the Jewish leaders who had brought Jesus to Pilate. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the Jewish authorities” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

αἰτίαν ἐν αὐτῷ οὐχ εὑρίσκω

See how you translated a similar clause in 18:38. (See: Metaphor)

John 19:5

ἐξῆλθεν

Your language may state “came” rather than went in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural in your language. (See: Go and Come)

τὸν ἀκάνθινον στέφανον καὶ τὸ πορφυροῦν ἱμάτιον

See how you translated crown, thorns, and purple garment in verse 2. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

John 19:6

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ἐκραύγασαν λέγοντες

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “they cried out and said” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

ἐγὼ…οὐχ εὑρίσκω ἐν αὐτῷ αἰτίαν

See how you translated a similar clause in verse 4 and 18:38. (See: Metaphor)

John 19:7

ἀπεκρίθησαν αὐτῷ οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι

Here, The Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in 1:19. (See: Synecdoche)

Υἱὸν Θεοῦ ἑαυτὸν ἐποίησεν

Here, made himself is an idiom that refers to pretending to be something they think he is not. If this might confuse your readers, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “he pretended to be the Son of God” (See: Idiom)

Υἱὸν Θεοῦ

Son of God is an important title for Jesus. (See: Translating Son and Father)

John 19:8

τοῦτον τὸν λόγον

Here, word refers to what the Jewish leaders said in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “what they said about Jesus claiming to be the Son of God” (See: Metonymy)

μᾶλλον ἐφοβήθη

John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he grew even more afraid of condemning Jesus” or “he grew even more afraid than before of what might happen to him if he condemned Jesus” (See: Ellipsis)

John 19:9

εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ πραιτώριον πάλιν, καὶ λέγει τῷ Ἰησοῦ

John implies that the soldiers brought Jesus back into the governor’s palace so Pilate could speak with him. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he entered into the governor’s palace again and told the soldiers to bring Jesus back inside. Then he says to Jesus” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

John 19:10

ἐμοὶ οὐ λαλεῖς?

Pilate is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize his surprise that Jesus does not answer his question. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I cannot believe you are refusing to speak to me!” or “Answer me!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

οὐκ οἶδας ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχω ἀπολῦσαί σε, καὶ ἐξουσίαν ἔχω σταυρῶσαί σε?

Pilate is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should know that I am able to release you or to order my soldiers to crucify you!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

John 19:11

οὐκ εἶχες ἐξουσίαν κατ’ ἐμοῦ οὐδεμίαν, εἰ μὴ ἦν δεδομένον σοι ἄνωθεν

If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “You only have authority over me because that authority has been given to you from above” (See: Double Negatives)

εἰ μὴ ἦν δεδομένον σοι ἄνωθεν

Here, above is used figuratively to refer to God who dwells in heaven above. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “from heaven” (See: Metaphor)

εἰ μὴ ἦν δεδομένον σοι ἄνωθεν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “except for what God has given to you” (See: Active or Passive)

μείζονα ἁμαρτίαν ἔχει

Jesus speaks figuratively of sin as if it were an object that a person could possess in varying amounts. If this use of sin might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “are more sinful” or “has committed worse sin” (See: Metaphor)

John 19:12

ἐκ τούτου

Here, this refers to Jesus’ answer. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “When Pilate heard Jesus’ answer” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οἱ…Ἰουδαῖοι

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in 1:19. (See: Synecdoche)

τοῦτον

The Jewish leaders say this one as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus and to avoid saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “this so-and-so” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐκραύγασαν λέγοντες

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “cried out and said” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

οὐκ εἶ φίλος τοῦ Καίσαρος

Alternate translation: “you do not support Caesar” or “you are opposing the emperor”

βασιλέα ἑαυτὸν ποιῶν

See how you translated a similar phrase in verse 7. (See: Idiom)

John 19:13

τῶν λόγων τούτων

Here, these words refers to what the Jewish leaders had said in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “what the Jewish leaders said to him” (See: Metonymy)

ὁ…Πειλᾶτος…ἤγαγεν ἔξω τὸν Ἰησοῦν

John implies that Pilateordered his soldiers to bring Jesus out. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “commanded the soldiers to bring Jesus out” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐκάθισεν

Since a person would sit down to teach or make official statements, the phrase sat down here implies that Pilate was going to speak to the people about what he had decided to do with Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he sat down to judge” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐπὶ βήματος

The judgment seat was a special chair in which a leader sat when he was making an official judgment. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of judgment, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in the seat used for judging people” (See: Abstract Nouns)

εἰς τόπον λεγόμενον Λιθόστρωτον

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in a place the people called ‘The Pavement’” (See: Active or Passive)

Ἑβραϊστὶ

See how you translated this phrase in 5:2. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Γαββαθᾶ

Here John writes out the sounds of this Jewish Aramaic word with Greek letters. Since John translates the meaning earlier in the verse, you should write out this word using the most similar sounds in your language.

John 19:14

δὲ

Now marks a break in the storyline. Here John provides information about the upcoming Passover festival and the time of day when Pilate presented Jesus to the Jewish leaders. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

ὥρα ἦν ὡς ἕκτη

In this culture, people counted the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. Here, the sixth hour indicates noon. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “about 12:00 PM”

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

λέγει τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in 1:19. (See: Synecdoche)

John 19:15

ἆρον! ἆρον!

Take him away here implies taking a person away to be executed. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Take him away to be killed! Take him away to be killed!” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

τὸν βασιλέα ὑμῶν σταυρώσω

Pilate uses I to imply that he would order his soldiers to crucify Jesus. Pilate himself did not crucify people. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Should I command my soldiers to crucify your king” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

λέγει αὐτοῖς ὁ Πειλᾶτος, τὸν βασιλέα ὑμῶν σταυρώσω?

Pilate does not believe that Jesus is a king. He actually means to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of his words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could provide a brief explanation. Alternate translation: “Pilate says to them in a mocking manner, ‘Should I crucify your king’” (See: Irony)

John 19:16

τότε…παρέδωκεν αὐτὸν αὐτοῖς, ἵνα σταυρωθῇ

In this verse, the pronouns them and they refer to the Roman soldiers who would crucify Jesus. These pronouns do not refer to “the chief priests” in the previous verse because they did not crucify people. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly, as in the UST. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἵνα σταυρωθῇ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that the soldiers might crucify him” (See: Active or Passive)

ἀπήγαγον

The phrase led him away implies that the soldiers led Jesus away in order crucify him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and led him away to be crucified” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 19:17

εἰς τὸν λεγόμενον, Κρανίου Τόπον, ὃ λέγεται Ἑβραϊστὶ, Γολγοθᾶ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to the place that the people called ‘The Place of a Skull,’ which the Jews call ‘Golgotha’ in Hebrew” (See: Active or Passive)

Ἑβραϊστὶ

See how you translated this phrase in 5:2. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Γολγοθᾶ

Here John writes out the sounds of this Jewish Aramaic word using Greek letters. Since John translates the meaning earlier in the verse, you should write out this word using the most similar sounds in your language.

John 19:18

μετ’ αὐτοῦ ἄλλους δύο

John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “they also crucified two others with him” (See: Ellipsis)

John 19:19

ἔγραψεν…καὶ τίτλον ὁ Πειλᾶτος, καὶ ἔθηκεν ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ

John uses Pilate to imply that Pilate ordered his soldiers to write the title and put it on the cross. Pilate probably would not have done this himself. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Pilate also commanded his soldiers to write a title on a sign and put it on the cross” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ

Here, the cross refers specifically to the cross on which Jesus was crucified. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the cross they used to crucify Jesus” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἦν…γεγραμμένον, Ἰησοῦς ὁ Ναζωραῖος, ὁ Βασιλεὺς τῶν Ἰουδαίων.

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that person wrote on it these words: Jesus the Nazarene, the King of the Jews” (See: Active or Passive)

John 19:20

ὁ τόπος…ὅπου ἐσταυρώθη ὁ Ἰησοῦς

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the place where they crucified Jesus” (See: Active or Passive)

τῆς πόλεως

Here, the city refers to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the city called Jerusalem” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

καὶ ἦν γεγραμμένον Ἑβραϊστί, Ῥωμαϊστί, Ἑλληνιστί

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The one who prepared the sign wrote the words in three languages: Hebrew, Latin, and Greek” (See: Active or Passive)

Ἑβραϊστί

See how you translated this phrase, in Hebrew, in 5:2. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Ῥωμαϊστί

Latin was the language spoken by the Roman government and Roman soldiers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the language spoken by the Romans” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 19:21

ἔλεγον οὖν τῷ Πειλάτῳ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς τῶν Ἰουδαίων

The chief priests had to go back to Pilate’s headquarters in order to speak to him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then the chief priests of the Jews went back to Pilate and said to him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐκεῖνος

The Jewish leaders say That one as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus and to avoid saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “That so-and-so” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐκεῖνος εἶπεν, Βασιλεὺς εἰμι τῶν Ἰουδαίων

John 19:22

ὃ γέγραφα, γέγραφα

Pilate implies that he will not change the words on the notice. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I have written what I wanted to write, and I will not change it” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὃ γέγραφα, γέγραφα

Pilate uses I to imply that he ordered his soldiers to write the title and put it on the cross. Pilate probably would not have done this himself. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “What I told them to write is what they have written” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 19:23

καὶ τὸν χιτῶνα

The next verse implies that the soldiers kept the tunic separate from the clothes that they divided. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the tunic they did not divide” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

δὲ

There is a break from the main storyline that begins with the word Now and continues to the end of the next verse. In this break John tells us how this event fulfills Scripture. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

ὑφαντὸς δι’ ὅλου

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone had woven it in one piece” (See: Active or Passive)

John 19:24

λάχωμεν περὶ αὐτοῦ, τίνος ἔσται

The soldiers are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. The soldiers will cast lots and the winner will receive the shirt. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “we should cast lots for it in order to decide whose it will be” or “we should cast lots for it and the winner will get to keep it” (See: Ellipsis)

λάχωμεν περὶ αὐτοῦ…ἔβαλον κλῆρον

The term lots refers to objects with different markings on various sides that were used to decide randomly among several possibilities. They were tossed onto the ground to see which marked side would come up on top. If your readers would not be familiar with lots, you could use a general expression for gambling. Alternate translation: “we should gamble for it … gambled” (See: Translate Unknowns)

ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ ἡ λέγουσα

Here John uses that the scripture would be fulfilled to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Psalm 22:18). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “This happened so that what is written in the Psalms might be fulfilled” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ ἡ λέγουσα

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “This fulfilled the scripture that said” (See: Active or Passive)

διεμερίσαντο τὰ ἱμάτιά μου ἑαυτοῖς, καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν ἱματισμόν μου ἔβαλον κλῆρον

In these phrases, John quotes Psalm 22:19. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

John 19:25

τῷ σταυρῷ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ

John is using of to describe the cross on which the soldiers had crucified Jesus. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the cross on which Jesus was crucified” (See: Possession)

Μαρία ἡ Μαγδαληνή

Mary is the name of a woman, and Magdalene most likely means that she came from the town of Magdala. (See: How to Translate Names)

John 19:26

τὸν μαθητὴν…ὃν ἠγάπα

See how you translated a similar phrase in 13:23. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

γύναι

See how you translated Woman in 2:4.

ἰδοὺ, ὁ υἱός σου

Here, Jesus uses son figuratively to indicate that he wants his disciple, John, to be like a son to his mother. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “here is the man who will act like a son to you” (See: Metaphor)

John 19:27

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

τῷ μαθητῇ…ἔλαβεν ὁ μαθητὴς αὐτὴν εἰς τὰ ἴδια

In this verse, the disciple and his refer to John, who calls himself “the disciple whom he loved” in the previous verse and who is the author of this Gospel. If this would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the disciple whom Jesus loved … that disciple took her into his own home” or “to me … I took her into my own home” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἴδε, ἡ μήτηρ σου

Here, Jesus uses mother figuratively to indicate that he wants his mother to be like a mother to his disciple, John. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “here is the woman who will be like a mother to you” (See: Metaphor)

ἀπ’ ἐκείνης τῆς ὥρας

Here, hour refers to a point in time. It does not refer to a 60-minute length of time. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from that time” (See: Metonymy)

John 19:28

μετὰ τοῦτο

After this introduces a new event that happened soon after the events the story has just told. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Soon afterward” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

ἤδη πάντα τετέλεσται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he had already completed all things” (See: Active or Passive)

πάντα

Here, all things refers to everything that God sent Jesus to the world to do. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “all the things that God had sent him to do” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τελειωθῇ ἡ Γραφὴ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he might fulfill the scripture” (See: Active or Passive)

ἵνα τελειωθῇ ἡ Γραφὴ

Here John uses that the scripture might be completed to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Psalm 69:21).If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “so that what is written in the Psalms might be fulfilled” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

John 19:29

σκεῦος ἔκειτο ὄξους μεστόν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Someone had placed there a container full of sour wine” (See: Active or Passive)

ὄξους…τοῦ ὄξους

Here, sour wine refers to the inexpensive wine that common people in Jesus’ culture would usually drink to quench thirst. Therefore, the person who gave Jesus this sour wine was acting kindly and responding to what he had said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of common wine … of that wine” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

σπόγγον οὖν μεστὸν τοῦ ὄξους ὑσσώπῳ περιθέντες

John implies that someone dipped the sponge into the container full of sour wine so that the sponge would be full of the sour wine. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “so having dipped a sponge in the container so that it was full of sour wine, they put it on a hyssop” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

σπόγγον

A sponge is a small object that can soak up and hold liquid that comes out of it when the sponge is squeezed. If your readers would not be familiar with this thing, you could use the name of something your readers would use for soaking up liquid, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “something to soak up liquid” (See: Translate Unknowns)

ὑσσώπῳ

Here, hyssop refers to the stalk from a plant that grows in Israel. Matthew and Mark called this stalk a “reed” in Matthew 27:48 and Mark 15:36. If your readers would not be familiar with this plant, you could use the name of a plant in your area that has stalks or reeds, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a reed of a plant called hyssop” (See: Translate Unknowns)

John 19:30

τὸ ὄξος

See how you translated this phrase, the sour wine, in the previous verse. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τετέλεσται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The thing Jesus finished could be: (1) all the work that God had sent Jesus to the world to do. This interpretation would connect this phrase to the statement Jesus made in 17:4 when he said that he had “completed the work” that God had given him to do. Alternate translation: “I finished all that I came here to do” (2) all the Old Testament prophecies about what Jesus would do the first time he came to the earth. This interpretation would connect this phrase to the statement in verse 28, “knowing that all things had already been completed, so that the scripture might be completed.” Alternate translation: “I completed all that the scripture has said about me” (See: Active or Passive)

παρέδωκεν τὸ πνεῦμα

This clause is an idiom that means “willingly die.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “he allowed himself to die” (See: Idiom)

John 19:31

οἱ οὖν Ἰουδαῖοι, ἐπεὶ παρασκευὴ ἦν, ἵνα μὴ μείνῃ ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ τὰ σώματα ἐν τῷ Σαββάτῳ (ἦν γὰρ μεγάλη ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνου τοῦ Σαββάτου), ἠρώτησαν τὸν Πειλᾶτον, ἵνα κατεαγῶσιν αὐτῶν τὰ σκέλη, καὶ ἀρθῶσιν

If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “Then, because it was the day of preparation, the Jews asked Pilate that the men’s legs would be broken and they would be taken away, so that the bodies would not remain on the cross during the Sabbath (for that Sabbath was an especially important day)” (See: Information Structure)

οἱ…Ἰουδαῖοι

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in 1:19. (See: Synecdoche)

παρασκευὴ

Here, day of preparation refers to the day when the Jewish people prepared for both the Passover festival and the Sabbath. See how you translated a similar phrase in verse 14. Alternate translation: “the day when the Jews prepared for both the Passover festival and the Sabbath” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἵνα μὴ μείνῃ ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ τὰ σώματα ἐν τῷ Σαββάτῳ

According to Jewish religious law, dead bodies could not remain on crosses during the Sabbath. Therefore, the Jewish leaders wanted Pilate to order his soldiers to execute the three men on crosses and remove their bodies before the Sabbath began at sundown. If this clause might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that the bodies would not remain on the cross during the Sabbath, which the Jewish law forbids” or “so that the bodies would not remain on the cross during the Sabbath and thereby violate Jewish law” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ

John is speaking of the three crosses on which the men were hanging. He is not referring to one particular cross. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “on the three crosses” (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

ἦν γὰρ μεγάλη ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνου τοῦ Σαββάτου

John notes that this Sabbath was an especially important day because it was the first day of the Passover celebration. If this statement would confuse your readers, express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “for that Sabbath was especially important because it occurred during the Passover festival” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἵνα κατεαγῶσιν αὐτῶν τὰ σκέλη, καὶ ἀρθῶσιν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to have someone break their legs and take them away” (See: Active or Passive)

κατεαγῶσιν αὐτῶν τὰ σκέλη, καὶ ἀρθῶσιν

The Jewish leaders wanted Pilate’s soldiers to break the legs of the men who were hanging on crosses because doing that would cause the men to die quickly. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “their legs would be broken so that they would die quickly and their bodies could be taken away” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 19:32

τοῦ ἄλλου τοῦ συνσταυρωθέντος αὐτῷ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “of the other man with whom they had crucified him” (See: Active or Passive)

John 19:35

This verse is a break from the main storyline in which John provides some background information about himself. John is telling readers that they can trust what he has written because he saw these events happen. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

ὁ ἑωρακὼς…αὐτοῦ…ἐκεῖνος οἶδεν ὅτι ἀληθῆ λέγει

This phrase refers to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. He is speaking of himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the one who saw this … my … I know that I speak the truth” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

ἵνα καὶ ὑμεῖς πιστεύητε

John is leaving out some of the words that this clause would need in many languages in order to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “so that you would also believe that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: Ellipsis)

John 19:36

Verses 36–37 are another break from the main storyline in which John tells us that the two events in verses 33–34 made some prophecies in scripture come true. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

ἐγένετο…ταῦτα, ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ

Here John uses that the scripture would be fulfilled to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Psalm 34:20). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “these things happened in order that what is written in the Psalms might be fulfilled” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

ἐγένετο…ταῦτα

Here, these things refers to the two events described in verses 33–34. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the soldiers did not break Jesus’ legs but pierced his side” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in order to fulfill the words that someone wrote in scripture” (See: Active or Passive)

ὀστοῦν οὐ συντριβήσεται αὐτοῦ

This sentence is a quotation from Psalm 34:20. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

ὀστοῦν οὐ συντριβήσεται αὐτοῦ

This is a quotation from Psalm 34:20. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “No one will break even one of his bones” (See: Active or Passive)

John 19:37

ἑτέρα Γραφὴ λέγει

Here John uses another scripture says to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Zechariah 12:10). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “the prophet Zechariah wrote in another scripture that” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

ὄψονται εἰς ὃν ἐξεκέντησαν

This sentence is a quotation from Zechariah 12:10. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

John 19:38

μετὰ…ταῦτα

After this introduces a new event that happened soon after the events the story has just told. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “soon afterward” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

Ἰωσὴφ ὁ ἀπὸ Ἁριμαθαίας

Since Luke 23:50 indicates that Joseph was a member of the Sanhedrin, he was likely dwelling in Jerusalem. Therefore, John would mean here that Joseph was originally from Arimathea. Joseph had not come from Arimathea to Jerusalem for this occasion. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Joseph, who was originally from Arimathea” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Ἰωσὴφ

Pilate is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

Ἰωσὴφ ὁ ἀπὸ Ἁριμαθαίας

Arimathea was a city in Judea. Alternate translation: “Joseph who was from the city called Arimathea” (See: How to Translate Names)

διὰ τὸν φόβον τῶν Ἰουδαίων

John is using of to describe the fear that Joseph felt for the Jewish leaders. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “because he feared the Jews” (See: Possession)

διὰ τὸν φόβον τῶν Ἰουδαίων

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in 1:19. (See: Synecdoche)

ἵνα ἄρῃ τὸ σῶμα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ…ἦρεν τὸ σῶμα αὐτοῦ

John implies that Joseph wanted to take away the body of Jesus in order to bury it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that he might take away the body of Jesus in order to bury it … took away and buried his body” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐπέτρεψεν ὁ Πειλᾶτος

John implies that Pilate gave Joseph permission to take away Jesus’ body. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Pilate gave him permission to take away the body of Jesus” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 19:39

Νικόδημος

Nicodemus was one of the Pharisees who respected Jesus. See how you translated this name in 3:1. (See: How to Translate Names)

ὁ ἐλθὼν πρὸς αὐτὸν νυκτὸς τὸ πρῶτον

This clause refers to the meeting between Jesus and Nicodemus that is described in chapter 3. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who had met Jesus before when he visited him at night” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

φέρων μίγμα σμύρνης καὶ ἀλόης

According to the burial customs of Jesus’ time, people prepared this mixture in order to put it on Jesus’ body as a way to honor him and to counteract the smell of decay. If this would confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “bringing a mixture of myrrh and aloes to put on Jesus’ body” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

σμύρνης καὶ ἀλόης

This mixture of myrrh and aloes consisted of pleasant-smelling substances that were mixed together into an ointment that was put on a dead body in order to counteract the smell of decay. If your readers would not be familiar with these substances, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “of pleasant-smelling substances” (See: Translate Unknowns)

ὡς λίτρας ἑκατόν

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this weight in terms of modern measurements either in the text or a footnote. One litra is about one third of a kilogram or three quarters of a pound. Alternate translation: “about 33 kilograms in weight” or “weighing about thirty-three kilograms” (See: Biblical Weight)

John 19:40

ἔδησαν αὐτὸ ὀθονίοις μετὰ τῶν ἀρωμάτων

Wrapping a dead body in strips of cloth was the burial custom in this culture. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. If your readers would not be familiar with such a custom, you could describe it more specifically, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “wrapped strips of linen cloth around his body and put spices under the strips of cloth” (See: Translate Unknowns)

John 19:41

In this verse John interrupts the main storyline in order to provide some background information about the location of the tomb where they would bury Jesus. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

ἦν δὲ ἐν τῷ τόπῳ ὅπου ἐσταυρώθη κῆπος

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Now in the place where they crucified Jesus there was a garden” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐν ᾧ οὐδέπω οὐδεὶς ἦν τεθειμένος

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in which people had not yet buried anyone” (See: Active or Passive)

οὐδέπω οὐδεὶς ἦν τεθειμένος

The phrase no one had yet translates two negative words in Greek. John uses them together to emphasize that the tomb had never been used. If your language can use two negatives together for emphasis without them cancelling each other to create a positive meaning, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: Double Negatives)

John 19:42

διὰ τὴν παρασκευὴν τῶν Ἰουδαίων

According to Jewish law, no one could work after sundown on the day of preparation because sundown marked the beginning of the Sabbath and Passover. This meant that they had to bury Jesus’ body quickly. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because the Passover and Sabbath were about to begin that evening” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐκεῖ…διὰ τὴν παρασκευὴν τῶν Ἰουδαίων, ὅτι ἐγγὺς ἦν τὸ μνημεῖον, ἔθηκαν τὸν Ἰησοῦν

If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “they laid Jesus there because of the day of preparation of the Jews and because the tomb was close by” (See: Information Structure)

τὴν παρασκευὴν τῶν Ἰουδαίων

See how you translated a similar phrase in verse 14. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἔθηκαν τὸν Ἰησοῦν

John is referring to putting Jesus’ dead body in a tomb as laying him down. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant, and it accurately describes the Jewish burial practice of laying a dead body on a table inside the tomb. See how you translated a similar expression in 11:34. Alternate translation: “they entombed Jesus” (See: Euphemism)

John 20

John 20 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

Mary Magdalene, Peter, and John go to Jesus’ tomb and find it empty (20:1–10)
Mary Magdalene meets Jesus (20:11–18)
Ten disciples meet Jesus (20:19–25)
Thomas meets Jesus (20:26–29)
John states the purpose for this Gospel (20:30–31)

Special Concepts in this Chapter

The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried (20:1) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was a room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could look inside or enter.

“Receive the Holy Spirit”

If your language uses the same word for “breath” and “spirit,” be sure that the reader understands that Jesus was performing a symbolic action by blowing air out of his mouth, and that Jesus was referring to the Holy Spirit, not his breath. (See: Symbolic Action and Holy Spirit, Spirit of God, Spirit of the Lord, Spirit)

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

Rabboni

John used Greek letters to express the sound of this Aramaic word. Then he explained that the word means “Teacher.” You should also use the letters of your language to express the sounds of the Aramaic word.

Jesus’ resurrection body

We do not know what Jesus’ body looked like after he became alive again. His disciples knew he was Jesus because they could see his face and touch the places where the soldiers had put the nails through his hands and feet and pierced his side. However, he could also walk through solid walls and doors and sometimes people didn’t recognize him. It is best not to say more than what the ULT says about Jesus’ resurrection body.

Two angels in white

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about angels in white clothing with the women at Jesus’ tomb. Two of the authors called them men, but that is only because the angels appeared in human forms. Two of the Gospel authors wrote about two angels, but the other two authors wrote about only one of them. It is best to translate each of these passages as it appears in the ULT rather than trying to make the passages all state the exact same thing. (See: Matthew 28:1-2 and Mark 16:5 and Luke 24:4 and John 20:12)

John 20:1

τῇ…μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων

John uses first to imply the first day of the week. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the first day of the week” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τῇ…μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων

Here John is actually using a cardinal number, “one,” to mean first. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can also use a cardinal number here in your translation. Alternate translation: “on day one of the week” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

Μαρία ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ

See how you translated Mary Magdalene in 19:25. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἔρχεται…βλέπει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

βλέπει τὸν λίθον ἠρμένον

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “sees that someone had rolled away the stone” (See: Active or Passive)

John 20:2

τρέχει…ἔρχεται…λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

μαθητὴν ὃν ἐφίλει ὁ Ἰησοῦς

This phrase refers to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. See the discussion of this phrase in Part 1 of the Introduction to the Gospel of John and the General Notes to Chapter 13. See also how you translated similar phrases in 13:23 and 18:15. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

αὐτοῖς

If you translated the other disciple whom Jesus loved with a first person form earlier in the verse, then you will need to use the first person plural “us” here. Alternate translation: “to us” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

αὐτοῖς

If you translated the other disciple whom Jesus loved with a third person form and your language marks the dual form, then the pronoun them here would be in the dual form. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

τὸν Κύριον…αὐτόν

Here Mary speaks of Jesus’ dead body as if it were Jesus himself. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Lord’s body … it” (See: Synecdoche)

οὐκ οἴδαμεν ποῦ ἔθηκαν αὐτόν

When Mary says we, she is speaking of herself and some women who came to the tomb with her. These women are mentioned in Matthew 28:1; Mark 16:1; and Luke 24:1, 10, 24. Since she is not speaking of the two disciples, we is exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

John 20:3

ὁ ἄλλος μαθητής

See how you translated the other disciple in the previous verse. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐξῆλθεν…ἤρχοντο

If you translated the other disciple in the previous verse with a third person form and your language marks the dual form, then the verbs went out and went would be in the dual form here. Alternate translation: “because of his fear for the Jews”. (See: Verbs)

ἤρχοντο

If you translated the other disciple in the previous verse with a third person form and your language marks the dual form, then the pronoun they here would be in the dual form. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἤρχοντο

If you translated the other disciple in the previous verse with a first person singular form, then you will need to use the first person plural “we” here. Alternate translation: “we went” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

John 20:4

ἔτρεχον…οἱ δύο ὁμοῦ, καὶ ὁ ἄλλος μαθητὴς προέδραμεν τάχειον

If you translated the other disciple with a first person form in verse 2, then you will need to use first person pronouns in this verse. Alternate translation: “we were running together, and I quickly ran ahead” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

ὁ ἄλλος μαθητὴς

See how you translated the other disciple in verse 2. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 20:5

βλέπει…οὐ μέντοι εἰσῆλθεν

If you translated the other disciple with a first person form in the previous verse, then you will need to use first person pronouns in this verse. Alternate translation: “I saw … but I did not enter” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

βλέπει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ὀθόνια

Wrapping a dead body in strips of cloth was the burial custom in this culture. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for Chapter 19. If your readers would not be familiar with such a custom, you could describe it more specifically, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the linen cloths in which they had wrapped Jesus’ body for burial” (See: Translate Unknowns)

John 20:6

ἔρχεται…θεωρεῖ

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

αὐτῷ

If you translated the other disciple with a first person form in verse 4, then you will need to use the first person “me” here. (See: First, Second or Third Person)

ὀθόνια

See how you translated linen cloths in the previous verse. (See: Translate Unknowns)

John 20:7

τὸ σουδάριον, ὃ ἦν ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the cloth that someone had put on his head” (See: Active or Passive)

αὐτοῦ

The pronoun his refers to Jesus, not to Peter or John. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly, as in the UST. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ὀθονίων

See how you translated linen cloths in the previous verse. (See: Translate Unknowns)

ἀλλὰ χωρὶς ἐντετυλιγμένον εἰς ἕνα τόπον

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but someone had folded it up in one place by itself” (See: Active or Passive)

John 20:8

ὁ ἄλλος μαθητὴς

See how you translated the other disciple in verse 2. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

εἰσῆλθεν…καὶ εἶδεν καὶ ἐπίστευσεν

If you translated the other disciple with a first person form in this verse, then you will need to use the first person throughout this verse. Alternate translation: “went in, and I saw and believed” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

εἶδεν

John is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he saw the linen cloths where Jesus’ body had lain” (See: Ellipsis)

ἐπίστευσεν

John is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he believed that Jesus had risen from the dead” (See: Ellipsis)

John 20:9

γὰρ

For here indicates that this verse provides background information about the kind of belief that was mentioned in the previous clause. For here does not indicate a reason or cause. At that time, the disciples believed Jesus had risen from the dead only because the tomb was empty. They still did not understand that the scriptures said Jesus would rise from the dead. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “But even then” (See: Background Information)

ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῆναι

Here, rise from the dead is an idiom that refers to a dead person becoming alive again. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “become alive after he died” (See: Idiom)

John 20:10

ἀπῆλθον…πάλιν πρὸς αὑτοὺς

Since the disciples were staying within walking distance of Jesus’ tomb, the homes they went to must have been in Jerusalem. They did not go back to their homes in Galilee. Alternate translation: “went back to where they were staying in Jerusalem” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 20:11

Μαρία

Mary here refers to Mary Magdalene. See how you translated this name in 19:25. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 20:12

θεωρεῖ

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

δύο ἀγγέλους ἐν λευκοῖς

Here, white refers to the color of the clothing that the angels were wearing. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “two angels in white clothing” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἕνα πρὸς τῇ κεφαλῇ, καὶ ἕνα πρὸς τοῖς ποσίν, ὅπου ἔκειτο τὸ σῶμα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ

Here, at the head and at the feet refer to the locations in the tomb where Jesus’ head and feet used to be. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “one at the place of his head and one at the place of his feet where the body of Jesus had been” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἔκειτο

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone had laid” (See: Active or Passive)

John 20:13

λέγουσιν…λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

γύναι

See how you translated the similar use of Woman in 2:4 and 4:21.

τὸν Κύριόν μου…αὐτόν

Here, Mary speaks of Jesus’ dead body as if it were Jesus himself. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “my Lord’s body … it” (See: Synecdoche)

John 20:15

λέγει…λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

γύναι

See how you translated the word Woman in the previous verse.

αὐτόν…αὐτόν…αὐτὸν

κἀγὼ αὐτὸν ἀρῶ

Here Mary Magdalene implies that she would take Jesus’ body away and bury it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and I will take him away and bury him again” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 20:16

λέγει…λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

Ἑβραϊστί, Ραββουνεί (ὃ λέγεται, Διδάσκαλε)

If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “‘Rabboni’ (which means ‘Teacher’ in Hebrew)” (See: Information Structure)

Ἑβραϊστί

See how you translated in Hebrew in 5:2. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Ραββουνεί

Here John writes out the sounds of this Jewish Aramaic word with Greek letters. Since John translates the meaning later in the verse, you should write out this word using the most similar sounds in your language.

John 20:17

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

τὸν Πατέρα…τὸν Πατέρα μου…Πατέρα ὑμῶν

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

τοὺς ἀδελφούς μου

Jesus used the word my brothers here to refer to his disciples. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “my disciples, who are like brothers,” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

εἰπὲ αὐτοῖς, ἀναβαίνω πρὸς τὸν Πατέρα μου, καὶ Πατέρα ὑμῶν, καὶ Θεόν μου, καὶ Θεὸν ὑμῶν

If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “say to them that I go up to my Father and your Father, and my God and your God” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

ἀναβαίνω

Here Jesus uses the present tense I go up to refer to something that will happen in the near future. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the future tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “I will go up” (See: Predictive Past)

πρὸς τὸν Πατέρα μου, καὶ Πατέρα ὑμῶν, καὶ Θεόν μου, καὶ Θεὸν ὑμῶν

These two long phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize to whom Jesus will return. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “to God, who is my Father and your Father” (See: Doublet)

John 20:18

ἔρχεται

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ἔρχεται Μαριὰμ ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ

Your language may state “goes” rather than comes in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “Mary Magdalene goes” (See: Go and Come)

ἔρχεται Μαριὰμ ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ

John is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Mary Magdalene comes to where the disciples were staying” (See: Ellipsis)

John 20:19

τῇ μιᾷ σαββάτων

See how you translated the first of the week in verse 1. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τῇ μιᾷ σαββάτων

τῶν θυρῶν κεκλεισμένων ὅπου ἦσαν οἱ μαθηταὶ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the disciples having closed the doors of where they were” (See: Active or Passive)

διὰ τὸν φόβον τῶν Ἰουδαίων

See how you translated this phrase in 19:38. (See: Possession)

τῶν Ἰουδαίων

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in 1:19. (See: Synecdoche)

εἰρήνη ὑμῖν

This is an idiomatic expression, based on the Hebrew word and concept of “shalom.” It was both a greeting and a blessing. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I greet all of you and I wish for God to bless you” (See: Idiom)

John 20:20

ἔδειξεν τὰς χεῖρας καὶ τὴν πλευρὰν αὐτοῖς

John uses his hands to refer to the nail marks from crucifixion that were in Jesus’ hands. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he showed them the nail marks in his hands” (See: Metonymy)

τὴν πλευρὰν

John uses his side to refer to the wound that a Roman soldier made in Jesus’ side with a spear. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the spear wound in his side” (See: Metonymy)

ἰδόντες τὸν Κύριον

This could refer to: (1) the time when the disciples rejoiced, as in the UST. (2) the reason why the disciples rejoiced. Alternate translation: “because they saw the Lord” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

John 20:21

εἰρήνη ὑμῖν

See how you translated Peace to you in the previous verse. (See: Idiom)

Πατήρ

Father is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

καθὼς ἀπέσταλκέν με ὁ Πατήρ, κἀγὼ πέμπω ὑμᾶς

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “I send you just as the Father has sent me” (See: Information Structure)

ἀπέσταλκέν με…πέμπω ὑμᾶς

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “has sent me into the world … send you into the world” (See: Ellipsis)

John 20:22

ἐνεφύσησεν

When Jesus breathed on them, he did this symbolic action in order to show that he would give his disciples the Holy Spirit in the near future. If this would be helpful to your readers, you could explain its significance. Alternate translation: “he breathed on them as a symbolic action” or “he breathed on them to symbolically show that he was going to give them the Holy Spirit” (See: Symbolic Action)

ἐνεφύσησεν

Here, breathed on refers to Jesus blowing air out of his mouth. It does not refer to the normal act of inhaling and exhaling air into one’s lungs. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he blew air on them” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

John 20:23

ἀφέωνται αὐτοῖς

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will forgive them” (See: Active or Passive)

ἄν τινων κρατῆτε, κεκράτηνται

To retain sins means to not forgive someone for the sins that they have committed. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “whoever’s sins you might not forgive, they will not be forgiven” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

κεκράτηνται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will retain them” (See: Active or Passive)

John 20:24

Θωμᾶς

See how you translated the name Thomas in 11:16. (See: How to Translate Names)

τῶν δώδεκα

See how you translated the Twelve in 6:67. (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ὁ λεγόμενος Δίδυμος

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people called Didymus” (See: Active or Passive)

Δίδυμος

See how you translated Didymus in 11:16. (See: How to Translate Names)

John 20:25

ἐὰν μὴ ἴδω ἐν ταῖς χερσὶν αὐτοῦ τὸν τύπον τῶν ἥλων, καὶ βάλω τὸν δάκτυλόν μου εἰς τὸν τύπον τῶν ἥλων, καὶ βάλω μου τὴν χεῖρα εἰς τὴν πλευρὰν αὐτοῦ, οὐ μὴ πιστεύσω

If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “I will certainly not believe unless I see in his hands the mark of the nails and put my finger into the mark of the nails and put my hand into his side” (See: Information Structure)

If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “I will believe only if I see in his hands the mark of the nails and put my finger into the mark of the nails and put my hand into his side” (See: Double Negatives)

τὸν τύπον τῶν ἥλων

In both of these occurrences, Thomas is using of to describe mark made by nails. He is referring to the holes in Jesus’ hands that were made by the nails that soldiers used to crucify him. Alternate translation: “the marks made by nails … those marks” (See: Possession)

εἰς τὴν πλευρὰν αὐτοῦ

See how you translated his side in verse 20. (See: Metonymy)

οὐ μὴ πιστεύσω

Thomas is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “I will certainly not believe that Jesus has become alive again” (See: Ellipsis)

John 20:26

ἔρχεται

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

τῶν θυρῶν κεκλεισμένων

See how you translated this phrase in verse 19. (See: Active or Passive)

εἰρήνη ὑμῖν

See how you translated Peace to you in verse 19. (See: Idiom)

John 20:27

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ὧδε

Jesus uses here to refer to the places on his hands where there were holes. These holes in Jesus’ hands were made by the nails that soldiers used to crucify him. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in these holes” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὰς χεῖράς μου

Jesus uses my hands to refer to the holes in Jesus’ hands that were made by the nails that soldiers used to crucify him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the nail marks in my hands” (See: Metonymy)

τὴν πλευράν μου

Jesus uses my side to refer to the wound that a Roman soldier made in his side with a spear. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the spear wound in his side” (See: Metonymy)

μὴ γίνου ἄπιστος, ἀλλὰ πιστός

These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Jesus wants Thomas to believe that he has become alive again. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you absolutely must believe” (See: Doublet)

μὴ γίνου ἄπιστος, ἀλλὰ πιστός

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “do not be unbelieving that I have become alive again, but believe it” (See: Ellipsis)

John 20:29

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

πεπίστευκας…πιστεύσαντες

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “you have believed that I have become alive again … having believed that I have become alive again” (See: Ellipsis)

μακάριοι οἱ μὴ ἰδόντες

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God blesses those not having seen” (See: Active or Passive)

μὴ ἰδόντες

John 20:30

In verses 30–31 John comments about the story he has written in chapters 1 through 20. He also states his reason for writing this book. He does this in order to indicate that the story is almost finished. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: End of Story)

σημεῖα

See how you translated the term signs in 2:11. See also the discussion of signs in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracles”

ἃ οὐκ ἔστιν γεγραμμένα ἐν τῷ βιβλίῳ τούτῳ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since John wrote this Gospel, you should use the first person pronoun “I” to indicate who did the action. Alternate translation: “which I have not written in this book” (See: Active or Passive)

John 20:31

ταῦτα

Here, these things could mean: (1) the miraculous signs that John wrote about in his Gospel and mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “these signs” (2) everything that John wrote about in his Gospel. Alternate translation: “everything in this book” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ταῦτα δὲ γέγραπται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but the author wrote about these things” (See: Active or Passive)

πιστεύητε…ἔχητε

In this verse you is plural and could refer to: (1) people who are reading this Gospel and do not trust in Jesus for salvation. Alternate translation: “you might believe … you might have” (2) people who are reading this Gospel and already believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “you would continue believing … you would continue to have” (See: Forms of You)

Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ

Son of God is an important title for Jesus. (See: Translating Son and Father)

πιστεύοντες

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “believing that Jesus is the Christ” (See: Ellipsis)

ζωὴν

Here, life refers to eternal life. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. See the UST. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ

Here, in indicates the means by which people can have eternal life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of his name” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ

Here, his name could refer to: (1) Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “through union with him” or “by the power of his person” (2) calling on Jesus’ name for salvation. Alternate translation: “by calling on his name” (See: Synecdoche)

John 21

John 21 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

Jesus eats breakfast with his disciples (21:1–14)
Jesus restores Peter as his disciple (21:15–19)
Jesus and Peter speak about John (21:20–23)
John concludes his Gospel (21:24–25)

Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

The metaphor of sheep

Before Jesus died, he spoke of himself taking care of his people as if he were a good shepherd taking care of sheep (10:11). After he became alive again, Jesus commanded Peter to take care of other believers in the same way. (See: Metaphor)

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

“The disciple whom Jesus loved”

The apostle John referred to himself as the disciple “whom Jesus loved” twice in this chapter (21:7, 20). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. If this is the case, then you will need to use a first person pronoun for these references and the other references to John throughout this chapter. You would also need to use first person plural pronouns in this chapter for all references to the disciples as a group, since John was one of them. If your language can retain the third person references, then you may want to make these references to John explicit by adding “John” next to them. See the discussion of this in Part 1 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: John (the apostle) and First, Second or Third Person)

Different words for “love”

In verses 15–17, Jesus and Peter speak to each other using two different words in the original language that could both be translated as “love.” These words are often used interchangeably. However, when they are used together, as in verses 15–17, they can have slightly different meanings. One word can refer to a type of love that is based on affection and friendship, but the other word can refer to a type of love that is based on sincere devotion and high esteem for the person being loved. Although the UST translates both of these words as “love,” the notes will provide more specific alternatives.

John 21:1

μετὰ ταῦτα

θαλάσσης τῆς Τιβεριάδος

This Sea was also called “the Sea of Galilee.” See how you translated the similar name in 6:1. (See: How to Translate Names)

John 21:2

Verses 2–3 provide background information on what happens in the story before Jesus appears to his disciples at the Sea of Tiberias. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

Θωμᾶς ὁ λεγόμενος Δίδυμος

See how you translated this phrase in 11:16. (See: Active or Passive)

Κανὰ τῆς Γαλιλαίας

See how you translated Cana of Galilee in 2:1. (See: How to Translate Names)

οἱ τοῦ Ζεβεδαίου

This phrase refers to the disciples John and James, whom Jesus called “sons of thunder” in Mark 3:17. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “James and I, the sons of Zebedee” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Ζεβεδαίου

Zebedee is the name of a man. He was the father of the disciples John and James (Matthew 4:21). (See: How to Translate Names)

John 21:3

λέγει…λέγουσιν

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ἡμεῖς

When the disciples say we, they are speaking of themselves without Peter, so we would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἐρχόμεθα

Your language may state “going” rather than coming in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “are going” (See: Go and Come)

ἐνέβησαν εἰς τὸ πλοῖον

Here, got in a boat implies that they also took the boat out on the Sea of Tiberias in order to fish. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “got into a boat and went fishing” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 21:4

ἐστιν

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

John 21:5

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

παιδία

Here Jesus uses the word Children figuratively as an affectionate way to address his disciples. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “My dear friends” (See: Metaphor)

μή τι προσφάγιον ἔχετε?

Jesus asks this question in a way that expects a negative response. He knows that the disciples did not catch any fish. If your language has a question form that assumes a negative response, you should use it here. Alternate translation: “you were not able to get any fish to eat, were you?” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 21:6

εὑρήσετε

Here, some refers to fish. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you will find some fish” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 21:7

ὁ μαθητὴς ἐκεῖνος ὃν ἠγάπα ὁ Ἰησοῦς

This phrase refers to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. See the discussion of this phrase in Part 1 of the Introduction to the Gospel of John and the General Notes for this chapter. See also how you translated similar phrases in 13:23, 18:15, and 20:2. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

τὸν ἐπενδύτην διεζώσατο

Here, outer garment refers to a coat that would be worn over a person’s regular clothing. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “put on his cloak” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἦν γὰρ γυμνός

Here, undressed does not mean that Peter was naked. Rather, Peter had taken off his outer garment so that it would be easier for him to work. Now that he was about to greet Jesus, he wanted to wear more clothing. Alternate translation: “for he had taken off most of his clothes” (See: Background Information)

ἔβαλεν ἑαυτὸν εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν

This implies that Peter jumped into the sea in order to swim to the shore. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “threw himself into the sea and swam to shore” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 21:8

οὐ γὰρ ἦσαν μακρὰν ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς, ἀλλὰ ὡς ἀπὸ πηχῶν διακοσίων

Here John provides this background information about the location of the boat the disciples were fishing in. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “for the boat was near the land, only about 200 cubits away” (See: Background Information)

ἦσαν

If you translated “the disciple whom Jesus loved” in the previous verse with a first person form, then you will need to use the first person plural “we” here. You will also need to use first person plural pronouns in all occurrences of third person plural pronouns that refer to the disciples throughout the rest of this chapter. Alternate translation: “we were” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

πηχῶν διακοσίων

A cubit is a measurement of distance equivalent to a little less than half of one meter or about one yard. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. Alternate translation: “about 90 meters” or “about 100 yards” (See: Biblical Distance)

John 21:9

βλέπουσιν

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ἀνθρακιὰν κειμένην, καὶ ὀψάριον ἐπικείμενον

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a charcoal fire that Jesus had kindled, and a fish that Jesus had laid on it” (See: Active or Passive)

ὀψάριον ἐπικείμενον, καὶ ἄρτον

The words fish and breadare singular nouns. These could mean: (1) Jesus had one fish and one loaf of bread, as in the UST. (2) Jesus had an unknown amount of fish and bread that are referred to collectively. Alternate translation: “some fish laid on it, and some bread loaves” (See: Collective Nouns)

John 21:10

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

John 21:11

ἀνέβη οὖν Σίμων Πέτρος

Here, went up means that Simon Peter went back to the boat. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Simon Peter went up into the boat” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὐκ ἐσχίσθη τὸ δίκτυον

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the fish did not tear the net” (See: Active or Passive)

John 21:12

λέγει…ἐστιν

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ἐξετάσαι αὐτόν, σὺ τίς εἶ

If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “to ask him who he is” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

John 21:13

ἔρχεται…λαμβάνει…δίδωσιν

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

John 21:14

τρίτον

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “time number 3.” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

ἐφανερώθη

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “showed himself” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God having raised him from the dead” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν

Here, raised from the dead is an idiom that refers to a dead person becoming alive again. See how you translated a similar phrase in 20:9. Alternate translation: “having become alive after he died” (See: Idiom)

John 21:15

λέγει…λέγει…λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ἀγαπᾷς με…φιλῶ σε

The two occurrences of love in this verse are two different words in the original language. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this in your translation. See the discussion of this concept in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “do you love me with great esteem … I love you with affection” or “do you love me deeply… I love you like a friend” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πλέον τούτων

Here, these could refer to: (1) the other disciples who were there with Jesus and Peter. This meaning would indicate Jesus is asking Peter if he loves Jesus more than the other disciples love him. Alternate translation: “more than these disciples love me” (2) the fish, boat, and other equipment that were used for catching fish, which was Peter’s former job. Alternate translation: “more than these fishing tools” or “more than your former job” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

βόσκε τὰ ἀρνία μου

Jesus uses Feed my lambs figuratively to refer to providing for the spiritual needs of people who trust in Jesus. Here Jesus is commanding Peter to take care of other believers in the same way that Jesus took care of them while he was with them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “Take care of the people who believe in me like a shepherd feeds lambs” (See: Metaphor)

John 21:16

λέγει…λέγει…λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

δεύτερον

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “time number 2.” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

ἀγαπᾷς με…φιλῶ σε

The two occurrences of love in this verse are two different words in the original language. See how you translated these phrases in the previous verse. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ποίμαινε τὰ πρόβατά μου

This sentence has the same meaning as “Feed my lambs” in the previous verse. See how you translated that similar sentence there. Alternate translation: “Take care of the people who believe in me like a shepherd takes care of lambs” (See: Metaphor)

John 21:17

λέγει…λέγει…λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

τὸ τρίτον…τὸ τρίτον

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “time number 3 … time number 3.” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

φιλεῖς με…φιλεῖς με…φιλῶ σε

The three occurrences of love in this verse are all the same word in the original language. However, this word is different from the word Jesus used for love in the previous two verses when he asked Peter, “Do you love me?” You should use the same word for love in this verse that you used for Peter’s responses in the previous two verses when he said, “You know that I love you.” See the discussion of this concept in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “do you love me with affection … Do you love me with affection … I love you with affection” or “do you love me like a friend … Do you love me like a friend … I love you like a friend” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

εἶπεν αὐτῷ τὸ τρίτον, φιλεῖς με

If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “he asked him the third time if he loved him” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

βόσκε τὰ προβάτια μου

This sentence has the same meaning as “Feed my lambs” in verse 15 and “Take care of my sheep” in the previous verse. See how you translated those similar sentences in the previous two verses. Alternate translation: “Take care of the people who believe in me like a shepherd feeds sheep” (See: Metaphor)

John 21:18

ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω σοι

Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in 1:51. (See: Doublet)

ἐζώννυες σεαυτὸν…ζώσει σε

Although gird means to put on a belt, Jesus uses it figuratively in this verse to refer to putting on clothes. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you used to dress yourself … will dress you” (See: Metonymy)

ἐκτενεῖς τὰς χεῖράς σου

Here, stretch out means to extend one’s hands away from one’s sides. This describes the posture of someone who is being crucified. It does not mean that the hands themselves stretch. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you will extend your hands out from your sides” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 21:19

τοῦτο δὲ εἶπεν σημαίνων ποίῳ θανάτῳ δοξάσει τὸν Θεόν

Now here indicates that in this sentence John is giving background information in order to explain what Jesus said in the previous verse. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ἀκολούθει μοι

See how you translated the phrase Follow me in 1:43. (See: Idiom)

John 21:20

βλέπει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

τὸν μαθητὴν ὃν ἠγάπα ὁ Ἰησοῦς

This phrase refers to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. See the discussion of this phrase in Part 1 of the Introduction to the Gospel of John and the General Notes for this chapter. See also how you translated similar phrases in 13:23, 18:15, 20:2, and 21:7. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀκολουθοῦντα

If your language marks the dual form, then the pronoun them here would be in the dual form. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐν τῷ δείπνῳ

John here refers to the dinner Jesus had with his disciples on the night before he was crucified. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the last dinner they had together before Jesus died” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Κύριε, τίς ἐστιν, ὁ παραδιδούς σε

See how you translated the similar sentence in 13:25.

John 21:21

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

Κύριε, οὗτος δὲ τί

Peter implies that he wants to know what will happen to John in the future. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Lord, what will happen to this one?” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

John 21:22

λέγει

Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: Predictive Past)

ἐὰν αὐτὸν θέλω μένειν

Here, him refers to John, the “disciple whom Jesus loved” in John 21:20. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἔρχομαι

Jesus uses come here to refer to the time in the future when he will return to earth from heaven. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I come back to this world” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τί πρὸς σέ?

Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to mildly rebuke Peter. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “that has nothing to do with you” (See: Rhetorical Question)

μοι ἀκολούθει

See how you translated this sentence in 1:43. (See: Idiom)

John 21:23

οὗτος ὁ λόγος

Here, this word refers to what the brothers say about John’s future in the next clause. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the following report about John’s future” (See: Metonymy)

ἐξῆλθεν…οὗτος ὁ λόγος

John uses spread figuratively to refer to this word being repeated among the believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this word was repeated” (See: Metaphor)

τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς

Although the term brothers is masculine, John is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “the fellow believers” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

ὁ μαθητὴς ἐκεῖνος

Here, that disciple refers to the apostle John. If this might confuse your readers, you could state that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὐκ ἀποθνῄσκει…ὅτι οὐκ ἀποθνῄσκει

John is using the present tense in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. If this might confuse your readers, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “will not die … that he will not die” (See: Predictive Past)

αὐτῷ

The pronoun him here refers to Peter. If this might confuse your readers, you could state that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ὅτι οὐκ ἀποθνῄσκει…αὐτὸν

The pronouns he and him here refer to John. If this might confuse your readers, you could state that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐὰν αὐτὸν θέλω μένειν ἕως ἔρχομαι, τί πρὸς σέ

See how you translated this sentence in the previous verse.

John 21:24

In verses 24–25 John indicates the end of his Gospel by giving a closing comment about himself and what he has written in this book. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story.(See: End of Story)

οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ μαθητὴς ὁ μαρτυρῶν περὶ τούτων, καὶ ὁ γράψας ταῦτα, καὶ οἴδαμεν ὅτι ἀληθὴς αὐτοῦ ἡ μαρτυρία ἐστίν

In this verse John is speaking about himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “I am the disciple who testifies about these things and who wrote these things, and we know that my testimony is true” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

τούτων…ταῦτα

In this verse, these things refers to everything that John has written in this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “everything in this book … all these things” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οἴδαμεν

Here the pronoun we is exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

οἴδαμεν

Here, we could refer to: (1) John and the other eyewitnesses to the earthly life of Jesus, as in 1:14 and 1 John 1:2–7. Alternate translation: “We eyewitnesses of Jesus’ life know” (2) the elders in the church at Ephesus where John lived at the end of his life. Alternate translation: “We elders of the church at Ephesus know” However, since who we refers to is uncertain, it would be best not to explain the meaning further. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

John 21:25

ἐὰν γράφηται καθ’ ἕν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if someone wrote down each one” (See: Active or Passive)

οὐδ’ αὐτὸν…τὸν κόσμον χωρήσειν τὰ γραφόμενα βιβλία

John exaggerates to emphasize that Jesus did very many good things. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your language to show this emphasis. Alternate translation: “a very large amount of books about these miracles would be written” (See: Hyperbole)

τὸν κόσμον

Here, the world refers to either the surface of the earth or the universe. Either meaning would achieve John’s purpose. If your language does not have a general expression for world, you could use an alternate expression. Alternate translation: “the whole earth” or “the whole universe” (See: Metonymy)

τὰ γραφόμενα βιβλία

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the books that someone would write” (See: Active or Passive)

open-licensed biblical content

John

John front

Introduction to the Gospel of John

Part 1: General Introduction

Outline of the Gospel of John

What is the Gospel of John about?

How should the title of this book be translated?

Who wrote the Gospel of John?

Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

Why does John write so much about the final week of Jesus’ life?

Part 3: Important Translation Issues

Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?

What does the word “sign” mean in the Gospel of John?

What do the words “remain,” “reside,” and “abide” mean in the Gospel of John?

What is double meaning in the Gospel of John?

What are the major issues in the text of the Gospel of John?

John 1

John 1 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

Special Concepts in this Chapter

“The Word”

Light and Darkness

“Children of God”

Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

Metaphors

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

“In the beginning”

“Son of Man”

John 1:1

John 1:2

John 1:3

John 1:4

John 1:5

John 1:6

John 1:7

John 1:8

John 1:9

John 1:10

John 1:11

John 1:12

John 1:13

John 1:14

John 1:15

John 1:16

John 1:17

John 1:18

John 1:19

John 1:20

John 1:21

John 1:22

John 1:23

John 1:24

John 1:25

John 1:26

John 1:27

John 1:28

John 1:29

John 1:30

John 1:31

John 1:32

John 1:33

John 1:34

John 1:35

John 1:36

John 1:37

John 1:38

John 1:39

John 1:40

John 1:41

John 1:42

John 1:43

John 1:44

John 1:45

John 1:46

John 1:47

John 1:48

John 1:49

John 1:50

John 1:51